Altivar 1000
Programming manual
Retain for future use
IGBT voltage source inverter
3300 V
1300 - 14400 kVA
Contents
1.
2.
Scope................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
Product Identification and Safety Rules.............................................................................................................................................. 2
2.1.
Product Identification..................................................................................................................................................................... 2
2.2.
Incorporation Rules ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2
2.3.
Cautionary Plates on Cabinet Front Doors .................................................................................................................................... 3
2.4.
Safety and Warning Symbols ........................................................................................................................................................ 5
3.
Inverter Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6
3.1.
General ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.2.
Inverter Regulation Principles ....................................................................................................................................................... 6
4.
5.
Inverter Programming Overview......................................................................................................................................................... 9
Menu System and Programming Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 10
5.1.
Menu System .............................................................................................................................................................................. 10
5.2.
Advanced Keypad ....................................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.3.
Personal Computer Interface ...................................................................................................................................................... 19
5.4.
Trace Visualization...................................................................................................................................................................... 25
6.
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
7.
Programming Levels and Motor Control Modes ............................................................................................................................... 28
Programming Levels ................................................................................................................................................................... 28
How to Change the Programming Levels.................................................................................................................................... 28
Motor Control Modes................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Factory Setting (Parameters Default Values) .............................................................................................................................. 34
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure .................................................................................................................................... 35
Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure Description .............................................................................................................................. 35
Quick Motor Start-Up Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 38
Quick Motor Start-Up Operation with Keypad.............................................................................................................................. 39
Quick Motor Start-Up Operation with PC Interface...................................................................................................................... 41
Digital and Analog I/O ................................................................................................................................................................. 46
Control Board Terminals ............................................................................................................................................................. 47
8.
LEVEL 2 – Basic System Applications ............................................................................................................................................. 48
8.1.
V/Hz Basic Application Start-Up.................................................................................................................................................. 48
8.2.
Sensorless (SLS) or Field Oriented Control (FOC) Basic Application Start-Up ........................................................................... 52
8.3.
Basic Application Start-Up (Functions for all Control Modes) ...................................................................................................... 54
8.4.
Parameters tables ....................................................................................................................................................................... 54
9.
LEVEL 3 – Advanced System Applications ...................................................................................................................................... 55
9.1.
V/Hz Advanced Applications Start-Up ......................................................................................................................................... 55
9.2.
Advanced System Applications Start-Up - Sensorless or Field Oriented Control ........................................................................ 59
9.3.
Advanced Application Start-Up – Settings for All Controls .......................................................................................................... 64
9.4.
Parameters Tables...................................................................................................................................................................... 65
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions) .................................................................................................................. 66
10.1.
Speed Demand Set-Up .......................................................................................................................................................... 67
10.2.
Preset Speeds ....................................................................................................................................................................... 71
10.3.
Digital Potentiometer.............................................................................................................................................................. 72
10.4.
Speed Command Loss........................................................................................................................................................... 73
10.5.
Critical Speed Avoidance ....................................................................................................................................................... 73
10.6.
Ramps ................................................................................................................................................................................... 74
10.7.
VDC Rollback......................................................................................................................................................................... 77
10.8.
Current Rollback (V/HZ)......................................................................................................................................................... 78
10.9.
Motor overload Protection ...................................................................................................................................................... 79
10.10.
Free Run Stop........................................................................................................................................................................ 80
10.11.
Auto Reset & Restart ............................................................................................................................................................. 80
10.12.
HOA / Pulsed Start Stop ........................................................................................................................................................ 81
10.13.
Auto ON/OFF ......................................................................................................................................................................... 85
10.14.
VDC Undervoltage Prevention / Ride Through (V/Hz, SLS, FOC).......................................................................................... 87
10.15.
Flying Restart (V/Hz).............................................................................................................................................................. 87
10.16.
Flying Restart (SLS)............................................................................................................................................................... 88
10.17.
Energy Saver (SLS, FOC)...................................................................................................................................................... 89
10.18.
PID Regulator (V/HZ, SLS, FOC)........................................................................................................................................... 90
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions) ........................................................................................................ 91
11.1.
DC Braking (V/Hz) ................................................................................................................................................................. 92
11.2.
Current Oscillations Compensation (V/Hz) ............................................................................................................................. 93
11.3.
Jog ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 94
11.4.
Speed External Limits ............................................................................................................................................................ 94
11.5.
Underload .............................................................................................................................................................................. 95
11.6.
Loss of Output Phase............................................................................................................................................................. 95
11.7.
V/Hz Curve Optimization(V/Hz).............................................................................................................................................. 95
11.8.
Emergency Stop .................................................................................................................................................................... 96
11.9.
Master-Slave Configuration “Helper” (FOC) ........................................................................................................................... 97
11.10.
Torque Control (SLS, FOC).................................................................................................................................................... 99
11.11.
Torque Limits Control (SLS, FOC) ........................................................................................................................................100
11.12.
Motor Stall (SLS, FOC) .........................................................................................................................................................102
11.13.
Speed Deviation....................................................................................................................................................................102
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.
11.14.
Torque Overboost (SLS) .......................................................................................................................................................103
11.15.
Trace Settings.......................................................................................................................................................................104
11.16.
Analog Input User Trip/Alarm ................................................................................................................................................106
11.17.
Application Specific Functions...............................................................................................................................................108
12. I/O configuration..............................................................................................................................................................................123
12.1.
Digital Input Configuration .....................................................................................................................................................123
Analog Input Configuration..............................................................................................................................................................126
12.2. ......................................................................................................................................................................................................126
12.3.
Functions ..............................................................................................................................................................................130
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................133
13.1.
Inverter Trips, Alarms and Reset...........................................................................................................................................133
13.2.
Fault/Alarm Log.....................................................................................................................................................................134
13.3.
Real Time Clock....................................................................................................................................................................134
13.4.
Monitor Variables ..................................................................................................................................................................152
14. Appendix A: Programming Level 1 - Parameters ............................................................................................................................169
14.1.
Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................................................169
14.2.
Parameters List.....................................................................................................................................................................170
15. Appendix B: Programming Levels 1 and 2 - Parameters.................................................................................................................172
15.1.
Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................................................172
16. Appendix C: Programming Level 1, 2 and 3 - Parameters ..............................................................................................................180
16.1.
Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................................................180
17. APPENDIX D: Input Configuration for Operating Functions ............................................................................................................196
17.1.
Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................................................196
17.2.
D.2 Parameter......................................................................................................................................................................196
18. APPENDIX E Default Values ..........................................................................................................................................................197
18.1.
Parameters Default Values ...................................................................................................................................................197
18.2.
Overload Class Select...........................................................................................................................................................198
18.3.
Switching Frequency Change ...............................................................................................................................................200
19. Appendix F: Inverter Variables Refresh Time..................................................................................................................................201
19.1.
Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................................................201
19.2.
Variables Refresh Time.........................................................................................................................................................201
19.3.
Fast Variables Management .................................................................................................................................................203
20. Appendix G: Menu System Flow Chart ...........................................................................................................................................205
3
1. Scope
Scope of this manual is to provide inverter programming instructions for Altivar 1000 Medium Voltage Variable Speed Electrical Drives.
This manual, together with the other manuals and drawings here listed, is part of the equipment and is to be stored in a safe and easilyretrievable place for the whole lifetime of Altivar 1000. This documents are to be available to technicians servicing the equipment since
contain safety, access and service rules, and complete maintenance and programming instructions.
Altivar 1000 is a configurable equipment built on job specifics needs by assembling standard basic cabinets. Manuals are the same and
apply to all models and types, electrical schematic diagrams and mechanical drawings are specific for each installation and job.
Only actions described in these manuals shall be performed on equipment. Neither other action, measurement or change of any type shall
be carried out.
Standard set of documents for Altivar 1000 equipments consists of :
•
Altivar 1000
Safety and Installation Manual
•
Altivar 1000
Maintenance Manual
•
Electric and Electronic Equipment (Boards)
General Operation and Maintenance Manual
•
Altivar 1000
Programming Manual (this manual)
•
Altivar 1000
Active Front End Programming Manual
•
Altivar 1000
Cooling System Use and Maintenance Manual
•
Altivar 1000
Electric schematic diagrams, job-specific (code different from job to job)
1
2. Product Identification and Safety Rules
2.1.
Product Identification
This manual provides instructions about the IGBT Medium Voltage Variable Speed Electrical Drives designed and manufactured by
Schneider Toshiba Inverter Europe and identified by the product family name Altivar 1000 with power range from 1300 to 14400 kVA.
Related European and International Product Standard is CEI EN 61800-xx group. According to this group of Standards, Altivar 1000 is
defined as a subsystem of an Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive System [PDS] and, more precisely, the part of PDS defined as
Complete Drive Module [CDM].
2.2.
Incorporation Rules
According to EU Machinery Directive 98/37/EC and 2006/42/EC, or outside EU applicable laws, this equipment is not a complete machine
and it shall be incorporated into a system before to be operated.
The Altivar 1000 is part of an installation consisting of other different equipments and machines grouped to form a system. All the
functional safety relating functions needed by the system shall be guaranteed by the System Integrator.
The Altivar 1000 shall be installed according to this manual and cannot be operated until the system (machinery), in which is incorporated,
has been declared complying with the “Machinery Directive 98/37/EC and 2006/42/EC” or other local applicable laws.
It has been noted that Altivar 1000 alone shall not be CE marked since it is a part of an installation consisting of other different
equipments and machines.
2
2. Product Identification and Safety Rules
2.3. Cautionary Plates on Cabinet Front Doors
CAUTION DANGER !
RISK OF DEATH OR ELECTRIC SHOCK
MAINTENANCE SHALL BE PERFORMED EXCLUSIVELY BY AUTHORIZED SKILLED
PERSONNEL
MORE THAN ONE POWER SUPPLY IS CONNECTED TO THE EQUIPMENT
LETHAL VOLTAGES CAN EXIST EVEN IF ALL SUPPLIES ARE DISCONNECTED.
WAIT 10 MINUTES BEFORE STARTING THE EARTHING SAFETY PROCEDURE
MAINTENANCE ON THIS CABINET SHALL BE PERFORMED STRICTLY FOLLOWING
THE INSTRUCTIONS SPECIFIED IN THE USER MANUALS
Standard cautionary plate on cabinet doors
3
2. Product Identification and Safety Rules
2.3.1. Safety and Cautionary Mandatory Rules
CAUTION! DANGER!
RISK OF DEATH, ELECTRIC SHOCK, HEAVY INJURIES TO PERSONNEL
RISK OF FIRE AND/OR DAMAGES TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR TO THE SYSTEM
It is mandatory to fully understand and strictly apply all Safety and Cautionary Rules listed in the SILCOVERT-TN 3300 V - Safety and
Installation Manual (PMPCAATV E 2521);
see in particular Chapter 2 about :
- Functional Safety Hazard
- Operator Mandatory Skill
- Hazard on Accessing ATV 3300V Cabinets
- Risk to Inappropriate Use and Connection
- Minimal Safety Integration Requirements.
It is mandatory to fully understand and strictly apply all Safety Rules according to local laws and all safety site regulations.
4
2. Product Identification and Safety Rules
2.4.
Safety and Warning Symbols
This manual contains different cautionary statements:
DANGER !
Warns against actions that can lead to hazardous scenarios, risk of death or electrical shock. Highlights
some hazardous situations that can arise during maintenance operations.
WARNING!
Procedures that must be strictly followed or operating modes that shall not be applied: highlights the risk
of damaging the parts of the equipment.
NOTE
Relates to a clarification about instructions, repair operation or any other subject.
Dangerous scenarios are highlighted using the following symbols:
Risk of death, fire or heavy injuries
The job requires the personnel is skilled for the purpose, well aware of safety rules, regulations and
standards while operating on Medium Voltage Equipments. Full knowledge of installation power supply
system and ATV 3300V diagrams is needed.
Risk of death, electric shock or heavy injuries
The job requires the personnel is skilled for the purpose, well aware of safety rules, regulations and
standards while operating on Medium Voltage Equipments. Full knowledge of installation power supply
system and ATV 3300V diagrams is needed.
5
3. Inverter Operation
3.1.
General
A Voltage Source Inverter is a power electronic equipment able to supply an asynchronous motor with proper variable voltage and
frequency in order to control shaft speed and torque according to the requirements.
The following picture shows the typical base configuration for SILCOVERT-TN Medium Voltage NPC (Neutral Point Clamped) Voltage
Source Inverter:
3.2.
Inverter Regulation Principles
The speed of an asynchronous motor is determined by the pole number (p) and by the supply voltage frequency (f). The magnetic field
produced by the stator windings of the motor by the supply voltage, rotates at a speed given by the following formula:
N = 120 f/p
[1]
This rotating field brings the rotor to rotate at almost the same speed; the speed difference between the field and the rotor is defined as
the motor slip.
According to [1], the motor speed is proportional to the supply frequency; the speed control actuated by the inverter is based on this
principle.
3.2.1. Scalar Control (V/Hz Control)
The principle of this control is based on the fact that the voltage frequency ratio is proportional to the motor flux; a constant flux means to
have a constant torque available on all the speed range. From this consideration it is deduced that besides the frequency also the voltage
must change. The inverter output voltage is so maintained proportional to the frequency following the relation:
V = Vn (f/fn)
[2]
V [v]
Vn
fn
f [Hz]
Vn and fn are the motor rated values. The previous formula is the only followed by the open loop control.
3.2.2. Field Oriented Vector Control
The vector control or Field Oriented Control (FOC) is a closed loop control based on the decomposition in two orthogonal components of
the stator current so that:
One component is proportional to the rotor flux (isd component or direct current).
One component is proportional to the motor torque (Isq component or quadrature current)
in this way it is possible to regulate independently the flux and the torque of the asynchronous motor.
The FOC control requires the feedback from a speed and position transducer (incremental encoder) on the motor shaft.
6
3.
Inverter Operation
The following picture shows a simplified block diagram of the vector control.
Speed
Ref.
Torque
Ref
PI
+
-
Spee
d
K
Isq Ref
Flux
Reference
Isq
-
Speed feedback
Vsq
PI
+
dq
Isq
PI
+
-
Isd Ref
flux
flux
123
PI
+
-
V1
V2
V3
Vsd
Isd
Isd
The vector control (FOC) performances are:
•
•
•
Accurate motor flux and torque control
Accurate speed regulation
High dynamic performances control
3.2.3. Sensorless Vector Control (SLS)
The Sensorless Vector Control (SLS) is also a closed loop control like the FOC able to regulate motor speed, torque and flux without the
use on an incremental encoder. Due to the absence of the encoder, the speed is estimated by a proper algorithm. For this reason
accuracy and dynamic performances are not so high as in FOC control.
3.2.4. Operating Sequences
The following picture resumes the machine operation sequences and the commands which regulate the transition between the different
status:
7
3.
Inverter Operation
The following precharge procedure is referred to the DFE configuration only.
•
With Auxiliary supply ON and Drive Enable OFF (DrvEnable in the picture above), the converter is in “idle” status. Main Circuit
Breaker is open and there’s no voltage on the DC bus (or DC Bus can be in discharge phase).
•
The Drive Enable command closes the main contactor breaker and starts the precharge of the DC bus;
•
As the DC voltage reaches a set threshold (and after a factory delay time), the “PrechargeOK” signal is asserted by the control
through a relay output on the interface board. This command turns on the thyristor bridge.
•
After the precharge , the control changes to the “ready” status
•
•
•
In ready status the d.c. bus is charged with a voltage corresponding to the rectified voltage due to the free-wheeling diodes of
the line side converter (Vdc = 1,35 · Vac_rms).
The Start command activates the firing of the IGBTs, converter reaches the “run” status. The speed is increased up to the active
reference value.
If any protection occurs, the converter is switched off and the control reached the “protection” status and then, after a reset
command, the “idle” status.
The following table resumes the machine operation status displayed on PC tool and Advanced keypad
Status
Idle
Precharge
and
thyristor
bridge
command
Ready
Run
Protection
Description
Control auxiliary supply present and Drive Enable OFF
Precharge Closing of the Main circuit breaker and Precharge of DC Bus starting.
Maincdelay As the d.c. voltage reaches the 80% of 1.35 multiplied for RMS line voltage, the control waits a
delay time before giving the ‘Precharge OK’ signal on the relay output on the interface board
Elcdelay
Status in which the control checks the turning on of the thyristor bridge (timeout 2s)
The DC Bus is charged with a voltage corresponding to the rectified voltage due to the freewheeling diodes of the converter.
The converter is activated. The speed is increased up to the active reference value.
The converter is switched off.
The following precharge procedure is referred to the AFE configuration only.
•
With Auxiliary supply ON and Drive Enable OFF (DrvEnable in the picture above), the converter is in “idle” status. Main Circuit
Breaker is open and there’s no voltage on the DC bus (or DC Bus can be in discharge phase).
•
The Drive Enable command starts the precharge of the DC bus. This operation is always necessary before closing the Main
Circuit Breaker.
•
As the DC voltage reaches a set threshold (after the delay set through parameter [11.12]), the “PrechargeOK” signal is asserted
by the control through a relay output on the interface board. the Main Circuit Breaker is closed.
•
After contactor closing, the control changes to the “ready” status after the delay set through parameter [11.13].
•
In ready status if Active Front End Converter is OFF, the d.c. bus is charged with a voltage corresponding to the rectified voltage
due to the free-wheeling diodes of the line side converter (Vdc = 1,35 · Vac_rms). If Active Front End Converter is running the
d.c. bus is charged with a voltage corresponding to AFE Converter settings. (See Active Front End Programming Manual P MP
CA ATV E 2559).
•
After the AFE is running it is possible to give the Start command in order to activate the firing of the IGBTs; the converter
reaches the “run” status. The speed is increased up to the active reference value.
•
If any protection occurs, the converter is switched off and the control reached the “protection” status and then, after a reset
command, the “idle” status.
The following table resumes the machine operation status displayed on PC tool and Advanced keypad
Status
Idle
Precharge
and main
circuit
breaker
command
Ready
Run
Protection
8
Description
Control auxiliary supply present and Drive Enable OFF
Precharge Precharge of DC Bus through auxiliary precharge circuit (Main circuit breaker is Open) (if AFE
configuration).
Maincdelay As the d.c. voltage reaches the 80% of 1.35 multiplied for RMS line voltage, the control waits a
delay time ([11.12]) before giving the ‘Precharge OK’ signal on the relay output on the interface
board
Elcdelay
Status in which the control checks the closing of the main circuit breaker (timeout 2s)
After the time set by [11.13], the converted is in ready. The DC Bus is charged with a voltage
corresponding to the AFE Vdc reference (if Afe is running) or to the rectified voltage due to the
free-wheeling diodes of the converter.
The converter is activated. The speed is increased up to the active reference value.
The converter is switched off.
4. Inverter Programming Overview
DRIVE PROGRAMMING
WITH WHAT TOOL
HOW TO USE IT
WHAT NEEDS TO BE
PROGRAMMED
USER
Keypad or PC
Menu Navigation
•
•
Programming Levels
Motor Control Modes
First Level
Chapter 7
F
APPLICATION
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Second Level
Chapter 8
Third Level
Chapter 9
All parameters
V/Hz-----------SLS-----------FOC
Application macros
ew parameters
List of
parameters
and their
meaning
Standard Macros
Parameters list
and their meanings
Charter 10
I/O configuration
Application Macros
Parameter list and
their meanings
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Protections - Diagnostics - Troubleshooting Chapter 13
Param. List Lev.1
Appendix A
Param. List Lev.2
Appendix B
Param. List Lev.3
Appendix C
Input configurations for operating functions Appendix D
Default values
Variables refresh time
Appendix E
Appendix F
9
5. Menu System and Programming Tools
5.1.
Menu System
Parameters are organized within a structure referred as “Menu System” with different menus and families: within the Menu System three
different programming levels are available that allow the user to easily access an increasing number of functions, macros and parameters
according to the requirements of the application. Through the programming tools described in this chapter the operator can quickly and
easily navigate through menus and families and access to parameters for viewing and editing
The Menu System Flow Chart is represented on Appendix G.
Te parameters menus are:
−
Motor Menu
−
Drive Menu
−
Stability Menu
−
Auto Menu
−
Logs Control
−
Protection Menu
−
Communication Menu
The following table shows the three levels and the corresponding menus and families:
1st Programming level
Quick start-up
10
Menu System
2nd Programming level
Basic Application
3rd Programming level
Advanced Application
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
5.2.
Advanced Keypad
5.2.1. General
The Advanced keypad AF consists of 4 arrow keys, 6
function keys and 10 numeric/short-cut keys and permits a
faster access to menus and parameters and an easier
access to parameter values.
Figure 5-1. Advanced keypad AF
Keys and LEDs description
ON
LED
FAULT
LED
RUN
LED
STOP
KEY
MAN/START
AUTO
KEY
KEY
RESET
KEY
ENTER
KEY
CANCEL
KEY
SHIFT
KEY
ATV ready (precharge completed)
flashes when drive is in local mode.
comes on if one or more trips have occurred.
flashes if there are one or more alarms.
comes on when ATV is running. It flashes when the Vdc is greater than the breaking chopper threshold.
decelerates motor in a controlled manner until it stops
Is active as in manual as in auto mode
sets drive to manual mode or starts the drive from local *
sets ATV to auto mode: start command and speed reference are received from an external source **
clears faults
tests led for faults
acknowledges alarms
selects a submenu or parameter
enters edit mode for a selected parameter
accepts a new value in edit mode
returns to the monitor page
rejects every modification to parameter values in edit mode
gives access to the second group of functions.
must be pressed before pressing the desired function keys (e.g. shift + 9 gives access to the
Communication Menu)
*MAN:
This key has two functions, it changes the control mode from remote to local and, in local mode, with drive Ready (pre-charge
completed), starts the drive. If the control mode is changed, a prompt comes in view requesting confirmation and “ENTER”
must be pressed to confirm. The change from remote to local can be done whichever is the drive status, if the change is done
with the drive in Run (drive runnung) the motor wil be stopped with controlled deceleration. In local mode the speed reference
is set by use of the keypad up and down arrow keys or setting a numeric value through the Speed_ref variable.
**AUTO:
This key can transfer control mode from remote to local and viceversa. If control mode is changed, a prompt comes in view
requesting confirmation. “ENTER” must be pressed to confirm.
In manual remote mode with drive pre-charged, ATV is started through the digital input provided and speed reference comes
from an analog input or the motor potentiometer (UP/DOWN digital inputs). The change from local to remote can be done
whichever is the drive status, if the change is made with the drive in Run (drive running) the drive will continue to run or will
stop the motor according to the status of the digital input set for this function.
11
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
5.2.2. Connection
The keypad is connected to ATV via a serial link.
When the keypad is first connected to a drive, it loads and saves the parameters information to create an internal image of inverter menu
system. When the keypad is connected to a drive that contains the same release, it will be immediately ready for operation; Vice versa the
keypad loads the inverter parameters information.
Arrow Keys Operation
Key combination
Description
Navigates through the menu system
Changes the active digit of a parameter value when in edit mode
Displays the highlight bar when in monitor mode
Navigates through the menu system
Changes the active digit of a parameter value when in edit mode
or
Scrolls through the lists of menu options and parameters
Changes speed reference (from default meter display)
Increases/decreases parameter values (when in edit mode)
Enters security code (a code of 4 digits, 0 thru 9).
Enters id number or id parameter in “numerical menu access" mode
Highlights monitor parameter when in monitor mode and the highlight bar is shown
Enter the “numerical access menu”. The operator is then prompted to enter the id number for the menu
or associated parameter
Jump to the top of the currently selected menu or submenu
Jump to the bottom of the currently selected menu or submenu
Jump to the bottom of the currently selected menu or submenu
These keys allow navigation through the menu structure
Right arrow key: from drive status screen to menu list screen
Left arrow key:
from menu list screen to drive status screen
Up and down arrow keys:
Navigation inside a menu or parameter list
Modification of parameter value
Changes the contrast: whit "reset " key and arrows up or down
To lock the keypad press the “shift” key for more than 3 seconds and only while the following message
is visualized: press enter to lock the keypad press the “enter” key and displayed loched
To unlock the keypad press a key and only while the following message is visualized: locked! Press
enter to unlock the keypad press the “enter” key and display unlocked.
Notes:
12
a.
When editing parameter values, all four digits are used. Smaller values will have leading
zeros. For example, to change the value of a 4-digit parameter from 1234 to 975, the
operator must enter 0975.
b.
In the case of signed parameters, the first active digit is the sign. The sign is changed by
using the up [
] and down [
] arrow keys when the leftmost (sign) position of the value is
underlined (i.e., it is the active “digit”). Positive values are displayed without the “+” sign.
Negative values always show the “-” sign.
c.
For numbers with a decimal part, the decimal point is in a fixed position.
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
5.2.3. Shortcut Menu
The SHIFT enables the second function of the numerical keys. The SHIFT key must be pressed before pressing the desired function key
(an indication of SHIFT enabled appears on the display). The following table shows the keys combination.
Key combination
SHIFT
+
MOTOR
1
Description
SHORTCUT TO THE MOTOR
MENU [1]
SHIFT
+
DRIVE
2
SHORTCUT TO THE DRIVE
MENU
SHIFT
+
STAB
3
[2]
SHORTCUT TO THE STABILITY
MENU [3]
SHIFT
+
AUTO
4
SHIFT
+
MAIN
5
Key combination
SHIFT
+
LOGS
6
Description
SHORTCUT TO THE LOGS
CONTROL MENU [6]
SHIFT
+
DrPro
7
SHORTCUT TO THE PROTECTION
MENU [7]
SHIFT
+
METER
8
SHORTCUT TO THE METER MENU
[8]
SHORTCUT TO THE AUTO MENU
[4]
SHIFT
+
COMM
9
SHORTCUT TO THE
COMMUNICATIONS MENU [9]
SHORTCUT TO THE MAIN MENU
[5]
SHIFT
+
HELP
0
SHORTCUT TO CONTEXTSENSITIVE HELP
Menu System Navigation
Parameters are organized in logical groups within the menu system. To view or edit parameters, the operator must select the parameters
through the menu system. Figures 5.2 and 5.3 show the key sequences and methods to navigate within the menu system.
The primary mode for keypads IF and HF is the monitor mode.
To enter the menu system from the monitor mode
To scroll through the available parameters/submenus (immediately after entering the menu system)
To select a parameter/submenu
To return to a previous menu or the monitor screen (from the main or sequential menu)
After a parameter is selected for modification, or to highlight items within pick lists, or to change
numeric values
To change the active digit (it is underlined) within edit fields
To change parameter values within edit fields
To update the selected parameter to a new value
To cancel and abandon the changes to the selected parameter
press the right arrow key [
].
use the up [
] and down [
] arrow keys.
press [Enter] key or the right arrow [
] key.
press the left arrow key [
].
up [
] and down [
] arrow keys can be used.
use the left [
] and right [
] arrow keys.
use the numerical keys (if available).
press key [Enter].
press key 3 [Shift], then [Enter].
Figures 5-2 and 5-2 show the process for the selection and modification of a parameter.
The menu system is derived from the data set the first time the keypad is connected to the drive (Configuration phase). As soon as
configuration is completed, the menu structure is memorized in the keypad.
5.2.4. Lock Code (Password)
The Parameter Security [01.05] permits a lock code to be entered which prohibits parameter modification. To enable the lock, enter a
number (from –32767 to +32767), and write it down. To disable the lock, enter the same number again. Parameter [01.05] can be
accessed at programming level 3 of the Main Settings menu.
NOTE
WARNING
If the user attempts to modify a parameter when the lock is active, a dialog box will
come in view, with the following message:
“Parameter modification disabled, press enter to close the window”
Do not forget the value of the security parameter [01.05] since no parameter
modification is possible without first entering it.
13
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
5.2.5. Navigation Menu
The following sequence indicates the ways to navigate and modify a parameter in the drive menu. A programming level code may be
required for some menus and parameters.
Menu
Main Menu
Top of List
Motor Menu
(1)
(submenu)
Drive Menu
Sub menu
Or
Motor Menu
Top of List
Main Settings
(100)
(submenu)
Motor Data
Motor Menu
Main Settings
Main Data
(200)
(submenu)
V/Hz Settings
Or
Motor Data
Motor Voltage
Mot Full Load Curr
(206)
700 A
Motor Frequency
Parameter
Parameter
Motor Data
Top of List
Motor Voltage
(203)
3300 V
Mot Full Load Cur
Or
Motor Menu
0700
Motor Voltage
Mot Full Load
valueCurr 700 A
default 700---(206)
AA
min
1A
Motor Frequency
max
7500 A
Motor Menu
0850
Motor Voltage
Mot Full Load
valueCurr 700 A
default 700---(206)
AA
min
1A
Motor Frequency
max
7500 A
Figure 5.2 Example of navigation menu and parameter modification
14
Motor Data
Motor Voltage
Mot Full Load Curr
(206)
850 A
Motor Frequency
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
Main Menu
Top of List
Motor Menu
(1)
Drive Menu
(submenu)
Or
Motor Menu
Top of List
Main Settings
(100)
(submenu)
Motor Data
Motor Control Mode
V/Hz Ctrl
Motor Control Mode
(102
)
700 A
Motor Control Mode
V/Hz Ctrl
Motor Control Mode
- Top (102
)
V/Hz 700
Ctrl A
Reset All
Reset All
SLs Ctrl
FOC Ctrl
Or
Main Settings
Top of List
EU-NEMA Select
(101)
Motor Control Mode
Or
Main Settings
EU-NEMA Select
Motor Control Mode
(102)
V/Hz Ctrl
Reset All
EU
Main Settings
EU-NEMA Select
Motor Control Mode
(102)
FOC Ctrl
Reset All
Figure 5.3 Selection and modification of a pick list parameter
15
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
5.2.6. Monitor Mode
The Monitor mode allows the operator to see the status and the values of the selectable parameters in real time. The drive status is
shown in the left top corner, and the speed reference source in the right top corner of the monitor. The bottom section displays the actual
values of five parameters in real time.
The operator can select the five parameters to be displayed in real time.
To select the parameters in real time
To highlight the real-time parameter to be replaced
To activate a pick list
To highlight the type of parameter desired for selection
To activate a second pick list (once the desired parameter type has been selected)
To highlight the parameter desired for display when the keypad is in monitor mode
To select the highlighted parameter
first press the left arrow key [
] (activates the highlight bar).
use the up [
] and down [
] arrow keys.
press [Enter].
use the up [
] and down [
] arrow keys.
press [Enter].
use the up [
] and down [
] arrow keys.
press [Enter].
Figure 5-4 illustrates this process.
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq
0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Motor
0.0 %
Power
Idle
Keypad
Motor speed
0
RPM
Motor freq
0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Motor
0.0 %
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq
0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Motor
0.0 %
Power
MonIdle
Var #1
Keypad
Mtr current [A]
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq- Top - 0.0 Hz
Motor speed [rpm]
VDC voltage
0V
Motor speed [%]
Motor - Bottom -0.0 %
Power
MonIdle
Var #1
Mtr current [A]
Or
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq- Top - 0.0 Hz
Mechanical 0 V
VDC voltage
Electrical
Motor
0.0 %
Demands / feedbacks
Power
MonIdle
Var #1
Keypad
Mtr current [A]
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq- Top - 0.0 Hz
Mechanical 0 V
VDC voltage
Electrical
Motor
0.0 %
Demands / feedbacks
Power
Figure 5-4 Selection of parameters for display during Monitor Mode
16
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
Status ATV
MonVar #1
MonVar #2
MonVar #3
MonVar #4
MonVar #5
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq
0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Motor
0.0 %
Power
Speed Reference Source
Value
Parameter Name
Figure 5-5 Monitor mode screen
5.2.7. Change of Speed Reference
When the system is in manual mode and the keypad is active,
the up [] and down [] arrow keys can be used to increase
or decrease speed. When the speed reference is changed, a
box displaying the reference value sent to the drive comes in
view in the lower left corner of the monitor screen. The box
remains in view for 5 seconds after the up ([] or down []
arrow key has been released. To check the current value of
speed reference, momentarily press the up [] and down []
arrows or key [Enter] while the system is in manual mode and
the monitor display is on.
Manual reference
speed / frequency
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq
0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Motor
0.0 %
0.0 Hz
Power
Figure 5-6 Display showing speed reference
5.2.8. Fault and Alarm Annunciation
When a Fault occurs, its cause is shown on the display and
the Fault led lights.
If more faults occur at the same time, each cause can be
visualized through [] or [] keys. Pressing the key sequence
[Shift] [Canc], the display change visualization from the fault
window to the monitor mode.
Protection
Top of List
ATV Status
INTVEC Pr
29-05-06 10:08:15
More recent Fault
Fault date
Over Volt
Previous fault
Protection
INTVEC Pr
Over Volt
Bottom of List
Figure 5-7 Fault visualization
17
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
If no Fault is present, when an Alarm occurs, in monitor mode only its cause is shown on the display, and the fault led blinks.
If different Alarms occur at the same time, the display shows each cause alternatively. If the display is not in monitor mode and an
alarm is active, press [Shift] [Canc] tovisualize the alarm.
Alarm description
Alarm date
Run
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq
0.0 Hz
VDC
voltage
0V
Spd High
Motor11-02-06 21:18:34
0.0 %
Power
Figura 5-8 Alarm visualization
18
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
5.3.
Personal Computer Interface
5.3.1. General
Connection between ATV and PC serial port RS232.
A serial patch cord with nine male-female D pin connectors can be used. See RS catalog, code 287-9460 for an example.
Insert the disk supplied with ATV in the PC.
•
Run file setup.exe
After installation is completed, an icon comes in view on the desktop for program launch.
To open program, double click on this
desktop icon
WzPlus25.lnk
19
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
Click on the telephone icon
to connect ATV control board.
Start connection
5.3.2. Configuration File
The following window appears, once the connection with ATV control is established:
Configuration File missing
Dialog box
segnanfigurazione
20
The dialog box visualized informs that on the PC there isn’t configuration file (that file contains data about the parameters menu structure
and the typology of parameters).
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
Click on OK button and then Click on this icon
to build configuration file.
Building configuration file
A progress bar is displayed during the phase of configuration file building. See the following image:
Progress bar configuration file
building
21
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
5.3.3. Parameters Upload
Once built the configuration file, click on this icon
to upload parameters settings from converter control.
Parameters upload
A progress bar is displayed during the phase of parameters uploading and contemporarily the pc tools builds the parameters menu
structure. See the following image:
Progress bar parameters
download
parameters menu structure
22
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
After parameters uploading, PC Tools application shows the following window:
Monitor window
Virtual keypad
By clicking on a item menu, the contented parameters families are shown.
Menù
parameters families
23
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
5.3.4. Parameters Editing
By clicking on a parameters family a window, containing the parameters of the selected family, will be shown in the right side of the PC
Tools application. Parameters value can be modified inside this window.
Parameters window
24
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
5.4.
Trace Visualization
Whit PC Tool release:
It is possible to visualize the TRACE whenever this function is enabled:
Click the icon:
to show the TRACE table.
The trace table allows to visualize through 4 channels, parameters belonging to trace parameters:
•
For each channel are indicated at the left side the name, the greatest value that correspond to 100%.
25
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
Every channel is programmed to the following manner:
Press this icon :
the “Setup trace channel “appears:
When the trace is in the “stopped status”, it is possible to upload the values stored pressing the icon :
26
5.
Menu System and Programming Tools
To start the display of the graphs corresponding to four channels, it is necessary to press the icons relative to the four channels:
In order to construct a file excel (TraceDw.xls) and a file text (TraceDw.txt) to import like a csv file, it is necessary to press the following
icon:
In order to see the file excel and the file text it is necessary to type the following two icons:
An example of a diagram trace:
27
6. Programming Levels and Motor Control Modes
6.1.
Programming Levels
Three different programming levels are available that allow the user to easily access an increasing number of function and parameters
according to the requirement of the application.
LEVEL # 1:
Quick motor start up
Intended for simple applications.
The user can start the motor using the factory default settings for I/O’s.
LEVEL # 2:
Quick application start up
Intended for users who have a sound knowledge of drives and applications. Also recommended for
system integrators who need access to functions typical of simple applications or modify the I/O
default settings
LEVEL # 3:
Advanced system
application
Intended for users who make complex system applications. At this level the user can access many of
the functions that were specifically developed for complex systems (e.g. paper mills, steel mills).
The advanced level can meet the requirements of the widest range of drive applications.
The user can select the desired motor control mode in each programming level.
The programming levels can be modified using advanced keypad or PC Interface.
WARNING!
6.2.
Changing programming levels not affects on parameter settings of previous programming level.
So it’s possible to change programming level without losing previous settings.
How to Change the Programming Levels
6.2.1. Programming Levels Visualization and Modification with Advanced Keypad
From any menu, except in parameter setting menu, using the following sequence:
Idle
Keypad
SHIFT
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq
0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Motor Power
0.0 %
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq
0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Motor Power
0.0 %
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor
Enterfreq
Program0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Code
Motor Power
0.0 %
0001
Mtr voltage
0V
In the window “Enter Porgram Code”, it’s displayed the current programming level through a numeric code:
Code
0001
0002
0003
Programming level
#1
#2
#3
To change programming level, set up the corresponding programming level code through numeric keys and confirm selection by
Canc/Enter key.
28
6.
Programming Levels and Motor Control Modes
For example, following it’s shown how set up programming level #3.
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor
Enterfreq
Program0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Code
Motor Power
0.0 %
0001
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor
Enterfreq
Program0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Code
Motor Power
0.0 %
0001
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor
Enterfreq
Program0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Code
Motor Power
0.0 %
0001
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq
0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Motor Power
0.0 %
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor
freq
0.0 Hz
Enter
Program
Visibility
VDC
voltage
0V
Code
changed 0.0 %
Motor Power
0000
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor
Enterfreq
Program0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Code
Motor Power
0.0 %
0003
Mtr voltage
0V
Entering a wrong code, the programming level is maintained to the actual value.
29
6.
Programming Levels and Motor Control Modes
6.2.2. Programming Levels Visualization and Modification with PC Interface
To open program, double click on this desktop icon
the following window will be displayed.
Programming level visualization/modification
double click on the following icon to open programming level visualization/modification window
On display appears the following window where is shown the actual programming level value.
actual programming level
To change programming level, set up the programming level code and confirm by clicking on OK button.
Entering a wrong code, the programming level is maintained to the actual value.
30
6.
Programming Levels and Motor Control Modes
6.3.
Motor Control Modes
Three control modes are available (They can be selected from any programming level):
- VHZ
(Volt / Hertz)
- SLS
(Sensorless Control)
- FOC
(Field Orientated Control)
The control mode can be changed by selecting the Motor Control Mode [01.02] parameter. For changing parameter value
it’s possible to use Advanced keypad or PC interface. The parameter available settings are shown in the following table.
Settings
V/Hz Ctrl
SLS Ctrl
FOC Ctrl
WARNING!
Control Mode
V/Hz Control open loop
sensorless vector control
Vector control with encoder
Changing motor control mode not affects on parameter settings of previous control mode.
So it’s possible to change motor control mode without losing previous settings.
31
6.
Programming Levels and Motor Control Modes
6.3.1. Motor Control Mode Modification with Advanced Keypad
Enter in Motor Control Mode [01.02] parameter with direct access function:
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq
0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Motor Power
0.0 %
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
MotorEnter
freq Menu0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
ID
Motor Power
0.0 %
0100
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
MotorEnter
freq Menu0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
ID
Motor Power
0.0 %
0102
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
SHIFT
Mtr current
0A
Motor freq
0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
Motor Power
0.0 %
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
MotorEnter
freq Menu0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
ID
Motor Power
0.0 %
0000
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
MotorEnter
freq Menu0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
ID
Motor Power
0.0 %
0100
Mtr voltage
0V
Idle
Keypad
Mtr current
0A
MotorEnter
freq Menu0.0 Hz
VDC voltage
0V
ID
Motor Power
0.0 %
0000
Mtr voltage
0V
Main Settings
EU-NEMA Select
Motor Control Mode
(102)
V/Hz Ctrl
Reset All
Motor Control Mode
V/Hz Ctrl
Motor Control Mode
- Top (102
)
V/Hz 700
Ctrl A
Or
Reset All
SLs Ctrl
FOC Ctrl
Select the desired motor control mode and confirm the choice by pushing Canc/Enter button. An automatic control reset occurs after
control mode parameter selection. Family parameters structure is automatically updated in according with selected control mode.
32
6.
Programming Levels and Motor Control Modes
Motor Control Mode Modification with PC Interface
Open program by double clicking on this desktop icon
If programming level #1 is selected, the parameter Motor Control Mode [01.02] is displayed in the family QUICK-START-UP [49.00]
belonging to Auto Menu menu.
If programming levels #2 or #3 are selected, the parameter Motor Control Mode [01.02] is displayed in the family Main Settings [01.00]
belonging to Motor Menu menu.
Select the desired motor control mode. An automatic Silcovert TN 3300 V control reset occurs after control mode parameter selection.
Family parameters structure is automatically updated in according with selected control mode.
33
6.
Programming Levels and Motor Control Modes
6.3.2. Programming Levels and Control Modes
CM
Control Mode
FOC
Control Mode
VHz
CM
Control Mode
SLS
CM
PL
PL
PL
CM
Control Mode
VHz
Programming Level #1
“Quick Motor Start Up”
Control Mode
FOC
CM
Control Mode
SLS
Programming Level #2
“Quick Application
Start Up”
CM
PL
PL
PL
CM
Control Mode
VHz
Control Mode
FOC
CM
Control Mode
SLS
CM
Programming Level #3
“Advanced System
Application”
Figure 6.1 – Navigation through programming levels (“PL”) and Control mode (“MC”).
6.3.3.
6.4.
Factory Setting (Parameters Default Values)
WARNING!
34
Change of the Motor control mode [01.02], the programming level or pressing keys “Shift” + “<”
DOES NOT affect the values of the other parameters of ATV.
Thus, it is possible to change the control mode without loosing the changes made to the other
parameters. To reset the parameters to their default values, use function Reset All [01.03] in the Main
Settings family. When this function is invoked all parameters except those pertaining to motor and drive
data will be reset to their default values.
7. LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
7.1.
Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure Description
Using the Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure the user can start the drive by means of a small set of parameters.
The parameters marked MNP are the motor data from the motor nameplate, and must be typed-in by the user to obtain a correct drive
operation.
7.1.1. V/Hz Motor Quick Start-Up
The default control configuration of ATV is V/Hz control, version EU. The V/Hz Quick Motor Start-up procedure can be carried out by use
of only 11 parameters, as follows:
Parameter
01.01
01.02
02.05
02.06
02.08
02.10
02.11
04.05
06.03
22.12
22.13
EU-NEMA Select
Motor Control Mode
Motor Voltage (V) MNP
Mot Full Load Curr (A) MNP
Motor Frequency (Hz) MNP
Motor Min Oper Freq (Hz)
Motor Max Oper Freq (Hz)
V/Hz voltage boost (p.u)
AC Input voltage (V)
Accel Time 1 (s)
Decel Time 1 (s)
VERSION “EU”
Default : EU
Default : V/HZ Ctrl
Default : 3300 V
Default : according to ATV size (see Appendix E)
Default : 50 Hz
Default : 0 Hz
Default : 60 Hz
Default : 0.010 pu
Default : 3300V
Default : 60 s
Default : 60 s
For NEMA applications, the first parameter to set is 01.01 (EU-NEMA Select [01.01]). The default value of Motor Frequency is:
Parameter
02.08
Motor Frequency (Hz)
VERSION “NEMA”
Default : 60 Hz
Refer to paragraph 7.3 for the detailed procedure for V/Hz Quick Motor Start-Up.
7.1.2. SLS/FOC Quick Motor Start-Up
FOC and SLS control mode are to be used when the application requires an accurate torque control. The SLS / FOC Quick Motor StartUp Procedure can be carried out by means of 14 parameters; the above listed 11 parameters and the following three parameters:
Parameter
02.01
02.09
Motor Power EU (kW)
Mot Full Load Speed (rpm)
VERSION “EU”
Default : See Appendix E
Default : 1500 rpm
MNP
02.17
Motor Power Factor MNP
Default : 0.85
For NEMA applications the first parameter to set is 01.01 (EU-NEMA Select [01.01]). With 01.02 the default values of Motor Power, Motor
Voltage, Mot Full Load Speed, Motor Frequency, Motor Max Oper Freq, Motor Efficiency, and AC Input voltage are:
Parameter
02.02
02.05
02.08
02.09
VERSION “NEMA”
Motor Power NEMA MNP (hp)
Default: See Appendix E
Motor Voltage MNP (V)
Default : 3300 V
Motor Frequency MNP (Hz)
Default : 60 Hz
Mot Full Load Speed MNP
Default : 1780 rpm
(rpm)
02.11
Motor Max Oper Freq (Hz)
Default : 60 Hz
02.18
Motor Efficiency (pu)
Default : 0.90
06.03
AC Input voltage (V)
Default : 3300 V
Parameter 02.09: Mot Full Load Speed MNP (rpm) is the motor speed at rated load.
i.e. a 1.5 kW 50Hz, 4-pole motor has a Mot Full Load Speed = 1430 [rpm].
With SLS or FOC control if the user do not change the default value the “Self-commissioning” procedure will fail.
During SLS/FOC Quick Motor Start-Up, the Self-commissioning procedure (motor parameters identification) is activated by setting this
parameter:
11.10
Autotuning select
Default : Tune Off
Refer to paragraph 7.3.2 for the detailed procedure for SLS / FOC Quick Motor Start-Up.
35
7.
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
Parameter EU-NEMA Select [01.01] is set at “EU” by default, and parameters Motor Power EU, Motor Power Factor are EU units of
measure:
02.01 Parameter
02.17 Parameter
Motor Power EU (kW)
Motor Power Factor MNP
Default : see Appendix E
Default : 0.85
If EU-NEMA Select is set at “NEMA”, the following parameters are displayed:
02.02 Parameter
Motor Power NEMA (hp)
Default see Appendix E
02.18 Parameter
Motor Efficiency (%)
Default : 0.90
7.1.3. Important Notes About Quick Motor Start-Up
Using the Quick Motor Start-Up procedure, the following settings are set by default:
•
EU applications (EU-NEMA Select [01.01] = kW).
NOTE
Changing the parameter EU-NEMA Select [01.01] will set (confirmation with dialog box) all default values
listed in this section as explained in paragraph B.5.5 of APPENDIX E: DEFAULT VALUES.
NOTE
Variable Torque Rating application (VT CT Select [06.08] = VT Class 1, available at programming level 3).
Changing the parameter VT CT Select [06.08] will set (confirmation with dialog box) all default values
listed in this section as explained in paragraph B.5.5 of APPENDIX E: DEFAULT VALUES.
ATV is configured in Automatic mode, Drive Enable and Start/Stop commands come from terminal board:
Drive Enable : XM1 – 20
Start/Stop : XM1 – 13
The default speed reference source is analog input 1.
Analog reference : XM1 – 26/27; at 10 V on Analog Input 1 corresponds to Motor Max Oper Freq value.
Drive output current limit, defined through parameter Motor Overload Lim [02.12], is set by default at 110% of
parameter Mot Full Load Curr [02.06].
Motor Overload Protection is set by default at 110% (60 s) of motor rated current (parameter “Mot Full Load Curr”
[02.06]).
Macros “Current limit rollback” and “VDC rollback” are enabled (only with ramp lock feature).
All parameters described above can be changed only when the drive is not running (motor stopped), except Accel
Time 1 and Decel Time 1.
7.1.4. Manual (Local) Drive Operation with Keypad
When the Manual Drive Operation mode is selected, ATV can be controlled locally.
After the power-on and pre-charge phase, drive state becomes "IDLE" (keypad led “ON” is off).
Motor Start-Up Procedure:
Keypad
Press key MAN: keypad displays box “Manual Press enter to confirm”; press Enter to confirm. The keypad display does not change and, if drive
enable is ON, led “ON” starts flashing to indicate Manual Drive Operation (If the user does not want to confirm Manual Drive Operation he/she
can press key AUTO: the keypad displays drive state, and stays in Automatic Drive Operation mode).
Set Drive Enable: led ON starts flashing (Manual Drive Operation).
Set Start Command by use of key MAN: the drive is in RUN mode and led “RUN” comes on. Keypad display does not change. It is possible to
show power, frequency, speed, current and voltage by use of the "Monitor Mode” (refer to Chapter 6).
Now ATV is running and Speed Reference is set at zero. It can be changed by use of keys ∧ and ∨ (if keys ∧ and ∨ are not pressed
during 10 seconds the keypad reverts to the monitor variable display).
A pressing of key STOP causes led "RUN" to go off, and the motor stops according to ramp settings.
36
7.
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
7.1.5. Automatic (Remote) Drive Operation with Keypad
When the Automatic Drive Operation mode is selected, ATV can be controlled remotely.
After power-on and pre-charge, the drive state becomes "IDLE" (keypad led “ON” is off).
Motor Start-Up Procedure:
Keypad
Press key AUTO: keypad displays box “Auto Press enter to confirm”; press Enter. Keypad display does not change and, if drive
enable is ON, led “ON” starts flashing to indicate Automatic Drive Operation (If the user does not want to confirm Automatic Drive
Operation he/she can press key MAN or keys “Shift” + “Enter”: the keypad displays drive state, and remains in Manual Drive
Operation mode).
-
Set Drive Enable to ON: led “ON” comes on (Automatic Drive Operation);
-
Set Analog Speed Reference to the required value; to run the motor at Motor Max Oper Freq. set voltage to 10V through analog
input 1;
-
Set Start to ON, led “RUN” comes on, and the motor starts accelerating according to ramp settings, up to the selected speed
reference value.
The motor stops when the Start command is disabled (OFF). Led “RUN” is off.
7.1.6. Manual (Local) Drive Operation with PC Interface
After the power-on and pre-charge phase, drive state becomes "IDLE" (led “ON” is off).
Motor Start-Up Procedure
Press key MAN.
If the drive is in AUTO mode, this window is shown:
If the user presses "Yes", the drive sets to "MAN" mode.
Set Drive Enable to ON: led ON starts flashing (Manual Drive Operation Mode); drive state is “ready";
Set the Start Command by use of key MAN: the drive is in RUN mode and led “RUN” comes on. The display shows the actual current
value.
The drive is running and the Speed Reference is set at zero. It can be
increased by typing-in the required rpm, and pressing ENTER on the
keypad.
Pressing key STOP causes led "RUN" to go off, and the motor stops
according to ramp settings.
7.1.7. Automatic (Remote) Drive Operation with PC Interface
After power-on and pre-charge, drive state becomes "IDLE" (led “ON” is off).
Motor Start-Up Procedure
Press key AUTO. If the drive is in MAN mode this window is shown:
If the user presses “Yes” the drive sets to the Auto mode.
Set Drive Enable to ON: led ON comes on.
Set Analog Speed Reference to the required value (Analog Input 1); to
run the motor at Motor Max Oper Freq. set voltage to 10V through
analog input 1;
Set Start Command to ON, led “RUN” comes on, and the motor starts
accelerating according to ramp settings, up to the selected speed reference
value.
-
The motor stops when the Start Command is disabled (OFF) - Led “RUN” is off.
37
7.
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
7.2.
Quick Motor Start-Up Parameters
Param #
Name (HF/PC)
DEF
Alphabetic
value
EU
0
1
0
1
2
Alphabetic
selection
Unit
Description
Control
EU
NEMA
Selection of power unit of measure
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
V/Hz Ctrl
SLs Ctrl
FOC Ctrl
Selection of drive control mode
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
101
EU-NEMA Select
102
Motor Control Mode
V/Hz
Ctrl
201
Motor Power EU (1)
(*)
KW
202
Motor Power NEMA (2)
(*)
HP
Motor rated power
SLS, FOC
205
Motor Voltage
(*)
V
Motor rated voltage
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
206
Mot Full Load Curr
(*)
A
Motor rated current
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
208
Motor Frequency
(*)
Hz
Motor rated frequency
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
209
Mot Full Load Speed
1480
Motor rated power
RPM
Motor rated speed
0
Hz
Minimum motor
operating frequency
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
60
Hz
Maximum motor
operating frequency
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
0,85
Motor power factor
SLS, FOC
0.90
Motor efficiency
SLS, FOC
210
Motor Min Oper Freq
211
Motor Max Oper Freq
217
Motor Power Factor (1)
218
Motor Efficiency (2)
405
V/Hz voltage boost
0.010
pu
V/Hz voltage boost
603
AC input voltage
(*)
V
Drive AC power supply voltage
1110
Autotuning Select
SLS, FOC
Tune
Off
0
1
2
3
Tune Off
Self comm.
Mot prm C
Stand Self
SLS, FOC
V
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
Selection of autotuning mode
SLS, FOC
2212
Accel Time 1
60.0
s
Setting of acceleration time #1
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
2213
Decel Time 1
60.0
s
Setting of deceleration time #1
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
(*) See Appendix E for default values
(1) Shown when EU is selected at default value * in parameter EU-NEMA Select [01.01]
(2) Shown when NEMA is selected in parameter EU-NEMA Select [01.01]
38
7.
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
7.3.
Quick Motor Start-Up Operation with Keypad
7.3.1. V/Hz Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
The Quick Motor Start-Up procedure (V/Hz) is set by default, thus it is active immediately at drive Power On.
Before power-on, disable the following commands:
Drive Enable
command
OFF
Start
command
OFF
Programming
The left arrow key [
] lets the parameter menu phase in the menu system be started. Parameter (102) “Motor Control Mode” must be
highlighted by use of arrow keys up [
] and down [
].
Pressing the right arrow key [
] or [Enter] gives access to the edit screen. A different value can now be set by use of the arrow or
numerical keys. If the user does not want to change the parameter values, he/she must press [Shift] then [Enter] to return to the display
menu. The same is obtained if the user pushes arrow key [
].
It is possible to scroll through all the available parameters by using keys up [
] and down [
]. Each parameter can be selected by use
of the right arrow key [
] or [Enter].
Pressing [Shift] then [Enter] while in Programming mode returns the screen to the previous menu or to the Monitor mode.
When programming is completed, the user can select the Automatic Drive Operation Mode (commands from terminal board) or the Manual Drive Operation
Mode (commands from keypad or PC). Default setting is Automatic Drive Operation Mode.
Refer to paragraph 7.1.4/5 for the detailed operation procedure for AUTO/MAN operation mode.
7.3.2. SLS/FOC Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
Parameter 02.09: Mot Full Load Speed MNP (rpm) is the motor speed at rated load.
i.e. a 1.5 kW 50Hz, 4-pole motor has a Mot Full Load Speed = 1430 [rpm].
If the user do not change the default value the “Self-commissioning” procedure will fail.
To initiate the SLS or FOC (Sensorless / Field Oriented Control) Quick Motor Start-Up procedure, proceed as instructed hereafter. Disable these
commands before drive Power On:
Drive Enable
command
OFF;
Start
command
OFF.
Programming
Using the right arrow key [] it is possible to start parameter programming in System menu. Use keys up [] and down [] to highlight the “Motor Control
Mode” parameter.
Select SLS or FOC Quick Motor Start-Up
Pressing the right arrow key [] causes the parameter selection list (102) to be shown. Using key up [] and down [] the user can
select SLS or FOC control mode. After the selection is made, press [Enter] to confirm.
After the motor control mode is selected, the control resets the microprocessor board automatically, and updates the parameter list in the
menu.
Using arrow keys up [
] and down [
] it is possible to scroll through all the available parameters. Any parameter can be selected by use
of the right arrow key [
] or key [Enter].
If key [Shift] then key [Enter] are pressed when the programming mode is active, there is an immediate return to the previous menu or
the monitor mode.
39
7.
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
Self Commissioning
Two procedures are available to identify the motor parameter data:
Self-commissioning with motor at no load: use this procedure when the motor is not connected to the load. The engine runs
at 90% of rated speed.
Self-commissioning with motor stopped: in this case the motor is supplied with power, but remains stationary.
Self Commissioning (with motor at no load)
Select the Manual Operation Mode, and set “Drive Enable command” = “ON”. Led “ON” comes on.
With no load applied to motor, set parameter Autotuning Select (11.10) to “Self Comm”.
Drive resets automatically. When it is at “READY”, enter the “run” command. In a few seconds the drive starts the motor and brings it to 90 % “Motor
Frequency”, thus the autotuning procedure can be completed. The indicated drive state is “TUNING”. The Motor parameter calculation procedure is
completed when the “Mot prm C” procedure is performed automatically.
When Start-Up is completed (approx. 2 to 3 minutes), the drive stops the motor, and resets automatically. At this point, it is possible to start the motor.
Self Commissioning with motor stopped
In Manual mode set parameter “Drive Enable command” = “ON”: Led “ON” comes on.
Set parameter Autotuning Select (11.10) to “Self Stand”. The dialog window prompts a confirmation; press “yes”.
The drive resets automatically. Input the “run” command when it returns to the “READY” state. The drive will cycle between the
“READY” and “TUNING” state ten times. Then it resets, and if no error messages are shown, it returns to the “READY” state and is
ready to start.
During the self-commissioning procedure with motor stopped, the motor remains stopped.
To abort the procedure, press “CANCEL” in the dialog window.
NOTES:
• It is recommended that parameters [22.12 and 22.13] are set at values higher than or equal to the default values (60s).
• If no run command is input within 200 seconds after Autotuning Select (11.10) is set to “Self Comm”, the drive returns to the original
condition.
• If drive is not in “READY” state, the setting of parameter Autotuning Select (11.10) to “Self Comm” is ignored.
• The “STOP” command can be input when state is “TUNING”.
If the motor is accelerating, the drive returns to the “READY” state, waiting for a “run” command to complete the self-commissioning
procedure.
If the drive is performing measurements (motor speed constant) the motor is stopped, and a protection for “self-commissioning failed”
occurs.
If the motor is decelerating, the STOP command has no effect.
• When state is “TUNING”, and parameter “Drive Enable” is at OFF, a protection for “self-commissioning failure” occurs.
40
7.
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
7.4.
Quick Motor Start-Up Operation with PC Interface
7.4.1. V/Hz Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
Before drive Power On, disable the following commands:
Drive Enable command OFF;
Start command
OFF.
Programming: To start operation with the PC Interface, do the following steps:
Connect a serial cable between PC and drive;
Open the Ansaldo Sistemi Industriali Drive PC Serial Manager (i.e. the PC interface);
-
Press the “connection” icon
“IDLE”.
-
Press “Build Conf. File”
to create a Configuration File
-
Press “Params Uploading”
to upload the parameters
The PC interface displays the drive state (see chapter 5); under this condition, the drive state is
The PC displays this window :
V/Hz Quick Start-Up
Procedure is a default factory
setting. To configure all
necessary parameters, click
AutoMenu, then double click
Quick Motor Start-Up.
The PC displays this window:
Press the refresh button to refresh parameter visualization.
-
Change the following parameters as required 02.05; 02.06; 02.08; 02.10; 02.11; 04.05; 06.03; 22.12; 22.13 .
Press the refresh button to make sure that the drive has saved all parameters.
When programming has been completed the user can choose the Automatic
Drive Operation mode (commands from terminal board), or the Manual Drive
Operation mode (commands from keypad) by clicking on key Auto or Man.
Default setting is Automatic Operation mode.
41
7.
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
Manual Drive Operation mode
Automatic Drive Operation mode
After the power on and pre-charge phase are completed, the drive state becomes “IDLE” (led “ON” is off).
Motor start-up procedure:
Press key AUTO. If the drive is set to operate in MAN mode, the
following window is shown:
Press key MAN. If the drive is set to operate in AUTO mode, the following
window is shown:
If the user selects "Yes" the drive will be in “AUTO” mode.
Set Drive Enable command to ON: led ON comes on.
Set the Analog Speed Reference (Analog Input 1) to the required
value. To run the motor at Motor Max Oper Freq. set voltage to 10V
through Analog Input 1.
Set Start command to ON.
If the user selects "Yes" the drive will be in "MAN" mode.
Now led RUN comes on, and the motor starts running
according to up-ramp settings, and to the speed reference
value.
Now the drive is running, and the Speed Reference is set at zero. It can be
increased by typing-in the required rpm, and pressing ENTER on the keypad.
Set Drive Enable command to ON: led ON starts flashing (Manual
Drive Operation Mode), and drive state is "Ready";
Set the Start command by use of key MAN: the drive is in RUN mode,
and led “RUN” comes on. The display shows the actual current value.
Key STOP can be used to stop the motor: led "RUN" goes off, and the motor stops.
7.4.2. SLS/FOC Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
To set the Quick Motor Start-Up procedure in SLS or FOC (Sensorless/ Field Oriented Control) control mode, the User must proceed as
follows:
Before drive Power On, disable the following commands:
Drive Enable
command
OFF
Start
command
OFF
Select SLS or FOC Quick Motor Start-Up
To start the operations with PC Interface, do the following steps:
Connect a serial cable between PC and drive;
Open ASIRobicon Drive PC Serial Manager (i.e. the PC interface);
-
42
-
Press the “connection” icon.
drive state is “IDLE”.
The PC interface shows the drive state (see chapter 5); under this condition the
-
Press “Build Conf. File”
to create a Configuration File
-
Press “Params Uploading”
to upload the parameters
7.
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
The PC interface shows the following window:
V/Hz Quick Start-Up Procedure is a default factory setting.
Click AutoMenu, then double click Quick Motor Start-Up.
The PC interface shows the following window:
Press the refresh button to refresh parameter visualization
Select parameter 01.02 Motor Control Mode to SLS or FOC.
Wait until macro loading is completed.
Programming
To configure all the necessary parameters, the User must click AutoMenu, then double click Quick Motor Start-Up.
43
7.
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
The PC shows this window:
Press the refresh button to refresh parameter visualization
Change the listed parameters as desired.
Press the refresh button to make sure that the drive has saved all parameters.
When programming has been completed the user can choose the Automatic
Drive Operation mode (commands from terminal board), or the Manual Drive
Operation mode (commands from keypad) by clicking on key Auto or Man.
Default setting is Automatic Drive Operation mode.
Self Commissioning
Two procedures are available to identify the motor parameter data:
Self-commissioning with motor at no load: use this procedure when the motor is not connected to the load. The engine runs
at 90% rated speed.
Self-commissioning with motor stopped: in this case the motor is supplied with power, but remains stationary.
Self Commissioning (with motor at no load)
Se With no load applied to motor, set parameter Autotuning Select (11.10) to
“Self Comm”, and press [Enter] to confirm when the dialog window is shown.
Drive resets automatically. When it is at “READY”, enter the “run” command. In a few seconds the drive starts the motor, and brings it to
90 % “Motor Frequency”, thus the autotuning procedure can be completed. The indicated drive state is “TUNING”. The Motor parameter
calculation procedure is completed while the “Mot prm C” procedure is performed automatically.
When Start-Up is completed (approx. 2 to 3 minutes), the drive stops the motor, and resets automatically. At this point, it is possible to start the motor.
Self Commissioning with motor stopped
In Manual mode set parameter “Drive Enable command” = “ON”: Led “ON” comes on.
Set parameter Autotuning Select (11.10) to “Self Stand”. The dialog window prompts a confirmation; press “yes”.
The drive resets automatically, and this window is shown:
Input the “run” command: the drive will cycle between the “READY” and “TUNING” states
ten times.
44
7.
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
Input the “run” command: the drive will cycle between the “READY” and “TUNING” states
ten times, and this window will come in view:
IGBT commands are enabled, and this window is shown at the end of the measurement
cycles:
At the end, the drive is reset, and, if no error messages are shown, returns to the “READY” state. Then it is again ready to start.
During the Self-Commissioning procedure with motor stopped, the motor remains stopped.
To abort the procedure, press “CANCEL” in the dialog window.
If button “cancel” is pressed, ATV will reset, and the “self-commissioning failure” protection will cut-in.
NOTES:
• It is recommended that parameters [22.12 and 22.13] are set at values higher or equal to the default values (60 s).
• If no “run” command is input within 200 seconds after the Autotuning Select (M11.10) is set to “Self Comm”, the drive returns to the
original condition.
• If drive is not in “READY” state, the setting of parameter Autotuning Select (M11.10) to “Self Comm” is ignored.
• The “STOP” command can be input when state is “TUNING”. If the motor is accelerating, the drive returns to the “READY” state,
waiting for a run command to complete the self-commissioning procedure. If the drive is performing measurements (motor speed
constant) the motor is stopped, and a protection for “self-commissioning failure” occurs. If the motor is decelerating, the STOP
command has no effect.
• When state is “TUNING”, and parameter “Drive Enable” is at OFF, a protection for “self-commissioning failed” occurs.
Manual Drive Operation mode
Automatic Drive Operation mode
After power on and pre-charge, the drive state becomes “IDLE” (led “ON” is off).
Motor start-up procedure:
Press key AUTO; if the drive is set to operate in MAN mode, the
following window is shown:
If the user selects "Yes" the drive will be in AUTO mode.
Set Drive Enable command to ON: led ON comes on.
Set Start command to ON.
Press key MAN; if the drive is set to operate in AUTO mode, the
following window is shown:
If the user selects "Yes" the drive will be in "MAN" mode.
Set Drive Enable command to ON: led ON starts flashing (Manual
Operation Mode), and drive state is "Ready";
Set the Analog Speed Reference (Analog Input 1) to the required value. To run the motor at Motor Max Oper Freq. set voltage to 10V through
analog input 1.
Set Start command to ON.
Now led RUN lights on, and the motor starts running following
ramp settings up to speed reference value.
When Start command is disabled (OFF), the motor stops. Led
RUN is off.
Set Start command by use of key MAN: the drive is in RUN
mode, and led “RUN” comes on. The display shows the actual
current value.
Now the drive is running, and the Speed Reference is set at zero; it can be increased by typing-in the required rpm and pressing ENTER
on the keypad.
Key STOP can be used to stop the motor: led "RUN" goes off, and the motor stops according to ramp settings.
45
7.
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
7.5.
Digital and Analog I/O
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
Analog inputs
XM1 – 13:
DI 1 Start/Stop
Start / Stop Command
XM1 – 14:
DI 2 Prog
Programmable – default : not used
XM1 – 15:
DI 3 Prog
Programmable – default : not used
XM1 – 16:
DI 4 Prog
Programmable – default : not used
XM1 – 17:
DI 5 Prog
Programmable – default : not used
XM1 – 18:
DI 6 Prog
Programmable – default : not used
XM1 – 19:
DI 7 Prog
Programmable – default : Reset Protections
XM1 – 20:
DI 8 Drive Enable
Drive Enable command
XM1 – 3/4/44
RO1 Fault
Fault Output Relay (protection)
XM1 – 1/2/43
RO2 Configurable
Configurable Output Relay – default : “operating”
XM1 - 45/46:
RO3 Configurable
Configurable Output Relay – default : “PrechOK”
XM1 - 21:
DO 4 / DI 9
Programmable - default : “AutoMAN”
XM1 – 22
DO 5 / DI 10
Programmable – default : disabled
XM1 - 23
DO 6
Programmable – default : disabled
XM1 – 26
AI 1
Programmable Differential Input
Default : Speed Reference
AI 2
Programmable Differential Input
Default : Auxiliary Reference
AO 1
Isolated Programmable – Default : Motor Current
XM1 – 27
XM1 – 28
XM1 – 29
Analog outputs
46
XM1 – 34:
XM1 - 35:
AO 2
Isolated Programmable – Default : Motor Frequency
XM1 – 36:
AO 1
Isolated Programmable – Default : Motor Voltage
XM1 – 37:
AO 2
Isolated Programmable – Default : Motor Speed
7.
LEVEL 1 – Quick Motor Start-Up Procedure
7.6.
Control Board Terminals
D
I
G
I
T
A
L
13 DI 1 Start/Stop
AI 1-
27
AI 2+
28
15 DI 3 Prog
AI 2-
29
N.C. 31
18 DI 6 Prog
N.C. 32
19 DI 7 Prog
N.C. 33
20 DI 8 Drive Enable
+10Vdc 40
VDC 160mA
24 +24
FUSE @200mA
25 DI/DO ground
AI/AO ground 41
-10Vdc 42
21 DO 4/DI 9
AO 1
34
22 DO 5/DI 10
AO 2
35
AI/AO ground 36
23 DO 6
AO 3
3
Relays 5A
@250Vac
4
44
AO 4
RO1 Fault
Output
Relay
43
45
46
37
38
SPEED
POT
CW
CCW WIPER
0 to +10
Vdc
40
41
28
-10 to +10
Vdc
40
42
28
JUMPER VIN- TO AGND 2-10K
(5K NOM)
AI/AO ground 39
+5V
5
INTERNAL
1
2
Analog inputs
0-10 Vdc
0/4-20mA (input
Z=475 ohms)
N.C. 30
17 DI 5 Prog
24V Isolated
Output/Input
26
14 DI 2 Prog
16 DI 4 Prog
I
N
P
U
T
S
AI 1+
RO2 Configurable
Output Relay
RO3 Configurable
Precharge OK
0V
6
A
7
A
8
B
9
B
10
Z
11
Z
12
E
N
C
O
D
E
R
5-12-24 Vdc (1024PPR)
5 vDC 150mA supply
can be switched off
to connect 12-24 Vdc
external supply
Note: 1 ÷ 46 are terminals of terminal block XM1 on SCADA PLUS Board
47
8. LEVEL 2 – Basic System Applications
The Quick Application Start-Up procedure permits a wider range of parameters to be configured than the Quick Motor Start-Up procedure.
It is intended for users with a sound knowledge of drives and applications who have to access the functions typical of simple systems or
modify the I/O default settings.
By use of the Quick Application Start-Up procedure, the user can set:
•
a wider range of Motor, Control and Drive parameters
•
the digital and analog outputs/inputs configuration
•
standard Macros
•
speed reference configuration.
8.1.
V/Hz Basic Application Start-Up
The user can change the programming level of the start-up procedure (for a complete description refer to chapter 6) by use of keys “Shift”
+ “<” of the keypad, or of the Programming Level icon available on top of the left side of the PC interface window.
If the user wants to change from Quick Motor Start-Up to Quick Applications Start-Up keeping the selected Motor Control Mode, he/she
must proceed as follows.
In Quick Motor Start-Up, with V/Hz control mode selected, the PC interface displays the following window:
The user selects Programming level #2 though the programming level icon Programming Level or by use of keys “Shift” + “<”, without
changing the selected Motor Control mode (V/Hz).
The parameter family will be updated.
This window will come in view on the PC interface.
The keypad shows label
48
“Visibility changed”
49
8.
LEVEL 2 – Basic System Applications
After a few seconds, the PC interface shows this
window:
With the programming level set to value 2, in case of V/Hz Quick Application Start-Up, the user can access the following list of parameters:
8.1.1. Motor Menu
The user can access three families of parameters: Main Settings, Motor Data and V/Hz Settings.
Main Settings Family allows the user to do the following actions:
•
Change the Power unit of measure (EU KW or NEMA hp). Default setting is Kw. It is possible to select the hp unit of measure
simply by selecting “NEMA” in the pop up list of Parameter: EU-NEMA Select [01.01].
•
Change the Motor control mode as explained in Chapter 4.2. Parameter: Motor control mode [01.02]
•
Reset user’s default values by use of parameter Reset All [01.03].
Motor Data Family allows the user to select or change the motor data, see chapter 4.1.
V/Hz Settings Family allows the user to select and change the V/Hz boost parameters.
50
8.
LEVEL 2 – Basic System Applications
8.1.2. Drive Menu
Under the Drive menu, the user has access to the following families of parameters: Drive Data, Digital Output Configuration, Analog Input
Configuration, Analog Output Configuration and Standard Macro Enable.
The user can choose the AC Input Voltage by use of parameter AC input voltage [06.03], if different from the default.
A detailed description of Analog Input Configuration is included in Chapter 7.
The default values are given in Appendix B.
8.1.3. Standard Macros
The ATV control contains a number of functions that satisfy various process requirements. Each function can be enabled and configured
by properly setting the related configuration parameters; related commands can be sent to the drive either through terminal board or
through field bus.
The Standard Macros available for the V/Hz control algorithm are the following:
o
CRITICAL SPEED
FREE RUN STOP
o
CURENT ROLLBACK
HOA-PULSED STARTSTOP
o
VDC ROLLBACK
AUTO RESET & RESTART
o
FLYING RESTART
AUTO ON/OFF
o
MOTOR POTENTIOMETER
EXTERNAL PID REGULATOR
o VDC UNDERVOLTAGE
(See Chapter 10 for function description)
8.1.4.
Auto Menu
Speed demand setup: It is possible to select the Speed Reference Source and the overall parameters necessary to set the speed limit, ramp times, preset
speed and Digital Inputs (DI) Selection.
Auto On/Off: The Auto ON/OFF function starts the drive after a programmable delay if the speed reference from the analog input is greater than an “on”
speed threshold, and stops it after a programmable delay if the speed reference is lower than an “off” speed threshold.
Critical Speed Skip: By means of this function it is possible to skip the speed reference that can excite mechanical resonance frequencies in the motor/load
system.
Current Limit Rollback: This function is used to limit the motor current during acceleration or in steady state during sudden load variations in order to avoid
overcurrent trips.
Vdc Rollback: This function is used to limit the DC bus voltage during deceleration when no braking devices are installed. See Chapter 10
Flying Restart: This function is used when the drive has to start with a spinning motor.
Motor Potentiometer: The digital potentiometer changes the speed reference through discrete increments (up command), or discrete decrements (down
command).
VDC Undervoltage: The control provides a function that prevents the drive from being tripped in the event of transient voltage drops in the mains.
If some families of parameters are not available, control if the correspondent Standard Macro is Enable.
For details about this functions see Chapter 10
51
8.
LEVEL 2 – Basic System Applications
8.2.
Sensorless (SLS) or Field Oriented Control (FOC) Basic Application Start-Up
When parameter Motor Control Mode [01.02] is set
to SLS or FOC, the PC Interface shows this menu:
From programming level 2 (i.e. with a FOC or SLS Quick Application Start-Up configuration) the user can access the following list of
parameters:
8.2.1. Motor Menu
The user can change the following parameters regarding the general motor and SLS or FOC settings:
If the user has selected a FOC or SLS control mode from the V/Hz control mode, a number of parameters will be visualized, that are
initially set at the default values.
52
8.
LEVEL 2 – Basic System Applications
Main Settings
The Main Settings Family allows the user to do the following actions:
•
Change the Power unit of measure (EU KW or NEMA hp). Default setting is KW. It is possible to select the hp unit of measure
simply by selecting “NEMA” in the pop up list of Parameter: EU-NEMA Select [01.01].
•
Change the Motor control mode as explained in Chapter 7.2. Parameter: Motor control mode [01.02]
•
Reset user’s default values by use of parameter Reset All [01.03].
Motor Data
The Motor Data Family allows the user to select or change the motor data, see Chapter 7.
Moreover, by use of parameter NRG Saver Min Flux it is possible to maintain a high operating efficiency by reducing motor voltage when
the load requirements are lower than the rated values (torque lower than 100%); the motor losses are minimized and the power factor is
maintained at the optimum value.
Drive Menu
The user can choose the AC Input Voltage by use of parameter AC input voltage [06.03], if different from the default settings
(see also Appendix E).
Standard Macros
The ATV control contains a number of functions that satisfy various process requirements. Each function can be enabled and configured by properly setting
the related configuration parameters; related commands can be sent to the drive either through terminal board or through field bus.
Control
The following macros are available :
CRITICAL SPEED
VDC ROLLBACK
MOTOR POTENTIOMETER
VDC UNDER VOLTAGE
AUTO TUNING SELECT
FREE RUN STOP
HOA-PULSED STARTSTOP
AUTO RESET & RESTART
AUTO ON/OFF
EXTERNAL PID REGULATOR
FLYING RESTART
Reference chapter
SLS
FOC
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
10
10
10
10
7
10
10
10
10
10
10
Auto Menu
Speed Demand Setup
It is possible to select the Speed Reference Source and the overall parameters necessary to set the speed limit, ramp times, preset speed and Digital Inputs
(DI) selection.
Auto On/Off
The Auto ON/OFF function starts ATV after a programmable delay if the speed reference from the analog input is greater than an “on” speed threshold, and
stops it after a programmable delay if the speed reference is lower than an “off” speed threshold.
Critical Speed skip
By means of this function it is possible to skip the output frequency reference that can excite resonance frequencies in the kinematic chain.
Vdc Rollback
This function is used to limit the DC bus voltage during deceleration when no braking devices are installed.
Flying Restart
This function is used when the drive has to start with a spinning motor in control mode SLS.
Motor Potentiometer
The digital potentiometer changes the speed reference through discrete increments (up command), or discrete decrements (down command).
53
8.
LEVEL 2 – Basic System Applications
VDC Undervoltage
The control provides a function that prevents the drive from being tripped in the event of transient voltage drops in the mains.
If some families of parameters are not available, control if the correspondent Standard Macro is Enable.
See Chapter 10 for details about the functions.
8.3.
Basic Application Start-Up (Functions for all Control Modes)
8.3.1.
Logs Control (Fault/Alarm Log)
Refer to chapter 13.2 for a detailed explanation.
8.3.2. Protect Menu
Motor Overload Protection
The user can set the level and time of Motor thermal Overload, and the action performed in case of thermal protection trip. Refer to
Chapter 10 for detailed instructions about use and parameter settings.
8.3.3. Alarms Settings
The user has the possibility to enable the Loss of Analog Speed Reference Alarm. Further information is contained in chapter 7.
Autoreset and Restart
The Auto Restart option allows a trip to be reset automatically and the drive to be restarted. When this function is enabled, most types of
trips can be recovered, except some critical trips that must be selected by the user (see serial parameters 70.04 - 0.09). The control
allows a programmable number of sequential faults to occur before it shuts off the drive permanently.
Refer to chapter 10 for further details.
8.3.4. Inputs And Outputs Configuration
Digital Inputs Configuration
The Digital Inputs can be configured according to the settings allowed by the macro functions (see chapters 12 paragraph 1). The default
configurations of the Digital Inputs are specified in chapter 7 paragraph 5.
Digital Outputs Configuration
See chapter 12 paragraph 2 for the digital outputs function. The default configurations of the digital outputs are as specified in chapter 7.5.
Analog Inputs Configuration
See chapter 12 paragraph 3 For detailed information about 09.03-09.06 parameters see Chapter 8.
Analog Output Configuration
For detailed information see chapter 12 paragraph 4.
8.4.
Parameters tables
See Appendix C for the complete list of the parameters.
54
9. LEVEL 3 – Advanced System Applications
9.1.
V/Hz Advanced Applications Start-Up
The user can change the programming level of the start-up procedure by use of “Shift” + “<” keys on the keypad, or through the
Programming level icon on the top left side of the PC Interface window. For full details about programming level see chapter 6.
If the user wants to change the Quick Motor or Advanced Motor selected configuration (i.e. a control configuration at programming level
#1 or #2), into an Advanced System Application Stat-Up procedure, he/she has to follow this procedure:
For example: in the V/Hz Quick Moor Application, the PC shows the following window:
It is possible to select programming level #3 by use of:
the Programming Level icon
or “Shift” + “<” keys.
The parameter family will be updated (if keypad basic is in use, label
MLOAD” will be displayed. If keyboard IF or AF is in use, “PGM level
Changed” is displayed)
NOTE
The setting of several parameters is the same for various control types. see paragraph 9.4
55
9.
LEVEL 3 – Advanced System Applications
After a few seconds, the PC Interface
shows this window
With programming level set at 3, if the V/Hz advanced system application is selected, the user can access the following list of parameters:
9.1.1. Motor Menu
The user can change the following general motor data and V/Hz settings:
56
9.
LEVEL 3 – Advanced System Applications
Main Settings Family allows the user
to do the following actions:
Change the Power unit of measure (EU or NEMA). Default setting is kW. It is possible to select
hp by setting “NEMA” in the box of parameter: EU-NEMA Select [01.01].
Change the Motor Control Mode, as explained in par. 6.2, Parameter: Motor Control Mode
[01.02]
Reset the user’s default values by use of parameter Reset All [01.03].
Insert a code that prevents parameter changes: Parameter Security [01.05].
Motor Data Family allows the user to
set or change the motor data. See
chapter 7.1. The following parameters
can be set:
General motor parameter: Motor Power EU [02.03], Motor Voltage[02.05], Motor Full Load
Current[02.06], Motor No Load Current[02.07], Motor frequency[02.08];
Operating frequency limit: Motor Min Oper Freq [02.10] and Motor Max Oper Freq[02.11]
Number of encoder pulses: Encoder Pulse#[02.13]
V/Hz Settings Family allows the user
to select and change the V/Hz
parameters.
Points of V/Hz characteristics. Parameters [04.01], [04.02], [04.03].
Selection of speed feedback: Parameter Speed Fdbck Select [04.04]. Allowable settings:
Feedback = Reference; Feedback = Encoder; Feedback = Analog Input 1.
Boost settings: parameters [04.05], [04.06].
See chapter 12 for additional information.
9.1.2. Standard Macros
The ATV control contains a number of functions that satisfy various process requirements. Each function can be enabled and configured
by properly setting the related configuration parameters; related commands can be sent to the drive either through terminal board or
through fieldbus. See chapter 10 for more detailed information. The standard macros available for V/Hz control algorithm are the
following:
Critical speed avoidance
HOA/PULSED STARTSTOP
Current rollback
Low Frequency Current Compensation
Vdc rollback
Main Contactor Delay
Flying restart
Drive Ready Delay Time
Digital Potentiometer
EXTERNAL PID REGULATOR
Vdc under voltage
Free run stop
Auto reset & restart
Auto on/off
9.1.3. Application Macros
The user can select in to Macro V/Hz Sel [12.02]:
DC Braking (refer to chapter 11)
and in to Macro App. Sel [12.03]:
Off
Crane Ctrl (refer to chapter 11)
Off
57
9.
LEVEL 3 – Advanced System Applications
Then, the PC Interface window is:
9.1.4. Stability Menu (Low Frequency Stability)
In frequency ranges between 0 ÷ 20 Hz the phase current shows instability zones (deformed wave shape) with peaks close to the rated
value.
This phenomenon can be also measured on the motor current signal. To remove the instability, the control features a current oscillation
compensation system. This system acts on the frequency set to dampen the current oscillations.
If parameter Low Frq Curr Comp En [11.05] in the Standard Macro family is enabled, the user can access the following parameters:
Refer to chapter 11 for further information.
9.1.5. Auto Menu
From the Auto Menu the user can access the following sub-menus. Refer to the mentioned chapters for further information.
Speed demad setup (see chapter 10): It is possible to select the Speed Demand source and the overall parameters necessary to set the
speed limit, ramp times, preset speed and Digital Inputs (DI) Selection.
Auto On/Off (see chapter 10): The Auto ON/OFF function starts the drive after a programmable delay if the speed reference from the
analog input is greater than an “on” speed threshold, and stops it after a programmable delay if the speed reference is lower than an “off”
speed threshold.
Critical Speed Avoidance (see chapter 10): By means of this function it is possible to skip the speed reference that can excite
mechanical resonance frequencies in the motor/load system.
Current Rollback (see chapter 10): This function is used to limit the motor current during acceleration or in steady state during sudden
load variations in order to avoid overcurrent trips.
VDC Rollback (see chapter 10): This function is used to limit the DC bus voltage during deceleration when no braking devices are
installed.
Flying Restart (see chapter 10): This function is used when the drive has to start with a spinning motor.
Digital Potentiometer (see chapter 10): The digital potentiometer changes the speed reference through discrete increments (up
command), or discrete decrements (down command).
VDC Undervoltage (see chapter 10): The control provides a function that prevents the drive from being tripped in the event of transient
voltage drops in the mains.
External PID regulator (see chapter 10): This function sets the speed reference through a closed loop control (PID regulator).
DC Braking (see chapter 11): This function allows braking of the motor by feeding it with a DC voltage. Kinetic energy is thus dissipated
fully inside the rotor, and this prevents the DC voltage from increasing and tripping the drive.
Crane Control (see chapter 11) : This function allows to manage the opening and closing of a mechanical brake with the relative safety
procedure and diagnostic.
58
9.
LEVEL 3 – Advanced System Applications
9.2.
Advanced System Applications Start-Up - Sensorless or Field Oriented Control
When parameter Macro Control Mode[01.02] is set to SLS or FOC the
following menus come in view on the PC Interface:
At the programming level 3 (that is an advanced system application type FOC or SLS), the user can access the following list of
parameters:
9.2.1. Motor Menu
The user can change the following parameters that concern the general motor information and Foc/Sls settings:
59
9.
LEVEL 3 – Advanced System Applications
Main Settings Family
allows the user to do the
following actions:
Change the Power Unit of Measure (EU or NEMA). Default setting is kW. HP can be set by selecting “NEMA”
from the pop up list of parameter: EU-NEMA Select [01.01].
Change the Motor Control Mode as explained in Chapter 6 paragraph 3. Parameter: Motor Control Mode
[01.02]
Reset user’s default values by means of Parameter Reset All [01.03].
Motor Data Family allows
the user to change the
motor data. See chapter
7.1. The following
parameters can be set:
General motor parameters: Motor Power [02.03], Motor Voltage [02.05], Motor Full Load Current [02.06],
Motor No Load Current [02.07], Motor frequency [02.08];
Operating frequency limits: Motor Min Oper Freq [02.10] and Motor Max Oper Freq [02.11]
Motor Overload Limit [02.12]
Encoder pulse number: Encoder Pulse# [02i.13] (FOC only)
Settings for operating frequency zero and hysteresis: parameters Set Zero Frequency [02.14] e Set Zero
Freq Band [02.15]
Speed to start motor defluxing: parameter Mtr Base Spd Offset [02.16]
Motor power: parameter Motor Power Factor [02.17] (FOC only)
Energy saver Minimum Flux allowed: parameter: NRG Saver Min Flux [02.19]
60
9.
LEVEL 3 – Advanced System Applications
9.2.2. Motor Parameters
This family allows the user to select and change:
FOC motor parameters and magnetization characteristic points, as shown below:
SLS motor parameters, as shown below:
61
9.
LEVEL 3 – Advanced System Applications
9.2.3. Standard Macros
The drive control contains a number of functions that satisfy various process requirements. Each function can be enabled and configured
by properly setting the related configuration parameters; related commands can be sent to the drive either through terminal block or
through fieldbus.
The following macros are available:
SLS Control
FOC Control
Reference chapter
Critical speed avoidance
Vdc rollback
Digital Potentiometer
Vdc under voltage
Auto Tuning Select
Free run stop
Auto reset & restart
Auto on/off
HOA/Pulsed StartStop
Flying restart
Manual tuning
Main contactor delay
Drive ready delay time
External PID Regulator
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
10
10
10
10
7
10
10
10
10
x
x
x
x
10
9.2.4. Application Macros
The user can select with parameter
[12.01]:
[12.03]:
Off
Torque Limit Current (see chapter 11)
Helper (see chapter 11)
Pope (see chapter 11)
Drooping (see chapter 11)
Tension (see chapter 11)
Torque Reference Command (see chapter 11)
Off
Crane Ctrl (see chapter 11)
PC Interface window:
9.2.5. Stability Menu – Vector Control Regulator
The user has access to these parameters:
See chapter 11 for details about tuning.
62
9.
LEVEL 3 – Advanced System Applications
9.2.6. Auto Menu
From the Auto Menu it is possible to access the following sub-menus. Refer to the specified chapters for further information.
Speed reference set-up (see chapter 10): It is possible to select the Speed Reference Source and the overall parameters necessary to
set the speed limit, ramp times, preset speed and Digital Inputs (DI) Selection.
Torque Ref Lim Set (see Chapter 11): This function controls the upper and lower torque values through an external signal.
Drooping (see chapter 11): The Internal Drooping function controls several motors mechanically coupled in the same process line. The
speed reference of one motor is reduced by its control when the load increases, independently of the action of the other motors.
Auto on/off (see chapter 10): The Auto ON/OFF function starts the drive after a programmable delay if the speed reference from the
analog input is greater than an “on” speed threshold, and stops it after a programmable delay if the speed reference is lower than an “off”
speed threshold.
PID regulator (see chapter 10): This function determines the speed reference through a closed loop control (PID regulator).
Pope (see chapter 11): This function controls the peripheral winders. Its principle is similar to that of the Helper function, the main
difference being that there is no master drive in this case, and, therefore, the torque reference is modified with respect to an internal
torque reference value which is frozen when the function is enabled.
Helper (see chapter 11): The Helper function controls the load sharing between two drives when their motors are mechanically coupled,
or the process requires a master-slave configuration.
Tension (see chapter 11): This function is used to apply a constant force to a material driven by two drives controlled in speed. In this
condition the force applied is directly proportional to the speed difference between the two drives. The two drives have the same speed
reference. The function is enabled on one drive only, and affects the drive ramp speed reference.
Critical Speed Avoidance (see chapter 11): By means of this function it is possible to skip the speed reference that can excite
mechanical resonance frequencies in the motor/load system.
VDc Rollback (see chapter 11): This function is used to limit the DC bus voltage during deceleration when no braking devices are
installed.
Flying Restart (see chapter 11): The Flying Restart function is used when the drive must start with a spinning motor.
Tuning Speed Regulator (see chapter 11): The user has access to the parameters that concern the Speed Control Regulator.
Tuning flux or Isd (see chapter 11): The user has access to the parameters that concern the Flux Control Regulator.
Digital Potentiometer (see chapter 11): The digital potentiometer changes the speed reference through discrete increments (up
command), or discrete decrements (down command).
VDC Undervoltage (see chapter 10): The control provides a function that prevents the drive from being tripped in the event of transient
voltage drops in the mains.
Current Rollback (see chapter 10): This function is used to limit the motor current during acceleration or in steady state during sudden
load variations, to avoid overcurrent trips.
Crane Control (see chapter 11): This function allows to manage the opening and closing of a mechanical brake with the relative safety
procedure and diagnostic.
63
9.
LEVEL 3 – Advanced System Applications
9.3.
Advanced Application Start-Up – Settings for All Controls
9.3.1. Digital Outputs Configuration
See paragraph 12.1.
9.3.2. Analog Inputs Configuration
See paragraph 12.3. For detailed information about [09.03]-[09.06] parameters see Chapter 8.
9.3.3. Analog Outputs Configuration
See chapter 12.4 for settings.
9.3.4. Drive Menu
The user can change Drive size, AC Input Voltage, Phase Sequence, Drive Overload Class, Switching Frequency. It is also possible to
enable the digital filter on the encoder signal, the Command reference (from terminal block or network), and assign a slave identifier
number for networks.
9.3.5. Alarms settings
The user can enable the following alarms:
Loss of analog speed demand alarm. Further information is included in chapter 10.
Overcurrent alarm.
9.3.6. Manual Command
The user can reset the CPU from a remote station. The following operations are necessary to reset the drive:
Enable parameter Reset CPU En
Type-in #23, then #0 in parameter Reset CPU
64
9.
LEVEL 3 – Advanced System Applications
9.3.7. Protection
See chapter 13.5
9.3.8. Protection Menu
Fast Coast (Emergency Stop)
See paragraph 11.8 for further information.
Motor Thermal Overload Protection
See paragraph 10.9 for detailed information.
Motor Speed trip/alarm
See paragraph 13.1 for detailed information.
It is possible to configure the way of acting of the motor in case of :
speed deviation: [67.01], [67.02], [67.03] parameters.
overspeed: [67.04], [67.05], [67.06], [67.07] parameters.
motor stall: [67.08], [67.09] parameters.
Auto Reset and Restart
Refer to chapter 10.11 for further details.
9.3.9. Logs Control
Faults/Alarms Log
Refer to chapter 13.2 for detailed information.
Trace settings
See chapter 11.15 for further information.
RTC Settings
See chapter 13.3 for further information.
9.3.10. Communication Menu
See Communication Manual.
9.4.
Parameters Tables
Refer to Appendix C for the complete list of parameters.
65
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
The Standard Macro listed in the following table are available at level 2
MACRO
Speed Demand
10.1
Ramps
10.2
Preset Speed
10.3
Digital Potentiometer
10.4
Speed Command Loss
10.5
Critical Speed Avoidance
10.6
VDC Rollback
10.7
Current Rollback
10.8
Motor Overload Thermal Protection
10.9
Free Run Stop
10.10
AutoReset & Restart
10.11
HOA / Pulsed Start Stop
10.12
Auto On / Off
10.13
VDC Undervoltage Prevention - Ride Through
10.14
Flying Restart (V/Hz)
10.15
Flying Restart (SLS)
10.16
Energy Saver (SLS, FOC)
10.17
External PID Regulator
10.18
The ATV control contains a number of macros that satisfy most process requirements. Each function can be enabled and configured by
properly setting the related configuration parameters. The related commands can be sent to the drive either through terminal block or
through fieldbus. The table above shows the list of the functions that are available for three control algorithms (FOC, SLS, and V/Hz)
66
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.1. Speed Demand Set-Up
By use of the Speed demand setup [22.00] family, and from the Auto Menu the user can set many functions regarding speed algorithm
control such as speed references, speed limits, acceleration/deceleration times, speed control by preset speeds and special functions like
Pulse Stop, etc. The Speed Demand set up window for V/HZ control mode is shown below:
67
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
Speed demand set-up window for FOC or SLS control:
68
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.1.1. Speed Reference Source Selection
Parameter Speed Ref Source Sel [22.01] selects the speed reference source. The possible settings are as follows:
Motor Pot
Main reference from digital potentiometer
AI1 XM1-26
Main reference from analog input terminal for Microprocessor Plus board
Network
FixedSpd
Main reference from serial network
Main reference from pre-set speed parameters Preset Speed 1 [22.26] thru Preset Speed 4 [22.29].
Switching from Preset Speed 1 to Preset Speed 4 comes from the digital inputs selected trhough parameters DIFix speed Sel 1 [22.30] and DI-Fix speed Sel 2 [22.31].
Main reference from analog input terminal for Microprocessor Plus board
Main reference from keypad and PC interface
AI2 XM1-28
Keypad
Spd dmnd src
Speed Ref Source Sel
AI1 XM1-14 (-26)
bit (P27.13 DI-Pid
Enable) = 1
Network
Fixed Spd
AI1 XM1-16 (-28)
Speed/Frequency
Reference
MotorPot
KeyPad
Off
Off
PID
Do not use the Speed Ref Source Sel [22.02], but only the Aux Ref Source Sel [22.03]
When the Analog Input Terminal is selected as the source for speed reference, the user must refer to chapter 12.3 for detailed
information.
It should be noted that:
if V/Hz control is used, the analog input is defined as a Frequency Source (Hz),
if FOC or SLS control is used, the analog input is defined as a speed source (RPM).
When the PID function is activated (see chapter 13), the source for the speed reference can be switched between the sources shown in
the above table and the PID output (see parameter DI-PID Enable [27.13]).
Moreover an Auxiliary speed reference source is available by use of parameter Aux ref Source Sel [22.02]. The possible settings are the
same as specified for parameter Speed Ref Source Sel [22.01].
By means of parameter DI – Aux Ref En Sel [22.03] the user can select the digital input (pertaining to Microprocessor or to DI/DO
Expansion Board or to a bit from Network Command Word – refer to appendix D for the complete pick list) that enables the auxiliary
speed reference as set by parameter Aux ref Source Sel [22.02].
The parameter DI – Reverse Enable Select [22.04] allows a Digital Input to be configured that enables the rotation direction change (refer
to appendix D), in Manual Mode and with JOG command selected, it is impossible to change the rotation direction.
10.1.2. Motor Minimum Operating Frequency
The parameter Motor Min Oper Freq [02.10] defines the minimum frequency that the drive can output to the motor, regardless of the
speed or frequency reference. This parameter is active in every control mode and programming level.
As soon as the drive receives the start command, it brings the frequency output up to the value specified by this parameter, at a rate
defined by the set acceleration ramp.
The output frequency will begin to change when the speed/frequency reference is greater than the minimum operating frequency.
If, during motor operation, the speed or frequency reference value becomes lower than the minimum operating frequency, the output
frequency is clamped to the value specified by Motor Min Oper Freq [02.10].
When the stop command is given to the drive, the output frequency is ramped down to zero, at a rate defined by the deceleration ramp.
The speed or frequency reference can also take either positive or negative values (defining the sense of rotation). When the speed or
frequency reference is moved from positive values down to negative values, the output frequency of the drive is clamped to parameter
Motor Min Oper Freq [02.10] until the speed or frequency reference is positive. When the speed or frequency reference crosses zero, the
output frequency ramps down to zero and goes up again, but in reverse rotation, to Motor Min Oper Freq [02.10]. It stays clamped until
the frequency or speed reference requires an output frequency greater than the Motor Min Oper Freq [02.10].
69
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.1.3. Rate of Frequency Change
The rate of change of the frequency is set by the acceleration and deceleration ramps. The value of parameter Motor Min Oper Freq
[02.10] must be lower than the value of parameter Motor Max Oper Freq [02.11].
10.1.4. Motor Maximum Operating Frequency
Parameter Motor Max Oper Freq [02.11] defines the maximum frequency that the drive can output to the motor, regardless of the speed
or frequency reference. This parameter is always active, in every control mode and at every programming level.
For correct motor operation, Motor Max Oper Freq [02.11] must be set at value greater than Motor Min Oper Freq [02.10] and greater than
Motor Frequency [02.08].
10.1.5. Forward and Reverse Speed/Frequency Reference Limits
V/Hz Control Modes
When
the
motor
is
driven
in
V/Hz
Control
Mode,
the
speed
reference
is
given
in
Hz.
The user can define an upper limit for the speed reference, acting as a clamp on either the forward value - Fwd Ref Freq Limit [22.11] – or on the
reverse value - Rev Ref Freq Limit [22.10] - of the speed reference. The clamp value is defined in Hz.
In forward rotation, the maximum frequency that the drive can output is the lowest value between the setting of parameter Motor Max Oper Freq
[02.11]
and
the
setting
of
parameter
Fwd
Ref
Freq
Limit
[22.11].
In reverse rotation, the maximum frequency that the drive can output is the lowest value between the setting of parameter Motor Max Oper Freq
[02.11] and the setting of parameter Rev Ref Freq Limit [22.10].
FOC and SLS Control Modes
When the motor is driven in FOC or Sensorless Control Mode, the speed reference is given in rpm.
The user can define an upper limit for the speed reference, acting as a clamp on either the forward value - Fwd Ref Speed Limit [22.09] – or on the
reverse value - Rev Ref Speed Limit [22.08] - of the speed reference. The clamp value is defined in rpm.
In forward rotation, the maximum frequency that the drive can output is the lowest value between the setting of parameter Motor Max Oper Freq
[02.11] and the frequency that corresponds to the speed set by the parameter Fwd Ref Speed Limit [22.09].
In reverse rotation, the maximum frequency that the drive can output is the lowest value between the setting of parameter Motor Max Oper Freq
[02.11] and setting of parameter Rev Ref Speed Limit [22.08].
Parameter
22.08
22.09
22.10
22.11
Description
Unit
Control
Rev Ref Speed Limit
Minimum allowed reverse speed reference
rpm
F,S
Fwd Ref Speed Limit
Rev Ref Freq Limit
Fwd Ref Freq Limit
Maximum allowed forward speed reference
Minimum allowed reverse speed reference
Maximum allowed forward speed reference
rpm
Hz
Hz
F,S
V
V
Name
Figure 10.1
Speed/frequency Limit
70
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.2. Preset Speeds
The Preset Speed function, enabled through parameter Speed Ref Source Sel [22.01], gives a pre-set speed reference. The parameter
accepts FREQUENCY values in Hz.
Speed Ref Source Sel = FixedSpd
Four speeds are available, which are defined by use of parameters Preset speed 1 [22.26], Preset speed 2 [22.27], Preset speed 3
[22.28], Preset speed 4 [22.29].
DI - Fix speed Sel 1
P22.30
DI - Fix speed Sel 2
P22.31
Preset speed 4 P22.29
Preset speed 3 P22.28
Fixed Spd
Preset speed 2 P22.27
Preset speed 1 P22.26
It is possible to switch the speeds by use of two digital inputs of the control board, which are selected by use of parameters DI-Fix speed
Sel 1 [22.30], DI-Fix speed Sel 2 [22.31] (The allowable values are shown in Appendix D).
Preset speed
Status
1
2
DI-Fix speed Sel 1[22.30]
Off
On
3
On
4
Off
OFF = contact open on control board terminal
DI-Fix speed Sel 2[22.31]
Off
Off
On
On
ON = contact closed on +24V control board terminal
The diagram shows the motor speed waveform when the commands are fed through the terminal block and preset speed Preset speed 2
is selected through the digital input.
Start Command
Start
Stop
DI-FIX speed Sel 1
ON
OFF
Motor Speed
Preset speed 1
Preset speed 2
Figure10.2 Motor Speed Waveform
71
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.3. Digital Potentiometer
The Digital Potentiometer changes the speed reference by means of discrete increments (up command) or decrements (down command).
The last speed reference set through the digital potentiometer can be memorized by a “Memorize” command: the value is maintained until
the command stays high. When ATV is stopped the memorized reference is stored and actuated at the next start.
The Digital Potentiometer function can be enabled only for the main speed reference seeting the parameter 11.06 (Motor pot enable) =
enable.
When the function is enabled, the Auto Menu displays the motor Potentiometer [40.00] parameter family:
Parameter
40.01
40.02
40.03
40.04
40.05
40.06
40.07
Name
Speed step increment
Speed step decrement
Rmp start delay time
Speed reverse enable
DI-Increment source
DI-Decrement source
DI-Memory source
Description
Unit
Speed reference increment
Speed reference decrement
Delay for reference unlocking
Enables the negative references
Selects digital input for the increase command
Selects digital input for the decrease command
Selects digital input for the memorize command
%
%
s
Motor pot enable P11.06
MotorPot Memory
Speed step increment P40.01
START
DI-Memory source P40.07
DI-Increment source P40.05
0%
Motor Max Oper Freq P02.11
DI-Decrement source P40.06
Hz
Spd dmnd DR(%)
MotorPot
%
76.05
%
t <P40.03
-100
100
Speed step decrement P40.02
Mtp Rev on
Mtp Rev off
Speed reverse Enable P40.04
Rmp start delay time P40.03
Ramp & Ref Enable
As default, the digital potentiometer function modifies the speed reference between 0 and 100% of maximum speed (parameter Motor
Max Oper Freq [02.11]). The speed range can be expanded to the negative region. The parameter Speed reverse enable [40.04] selects
the speed range:
Speed reverse enable = Mtp Rev off (speed range 0 ÷ 100%)
(default value)
Speed reverse enable = Mtp Rev on (speed range ±100%)
“Up”, “Down” and “Memorize” commands can be sent through terminal block, digital expansion board or through Fieldbus. See Appendix
D.
If the “Up” or “Down” command is held for a time longer than the time set by the parameter Ramp start delay time [40.03], the speed
reference is unlocked and the motor speed will increase or decrease according to the active ramp (refer to 10.6 Ramps). When the “Up”
or “Down” command is released, the reference coming from digital potentiometer will be set equal to the present value of the reference
after the ramp (time (a)Figure 10.3).
If parameter Aux Ref Source Sel [22.02] enables an auxiliary reference (from analog input, fieldbus or preset speed) together with the
potentiometer reference, the transition from the auxiliary reference to the main reference is carried out without any discontinuities.
72
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
Start
Up (COM1)
DOWN (COM2)
Store Reference
(COM3)
Speed Ref.
Motor speed
FlMtp
(a)
Figure 10.3 Links between Commands and Feedbacks for Digital Potentiometer
10.4. Speed Command Loss
This function is enabled through parameter Signal loss alm enbl [68.03] and operates only when the speed command comes from
terminal block. If the speed command is lost (i.e. loss caused by a broken wire), three different situations can take place depending on the
setting of the function:
Signal loss alm enbl =
Signal loss alm enbl =
Off
Ref Loss Trp
Signal loss alm enbl =
Alarm
Signal loss alm enbl =
Alm Preset
Function disabled
When the command is lost, a trip is generated and the drive stops. The trip is annunciated by message:
-on keypad BF:
F0221
-on keypad IF/AF and PC: AnaSigLoss
An alarm is generated and the drive continues running at the latest speed reference before command loss.
The alarm is annunciated by message: -on keypad BF:
F0312
-on keypad IF/AF and PC: AnaSigLoss
-on a digital output (if configured)
An alarm is generated and the drive should keep running at the preset speed active
The alarm is annunciated by message:
-on keypad BF:
F0312
-on keypad IF/AF and PC: AnaSigLoss
-on a digital output (if configured)
For correct function operation a 4-20 mA signal must feed the speed reference. In case a 0-10 Volt source is used, the user must select a
correct parameter setting for the Analog Input used. In the latter case, set point 1 (the value in % of the input signal voltage full scale) of
the Analog Input must be greater than 0%.
SETTING EXAMPLES FOR 4-20 mA INPUT ON ANALOG INPUT #1:
[09.03] AI1 Setpoint #1 (%) = 20 %
[09.04] AI1 Setpoint #1 Val = 0
[09.05] AI1 Setpoint #2 (%) = 100 %
[09.06] AI1 Setpoint #2 Val = 1500
SETTING EXAMPLES FOR 0-10 V INPUT ON ANALOG INPUT #2:
[09.03] AI2 Setpoint #1 (%) = 10 %
[09.04] AI2 Setpoint #1 Val = 0
[09.05] AI2 Setpoint #2 (%) = 100 %
[09.06] AI2 Setpoint #2 Val = 1500
10.5. Critical Speed Avoidance
This function prevents continuous operation of the motor at a speed corresponding to the motor frequencies set by use of the parameters
shown here below:
The function is enabled by this parameter:
When parameter 11.01 is enabled, the Critical Speed Skip[33.00]
parameter family is displayed, which is included in the Auto Menu
Parameter
11.01
Name (HF/PC)
Critical Speed En
Parameter
33.01
33.02
33.03
33.04
33.05
Name (HF/PC)
Critical Speed 1
Critical speed 1 Band
Critical Speed 2
Critical speed 2 Band
Critical Speed 3
Critical speed 3 Band
33.06
Unit
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
73
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
Three critical frequencies can be defined, through parameters Critical Speed 1[33.01], Critical Speed 2[33.03], and Critical Speed 3
[33.05].
Frequency avoidance is obtained by use of a hysteresis value preset for each frequency through parameters Critical speed 1 Band
[33.02], Critical speed 2 Band [33.04] and Critical speed 3 Band [33.06]. The hysteresis is twice the value set for the Band.
This figure shows how a critical
frequency crossing is handled.
Fmax
Fref
Band
Figure 10.5
Example of critical frequency
crossing
Band
2 Band
CrFr
Input frequency
Note 1: The frequency jump is made according to the active speed ramp.
Note 2: Function Critical Speed Avoidance, if enabled, can perform a jump of the frequencies set by use of Critical Speed 1, 2 and
3 parameters only if a value different from zero has been entered for the band.
Note 3: The set critical speed values are clamped automatically to the maximum frequency set through parameter Motor Max Opr Freq
[02.11].
10.6. Ramps
10.6.1. Acceleration And Deceleration Times
The speed reference is processed by a ramp function that defines the acceleration and deceleration times. The ramp function can be
enabled or disabled by use of parameter Ramp enable [22.25]
Ramp enable = Ramp On (default value)
Ref.
Max
The acceleration time (Tacc) is set in seconds and defines the time
necessary to accelerate from zero to maximum speed (parameter Motor
Max Oper Freq [02.11])
The deceleration time (Tdecel) is set in seconds and defines the time
necessary to decelerate from maximum speed (parameter Motor Max Oper
Freq [02.11]) to zero.
Figure 10.6.1
T-up
T-
t
Four sets of acceleration and deceleration times are available. They are set by use of the following parameters:
Ramp used setting
Acceleration time (s)
Acc. Time 1 [22.12]
Acc. Time 2 [22.16]
Acc. Time 3 [22.18]
Acc. Time 4 [22.20]
Set. 1 (default)
Set. 2
Set. 3
Set. 4
Deceleration time (s)
Decel. Time 1 [22.13]
Decel. Time 2 [22.17]
Decel. Time 3 [22.19]
Decel. Time 4 [22.21]
To activate setting 2, 3 or 4 the user must feed a command to one of the digital inputs of the control board, that are selected through
parameters DI-Chg rmp rate sel 1 [22.24] and DI-Chg rmp rate sel 2 [22.25] in the Speed demand set up[22.00] parameter family which is
to be found in the Auto Menu. The allowable settings for these parameters are shown in Appendix D.
To shift between settings, use the following table:
Ramp setting
Status
DI-Chg rmp rate sel
1[22.23]
DI- Chg rmp rate sel
2[22.24]
1
2
3
4
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
OFF = contact open on control board
terminal
ON = contact closed on +24V control board
terminal
Acceleration and deceleration times 1 through 4 can be multiplied by a fixed number (10 or 25) set through parameter Accel multiplier
[22.14] and parameter Decel multiplier [22.15] respectively.
The multipliers act simultaneously on the four settings.
74
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
Another method to move among the acceleration ramps is through three speed thresholds. These thresholds are set by Speed Threshold
1 [22.42], Speed Threshold 2 [22.43], Speed Threshold 3 [22.44]. Note that you must set every threshold with growing value with serial
number of the parameter, otherwise an error occurred.
To select digital input or speed threshold as input described above, you must indicate one of these by Change Ramp Mode [22.41]; the
default value is “digital input”.
10.6.2. Shaped Ramp
Parameter Jerk rate time [22.22] allows the speed profile to become smoothly blended at speed changes.
Ref.
[22.12]
[22.22]
[22.22]
t
75
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
PSS_Pot
a_2
MAN2
Pot
MAN1
KeyPad
Spd dmnd UR(%)
PSS_Keypad
Keypad
Spd dmnd UR(rpm)
Motor pot enable
Auto_Level
P11.06
MAN
Ramp Enable
Auto_edge
P22.25
Jerk rate time
P22.22
PSS_Select
Add Rif
a_2
Fwd Ref Freq Limit
Select
KeyPad
DI-HOA Speed sel P25.05
AUTO
Rif
MARCIA
Lim 2
Accel multiplier
Rev Ref Freq Limit
P22.10
Decel multiplier
Accel Time 1
P22.12
Decel Time 1
P22.13
Accel Time 2
P22.16
Decel Time 2
P22.17
Accel Time 3
P22.18
Decel Time 3
P22.19
Accel Time 4
P22.20
Decel Time 4
P22.21
DI-Chg rmp rate sel1
76
I_roll_back
P22.23
Vdc_roll_back
Curr rollback En
VDC rollback En
P11.02
P11.03
DI-Chg rmp rate sel2
P22.24
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.7. VDC Rollback
This function is used to limit the DC bus voltage during deceleration, when no braking devices are installed. The following parameter is
used to enable this function:
Parameter
Name (HF/PC)
VDC Rollback En
11.03
When parameter VDC Rollback En [11.03] is enabled, the VDC Rollback [35.00] parameter family is displayed, that is included in the Auto
Menu:
Parameter
Name
Description
Control
35.01
VDC Threshold
This parameter is used to adjust the voltage threshold (746V for F Class, 1073V for K Class) that activates the
V/Hz,
SLS,
VDC Rollback function. The user can increase such a threshold voltage, adding up to 50 Volt, by means of this
parameter. The value is entered in Volt.
FOC
35.04
VDC Upper Limit
The value entered must be in % of the Motor Max Oper Freq [02.11], which gives the transient maximum increase
V/Hz
in the stator frequency, when the DC voltage exceeds the specified threshold.
Note: If only the Ramp Lock function is desired, this parameter must be set to zero.
The function becomes active only under transient conditions during the deceleration phase. It operates in two ways, according to the
selected Motor Control Mode [01.02]:
FOC or Sensorless Motor Control Mode
When the VDC Rollback function is activated, the control of the drive reduces the motor torque.
The function uses three parameters, which have a default setting that depends on the size of the drive. It is not necessary to change the
default values for the most common applications. Only when using very large motors with much inertia a change of these parameters may
be required to achieve better control.
VDC Threshold [35.01]: the only adjustment allowed is the increase in the threshold voltage that activates the function.
Figure 10.7.1 – Schematics of VDC Rollback Regulator, with FOC or Sensorless Control
NOTE
The applied upper torque limit will be lower than or equal to the lower torque limit set by use of parameter
Torq Lower Limit1 FW [17.07] or parameter Torq Lower Limit2 FW [17.14].
V/Hz control mode
When the VDC Rollback is activated, two combined actions limit the DC voltage.
Deceleration ramp lock, active immediately when the DC bus voltage exceeds the specified threshold.
Increase of motor frequency (transient only), active only if parameter VDC Upper Limit [35.04] is set at a value different from zero.
The function uses four parameters, which have a default setting according the drive size. The most common applications do not ned the
change of the default values; the change of these parameters may be required to achieve better control when using very big motors with
large load inertia.
VDC Threshold [35.01]: the only adjustment allowed is the increase in the threshold voltage that activates the function. This adjustment
is sometimes necessary for large motors (motor power of some hundreds of kW).
VDC Upper Limit [35.04]: this parameter is set to zero by default. If the ramp lock is not enough to prevent drive from tripping due to DC
bus Overvoltage,the user can slowly increase the setting of this parameter in 1 % increments. It means that, when the function becomes
active, the ramp locks and the frequency reference is increased by the % entered.
Activation annunciation:
When the Ramp Lock function is active in all controls (V/Hz, SLS, FOC), the following message is displayed on the IF/AF Keypad and PC
Interface: LockRmpVlt and the following message is displayed on the BF keypad: “LRMLV”.
Figure 10.7 Schematics of VDC Rollback Regulator, with V/Hz Control
77
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.8. Current Rollback (V/HZ)
This function is used to limit the motor current during acceleration or during sudden load variations in steady state to avoid over-current
trips.
During acceleration, two combined actions limit the current:
1. acceleration ramp lock
2. motor current loop control, aimed to decrease the motor frequency (only for short time, to let the motor current decrease
below desired value)
In steady state only the motor current loop control limits the current.
Parameter
Name
The Current Rollback function is enabled by setting this
parameter:
11.02
Curr Rollback En
With parameter Curr Rollback En [11.02] enabled, the Current Lim Rollback [34.00] parameter family, included in the Auto Menu, is
displayed.
As default, the function is enabled in acceleration ramp lock only.
When the ramp lock function becomes active, the following message is displayed on keypad and PC interface:
•
LockRmpCur
Parameter setting: The function uses four parameters, which have a default setting that depends on the size of ATV. The user has no need to
change the default values for the most common applications. Only when using very large motors with much inertia a change of these
parameters may be required to achieve better control.
The following parameters are available, and their default values are shown in Figure 10.10.
Param.
34.01
Name
Description
Current Threshold Current motor threshold expressed in % of maximum current (max current =[02.06] motor rated current x
[02.12] motor overload limit),. When the current exceeds this value, the ramp is locked and the current
regulator, if enabled (see parameter [34.04]), starts operating.
Note:
Note: Setting the Current Threshold parameter to zero disables the ramp lock function
The current regulator cannot damp the motor current oscillations, if any, produced by the load. If the current regulator
setpoint (parameter Current Threshold [34.01]) is set to a value close to the current absorbed during normal operation, the
regulator can cause undesired oscillations of the frequency reference and hence of the motor current.
Figure 10.8
Ramp Lock Based on
Current Limit Regulator
78
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.9. Motor overload Protection
This function defines the overload current, the overload condition duration and the action that the user can take. The protection and alarm
conditions are available on two digital outputs properly set (MotTHFault, MotTHAlarm vedi capitolo 9B).
Parameter
66.01
66.02
66.03
66.04
These parameters are used to configure the function:
Name
Trip/alarm mode sel
Overload
Overload timeout
Speed Over Load
Overload [66.02]:
Maximum overload current entered in percent of the motor rated current as defined by parameter Mot
Full Load Curr [02.06]
Overload timeout [66.03]:
Maximum time permitted in maximum overload condition
Trip/alarm mode sel [66.01]:
ImTrmAlarm:
Control actions after an overload condition. The user can select:
an alarm is generated, and the following message is displayed on
Keypad BF:
F0309
Keypad IF/AF or PC:
Therm Hi date – time
a trip is generated, and the following message is displayed on
Keypad BF:
F0213
Keypad IF/AF or PC:
Therm Prt date – time
ImTrmTrip:
Speed Overload [66.04]:
Enables an overload as a function of the speed:
Disable
The overload and overload timeout set through parameters Overload [66.02] and Overload timeout
[66.03] are constant over the entire speed range
Enable
The overload and overload timeout change versus speed according to the following equations:
Motor Speed
Overload = 1 Overload [66 .02 ] ⋅ (1 +
)
2
Mot Full Load Speed [02 .09 ]
Timeout = 1 Oveload timeout [66 . 03 ] ⋅ (1 +
2
Motor Speed
)
Mot Full Load Speed [02 .09 ]
t TRIP =
The intervention time can be calculated by the following formula
1.52 − 1
 I ⋅ 1.5

 S
Overload 

2
−1
⋅ Timeout
Note 1: The function is enabled only if the overload setting Overload [66.02] is > 105%
Note 2: If the user selects Trip mode, the drive shuts down when the overload is detected. If the Alarm mode is selected, the drive will
annunciate the Overload condition, but no action is taken on motor load or current.
Note 3: The overload thermal trip can occur for also because the drive thermal overload protection cuts in. Refer to the parameter
Therm flt src [78.08] of the Meter menu for the visualization of the cause.
The overload condition is over when the following is true:
∫ (I
s
s
  Overload
[66.02]
≥ 

100

- I 2n ) dt
2


 - 1  ∗


(
Overload
Timeout
[66.03]
)
where: Is = current absorbed by motor; In = motor rated current.
EXAMPLE
In = 400°
motor rated current
Iov = 620A
admissible overload current for 60s
Tsc = 60s
overload time-out
Based on these data:
Overload = (620/400) *100 = 155%
Overload timeout = 60s
If the current absorbed by the motor is 620A, the Motor Overload Trip will occur after 60s.
If the current absorbed by the motor is lower or greater than 620A, the timeout will be greater or lower than 60s.
2
The generic timeout is given by this formula:
t int
 Overload 

 −1
100 

=
⋅ Overload timeout
2
 Is 
  − 1
 In 
79
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.10. Free Run Stop
This function switches off the firing pulses following a Stop command. A few milliseconds after that the drive will restore its Ready status, while the motor coasts to a
stop. Then, the motor can be re-started by use of the Start command.
The “free run stop” is activated through parameter Free Run Stop [11.14] set to:
Free Run Stop [11.14] = Enable
If the start command must be given again before the complete motor stop, it is suggested that the Flying Restart function should be enabled if
control mode is VHZ or SLS.
NOTE
If this parameter is not active, the pulses will be shut down at Set Zero Freq [02.14] and Set Zero Band [02.15]
10.11. Auto Reset & Restart
The Auto Restart option allows automatic resetting of a trip and restarting of the drive. When this function is enabled, any type of trip can
be recovered, except some critical trips that must be selected by the user (see serial parameters 70.04 through 70.09). The drive allows a
programmable number of sequential faults to occur before the drive is shut-down permanently.
The AutoReset& Restart function can be enabled by:
Parameter
11.16
Name
AutoReset&Start Enb
When parameter AutoReset&Start Enb [11.16] is enabled, Protect Menu displays the AutoReset & ReStart [70.00] parameter family.
Parameter
Name
Description
Unit
70.01
Auto Reset Time
Amount of time that must elapse after a recoverable trip, before the unit is allowed to
reset automatically
s
70.02
Auto Reset Attempts
Number of consecutive automatic reset attempts that the drive will perform before a
permanent shutdown occurs
#
70.03
Reset Memory Time
Time that the drive must run without trips before the drive resets the Auto Reset
Attempts counter
Min
70.04
Reset Desaturations
Enables/Disables the auto reset feature for Desaturations trips
70.05
Reset IOC
Enables/Disables the auto reset feature for IOC trips
70.06
Reset Overvoltage
Enables/Disables the auto reset feature for Overvoltage trips
70.07
Reset Undervolt SW
Enables/Disables the auto reset feature for Undervoltage SW trips
70.08
Reset Therm. Ovld
Enables/Disables the auto reset feature for Overload trips
70.09
Reset Undervolt HW
Enables/Disables the auto reset feature for Undervoltage HW trips
When a fault occurs, if the reset function is enabled for that fault, the drive will reset, pre-charge and attempt to start after the time
selected by means of parameter Auto Reset Time [70.01] has elapsed.
If the attempts fail for a number of times equal to that specified by use of parameter Auto Reset Attempt [70.02], the drive is shut down
and a manual reset is required.
The drive should operate at least for x minutes (x being the value of parameter Reset Memory Time [70.03]) without a fault before the
reset counter is set back to 0.
CAUTION !
The user is responsible for enabling of this function.
Ansaldo Sistemi Industriali declains any liability due to inappropriate use of this function.
Make sure that the automatic restart of the machine will not cause phiysical injury and/or damage
equipment
Refers to Standard IEC 60204-1.
80
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.12. HOA / Pulsed Start Stop
10.12.1. General
HOA is an acronym that stands for:
•
•
•
Hands
Off
Automatic
With reference to the selector that permits the selection between manual and automatic mode through two digital input, fuction
HOA/PULSED START STOP allows different selections to be made as to: management mode of the Man/Auto function, control mode of
START/STOP and speed reference source.
This function expands the ATV operating modes up to 9 different management modes of the Man/Auto function.
Parameter HOA/Pulsed StartStop [11.15] permits the function to be enabled by selecting between the following operating modes:
0) Auto_Edge:
Manu/Auto selection through keypad; manual mode commands from keypad, automatic mode commands from
digital input (selectable speed reference source); start command on up edge of digital input.
1) Auto_Level:
Same modes as for “Auto_Edge”, but Start command is active on voltage level (permanently closed contact)
2) Keypad:
Man/Auto selected via terminal block, from a suitably programmed terminal (HOA switches), speed reference from
keypad in manual mode.
3) Pot:
(potentiometer) Man/Auto selected via terminal block, from a suitably programmed terminal (HOA switches), speed
reference from analog input 2 in manual mode.
4) Select:
Man/Auto selected via terminal block, from a suitably programmed terminal (HOA switches), speed reference from
digital input in both manual and automatic mode.
5) PSS:
Pulsed start and stop enable, speed reference from keypad or analog input 2 (as a function of start source).
6) PSS_Keypad:
Man/Auto selected via HOA switches, start and stop enable through pulsed commands, speed reference from
keypad in manual mode.
7) PSS_Pot:
Man/Auto selected via HOA switches, start and stop enable through pulsed commands, speed reference from
analog input 2 in manual mode
8) PSS_Select:
Man/Auto selected via HOA switches, start and stop enable through pulsed commands, speed reference from the
same digital input in manual and automatic mode.
Details about the different operating modes are included in paragraph 11.10.2 “Operating modes” (table 1).
Refer to paragraph 11.10.3 “Pulsed Start Stop” as to pulsed start and stop commands.
If the function is enabled (HOA/Pulsed StartStop [11.15] in a mode other than “Auto_Edge”), the HOA PSS Function [25.00] parameter
family will be displayed, which is included in the Auto Menu.
•
DI- Pulse Stop:
digital input for pulsed stop command,
•
DI- Pulse start:
digital input for pulsed start command,
•
DI- Hand:
digital input to switch to manual mode,
•
DI- Auto:
digital input to switch to automatic mode,
•
DI- HOA Speed sel: digital input to select speed reference source.
See application diagram at the end of paragraph 10.12
The programming of parameter HOA/Pulsed StartStop [11.15] results in the following default configurations, if so required (see table 1):
Default configuration of digital input (when required):
81
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
Default configuration of “Speed Ref Source sel [22.01]” (when required):
when parameter HOA/Pulsed StartStop
[11.15] is:
when parameter HOA/Pulsed StartStop
[11.15] is:
NOTE
Auto_Edge
Auto_Level
Keypad
POt
PSS
PSS_Keypad
PSS_Pot
Select
PSS_Select
These settings can be changed in manual mode.
When function HOA PSS is enabled, the necessary digital or analog input will be assigned unconditionally.
Therefore, it will be released automatically if programmed for other functions.
When function HOA PSS is disabled, the digital input and analog input will be released.
The default configurations shown above refer to Microprocessor Plus board.
10.12.2. Operating Modes
Table 1012.1 includes detailed information for each operating mode. Symbols have the following meaning:
Manual- Automatic selection:
command source for selection of automatic or manual mode
• DI-H
= digital input for selection of Manual mode (assigned with parameter [25.03]),
• DI-A
= digital input for selection of Automatic mode (assigned with parameter [25.04]),
• P-Stop
= digital input for pulsed stop (assigned with parameter [25.01]),
• MAN Key, AUTO Key = MAN/AUTO buttons of keypad (BH, IH AH, Virtual Keypad).
Manual mode:
Start: START command source
• P-Start
= digital input for pulsed Start (assigned with parameter [25.02])
• DI – H
= digital input for Automatic mode selection (assigned with parameter [25.04]). The start command
is acquired when the signal is high.
• MAN Key = MAN buttons of keypad (BH, IH AH, Virtual Keypad).
Stop: STOP command source
• Emergency Stop (E-Stop) and fault conditions (Fault) always cause the drive to stop,
• P-Stop
= digital input for pulsed Stops (assigned with parameter [25.01]),
• STOP Key = STOP buttons of keypad (BH, IH AH, Virtual Keypad).
• DI – H
= digital input for Automatic mode selection (assigned with parameter [25.04]).
The Stop command will be acquired when this digital input is low.
Speed reference: Speed reference source in manual mode
• ∆∇ = can be modified by use of “Up Key” and “Down Key” keys of the keypad. The virtual keypad can write the
speed reference value directly
• AI2 : Analog Input 2 from terminal block
Automatic mode:
Start: START command source
• DI 1 = digital input 1 (Start/Stop). The Start command is acquired when this digital input is high. When the Start
command operates on the level (HOA/Pulsed StartStop [11.15] different from “Auto_Edge”),if the start
command is high when ATV is powered, the drive will start as soon as the precharge phase is completed,
Stop: STOP command source
• Emergency Stop (E-Stop) and fault conditions (Fault) always cause the drive to stop,
• DI 1 = digital input 1 (Start/Stop). The Stop command is acquired when the digital input is low. P-Stop = digital
input for Pulsed stop (assigned with parameter [25.01]),
Speed reference: Speed reference source in automatic mode
• ∆∇ = can be modified by use of “Up Key” and “Down Key” keys of the keypad. The virtual keypad can write the
speed reference value directly.
• Selectable = It is possible to select the source of the main speed reference (see parameter [22.01]) from:
82
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
NOTE
Each analog input can be configured for 4-20 mA current signal
For safety reasons, when a new value of function “HOA” is set, the first time the command will be acquired on the up
edge only. When the digital input is used to switch between manual and automatic mode, the wrong condition
DI-A=1, DI-H=1 forces the AUTOMATIC mode.
Pulsed START STOP function is also called “3 wire control.
Table 10.12.1: Operating Modes Table
HOA
/Pulsed StartStop
[25.01]
Manual
selection
Automatic
selection
0 - Auto_Edge
MAN Key
AUTO Key
MAN Key
AUTO Key
1 - Auto_Level
2 - Keypad
Start
Stop
MAN Key
STOP
Key
STOP
Key
DI-H=1
DI-H=0
MAN Key
Speed Reference
4 - Select
DI-H=1
DI-H=0
AI 2
DI 1=1
(level)
DI-H=0
DI-HOA SS =1
==> AI 2
DI-HOA SS =0
==> ∆∇
DI-H=1
MAN Key or
P-Stop
AUTO Key
MAN Key
P-Start
6 - PSS_Keypad
DI-H
DI-A
MAN Key or
P-Start
7 - PSS_Pot
DI-H
DI-A
MAN Key or
P-Start
8 - PSS_Select
Stop
Speed Reference
DI 1= 0
Selectable through
[22.01] and [22.02]
Selectable through
[22.01] and [22.02]
DI 1= 0
Selectable through
[22.01] and [22.02]
DI 1= 0
Selectable through
[22.01] and [22.02]
DI 1= 0
DI-H
DI-A
5 - PSS
Start
∆∇
∆∇
DI-H
DI-A
Automatic mode
DI 1=1
(edge)
DI 1=1
(level)
DI 1=1
(level)
∆∇
DI-H
DI-A
3 -Pot
Manual mode
DI-H
DI-A
MAN Key or
P-Start
STOP Key
or
P-Stop
STOP Key
or
P-Stop
or
DI-H=0
STOP Key
or
P-Stop
or
DI-H=0
STOP Key
or
P-Stop
or
DI-H=0
∆∇
AI 2
∆∇
AI 2
DI 1=1
(level)
DI 1= 0
DI 1= 0
or
P-Stop
DI-HOA SS =1 ==>
AI 2
DI-HOA SS =0 ==>
∆∇
Selectable through
[22.01] and [22.02]
DI 1=1
(level)
DI 1= 0
Selectable through
[22.01] and [22.02]
DI 1= 0
Selectable through
[22.01] and [22.02]
DI 1=1
(level)
DI 1=1
(level)
DI 1= 0
DI-HOA SS =1
==> AI 2
DI 1=1
(level)
DI-HOA SS =1
==> AI 2
10.12.3. Pulsed Start Stop
This function permits the start and stop command to be fed through two separate digital inputs of the control board. See Chapter 7,
Figures 7.2 for terminal block assignment.
See the application diagram at the end of paragraph 10.12
The digital inputs for the pulsed start/stop command operate as follows:
•
The Stop contact must be open to stop the drive;
•
To start the drive an Off -> On transition must be seen at the Start contact;
•
All Start command actions are ignored if the Stop contact is open.
The pulsed start/stop commands are enabled automatically when parameter HOA/Pulsed StartStop [11.15] has the following values:
5) PSS
6) PSS_Keypad
7) PSS_Pot
8) PSS_Select
Parameter DI – Pulse Stop [25.01] permits the default value of the pulsed Stop command to be changed. Parameter DI – Pulse Start
[25.02] permits the default value of the pulsed Start command to be changed. Refer to Appendix D for the possible settings.
The pulsed command must remain in the new state for at least 100mS in order to be read (irrespective of its source).
Caution: if the autoreset and restart function is enabled together with the pulsed Start / Stop function, no restart occurs at the
end of a recoverable trip because no pulse is sensed at the Start source input.
83
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.12.4. Application Diagram
H OA
uP board
H OA
uP Board
DI-2 Prog
DI-2 Prog
DI-5 Prog
DI-5 Prog
DI-Supply +24
DI-Supply +24
Spd demand
DI-6 Prog
DI-6 Prog
Fig. 10.12.2: HOA Pulsed start stop = Select
Fig.10.12.1: HOA Pulsed start stop = Keypad
HOA Pulsed start stop = Pot
H OA
uP Board
H OA
uP Board
DI-2 Prog
DI-2 Prog
DI-5 Prog
DI-5 Prog
DI-Supply +24
Spd demand
DI-Supply
+24
DI-6 Prog
DI-6 Prog
DI-10 Prog
DI-10 Prog
DI-9 Prog
DI-9 Prog
DI-Supply +24
DI-Supply
+24
Fig.10.12.3: HOA Pulsed start stop = PSS_Keypad
Fig.10.12.4: HOA Pulsed start stop = PSS_Select
HOA Pulsed start stop = PSS_Pot
uP Board
DI-2 Prog
Fig.10.12.5:HOA Pulsed start stop = PSS_Normal
DI-5 Prog
DI-Supply +24
DI-6 Prog
DI-10 Prog
DI-9 Prog
DI-Supply +24
84
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.13. Auto ON/OFF
The Auto ON/OFF function allows the drive to be started if the speed reference, from the Analog Input, is greater than a predefined
threshold, set by use of parameter Auto on threshold [26.02], and allows the drive to be stopped if the speed reference is lower than a
predefined threshold, set by use of parameter Auto off threshold [26.01].
In order to use this function, an Analog Input must be set as the Source for the speed reference (See paragraph 10.1, Speed demand
setup).
The Auto ON/OFF function operates in logic AND with the Start command used for normal operation.
The values of parameters Auto on threshold [26.02] and Auto off threshold [26.01] are entered in % of the maximum input voltage (10
Volt) or current (20 mA) accepted by the Analog Input.
The speed that corresponds to parameters Auto on threshold [26.02] and Auto off threshold [26.01] must be read on the same scale,
defined for the Analog Input that converts the input Volt or mA signal into a frequency or speed reference. The definition of this speed
profile is included in Chapter 11.
Parameter Auto off threshold [26.01] must to be lower than the speed set for parameter Auto on threshold[26.02].
The start of the drive can be delayed, after the speed reference becomes greater than the Auto on threshold [26.02], by a time (s)
specified by parameter Delay on [26.04]. Drive stop can be delayed, after the speed reference becomes lower than the Auto off threshold
[26.01], by a time (s), specified by parameter Delay off [26.03].
The Auto ON/OFF function is enabled by use of parameter Auto On/Off Enable [11.17] included in the Standard Macro parameter family:
Once the function is enabled, the Auto Menu displays the Auto ON/OFF [26.00] parameter family, which includes the related
parameters:
Example:
The speed reference used is a 0-10 Volt analog signal. The speed reference signal is connected to Analog Input 1 (Terminal Block XM126/27) configured so that 0 Volt correspond to 0 rpm and 10 Volt correspond to 1500 rpm.
These settings for the analog input are shown in the Analog input configuration window below.
The user wants to start the drive when the input speed reference becomes greater than 750 rpm and to stop it when the input speed
reference becomes lower than 600 rpm.
Due to the speed profile given for the Analog Input, 750 rpm correspond to 50% of 10 Volt, while 600 rpm correspond to 40% of 10 Volt.
Thus the setting for Auto on threshold [26.02] is 50, while the setting for Auto off threshold [26.01] is 40, as shown in the Auto on/off
window.
The Auto on/off window shows the selected thresholds for on and off.
The delay time in this example is set to 0.5 seconds. This means that the drive starts after a delay of 0.5 seconds when the input speed
reference becomes greater than 50%. When the input speed reference becomes lower than 40%, the drive stops after a delay of 0.5
seconds. The user sets these delays. In the following pictures, the Speed demand setup window shows that analog input AI1 XM1-26 was
selected as the speed reference input.
85
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
The Analog input config window shows the settings for the analog input signal used in this example.
86
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.14. VDC Undervoltage Prevention / Ride Through (V/Hz, SLS, FOC)
Function VDC Undervolt En [11.07] prevents an undervoltage trip in case a transient voltage drop occurs in drive power supply. This is
done by recovering energy for the DC bus from the kinetic energy of the load (Ride Through operation). Drive stand-by time before VDC
undervoltage trip depends on the kinetic energy stored in the load.
The working principle of the algorithm is that during power grid loss, speed setpoint is the output of a PI regulator with VDC and [47.01]
respectively as setpoint and feedback
To enable the Ride Through function the user must access parameter VDC Undervolt En [11.07] in the Standard Macro Enable family.
See the window below.
When the RideThrough function is enabled, the VDC undervoltage parameter
family is displayed in the Auto Menu:
Window of VDC undervoltage parameters:
When the power supply voltage drops, function RideThrough adjusts motor speed as necessary to keep the DC bus voltage at the value
set by use of parameter [47.01]. The PI regulator that generates the speed reference during power supply voltage drop is set by use of
parameters [47.03] and [47.04].
If the input voltage does not return to the correct value within the specified time, motor speed continues to decrease. When it is down to
10% of maximum drive speed, the drive changes the “Busdroop” status, and removes the commands to the IGBT
If the input voltage is fed back before the minimum DC protection cuts in, the drive restarts the motor after the time set in parameter
Restart delay [47.02].
If the input voltage is fed back when the motor is still running (before its speed decreases to below 10% of Motor Max Oper Freq [02.11]),
the drive regulates the motor so that it reaches the speed corresponding to the set reference value, and the Ride Through function is no
longer active.
10.15. Flying Restart (V/Hz)
The Flying restart function is used when the drive must start with a spinning motor. It is enabled by setting this parameter:
When the function is enabled, the Flying restart [36.00] parameter family is displayed in the Auto Menu.
Figure 10.15 Default Values
If the Flying Restart function is enabled, at Start command the drive first detects the actual motor speed; then it catches the motor at its
rotating speed and accelerates it according to the speed reference and accelerating time values.
When the Flying Restart function is active the following message is shown:
FlyRestart
87
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
All parameters have a setting that depends on the size of ATV. The user has no need to change the default values for the most common
applications. Only when using very large motors with much inertia a change of these parameters may be required to achieve better
control.
Param. Name
Definition
36.01
Start Speed
Initial frequency (% of maximum frequency) for frequency detection.
The control stores the last frequency reference and if this is less than Start Speed, it uses the Start Speed
value as initial frequency. If the load has great inertia, this parameter must be set at a value higher than
motor frequency.
36.02
Magn Current
FR
Motor magnetizing current (% of motor rated current). It is used to detect the actual motor frequency.
Normally set at a value 5 to 10% higher than the actual magnetizing current.
36.03
Min Freq FR
Minimum scanning frequency. When the scan frequency goes below this value during Flying Restart
search, the drive starts to scan the reverse speed (frequency) region (checking if motor is spinning in
opposite direction) or starts the motor from zero frequency, depending on the selection of parameter Scan
Range [36.04].
36.04
Scan Range
This parameter defines the frequency scanning region :
Pos & Neg positive and negative frequency can be scanned
Only Pos only positive frequency can be scanned
Setting Pos & Neg must be used when the motor operates in both directions, or is driven in reverse
direction when no power is applied.
36.05
Scan step size
Ramp rate for frequency scanning
If the control detects an incorrect frequency, overcurrent trips (actual frequency less than the detected frequency) or DC bus overvoltage
trips (actual frequency greater than detected frequency) may occur. In the former case the Magn Current FR [36.02] value must be
increased in 5% increments. In the second case the frequency scanning ramp rate Scan step size [36.05] must be decreased or the motor
current loop dynamic must be increased (increase gain [36.06] in 0.1 steps, and gain [36.07] in 0.001 steps).
10.16. Flying Restart (SLS)
In the FOC control mode, and if the encoder is installed, the Flying Restart feature is automatic.
The Flying Restart function is used when the drive must be started while the motor is spinning. With SLS control enabling is through
parameter Flying Restart En [11.04] included in the Standard Macro parameter family.
if the Flying Restart function is enabled, the drive first detects the actual motor speed (in approx.2 s), then it resumes control of the motor
and accelerates it from the restart speed to the set value of speed reference.
When parameter Flying Restart En [11.04] is enabled, the Flying Restart [36.00] parameter family is displayed, that is included in the Auto
Menu.
All parameters have a setting that depends on the size of ATV. The user has no need to change the default values for the most
common applications. Only when using very large motors with much inertia a change of these parameters may be required to
achieve better control.
88
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
Parameter
Description
Isd forced peak val [36.11]
Regulated current value during the first part of Flying Restart Time (parameter 36.15 “% time peak
current”) in % of motor magnetizing current (automatically detected at Self-Commissioning).This
value must be increased if the shaft speed is not reached when using very large motors. (See Note
1 and 3)
Isd forced reference [36.12]
Regulated current value during Flying Restart Time in % of motor magnetizing current
(automatically detected at Self-Commissioning) (See Note 1)
Oscillation amplit [36.13]
Regulated current oscillation amplitude in % of motor magnetizing current (automatically detected
at Self-Commissioning)
Flying Restart Time [36.14]
Time required for motor speed detection. If the time is not enough a fault may occur at the end of
the flying restart procedure (See Note 1)
Typical values: 2s for motors < 500kW
4s for motors ≥ 500kW
% Time peak current [36.15]
First part of Flying Restart Time in % of Flying Restart Time (parameter 36.14)
Flying restart delay [36.16]
Time delay to apply between firing pulse off and flying restart (see Note 2)
WARNING: The current regulator gain must not be lower than the default value.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
During flying restart there could be a speed fluctuation if shaft load is less than 10% of Rated Load. To minimize this
fluctuation following actions are recommended:
•
decrease parameter Flying Restart Time [36.14];
•
decrease injected current during flying restart time (parameters Isd forced peak val [36.11] and Isd forced
reference [36.12])
For motors with very large rated power it may be necessary to increase the parameter Flying Restart Delay [36.16] to
avoid a high initial peak current due to motor residual flux
To optimize speed estimation during flying restart, it may be necessary to adjust the cut-off frequency of the flux
observer filter, parameter Fr Flux Obs Flt Freq [3.17]. Variations from default value should be very small:
Increasing the frequency the shaft speed is reached more quickly.
Decreasing the frequency the speed fluctuation, during the flying restart procedure is reduced.
10.17. Energy Saver (SLS, FOC)
The Energy Saver function ensures high operating efficiency by reducing motor voltage when the load requirements are lower than the
rated values (torque lower than 100%). Motor losses are minimized and the power factor is maintained at optimal value.
In order to enable the Energy Saver function it is necessary to set parameter NRG Saver Min Flux [02.19] to a value less than 100 %
(default value). When the value is less than 100 %, the function is automatically enabled. Values equal to 70 ÷ 80 % are recommended.
Parameter NRG Saver Min Flux [02.19] is included in the Motor Data [02.00] family.
Name
NRG Saver Min Flux
Serial Address
[02.19]
Meaning
Minimum flux allowable during Energy Saver
Default value
100
Type
%
Note 1: If there are rapid load variations, the use of the Energy Saver function is not suggested because it reduces the dynamic
performance of the drive
Note 2: The range of the parameter “NRG Saver Min Flux “ [02.19] is 50 % to 100 %; if there are current oscillations when this function
is enabled, increase the value of parameter 02.19
89
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.18. PID Regulator (V/HZ, SLS, FOC)
The PID regulator allows the user to control an application variable (e.g. temperature, pressure, flow rate, etc.) selected by him/her, in a
closed loop. The PID output is used as the speed reference for the drive.
Parameter
11.20
The following parameter must be set
to enable the function:
DI-PID Enable
P27.13
PID Mode Sel
P27.12
Name
External PID
PID Der Gain
P27.03
PID Prop Gain
P27.01
PID Upper Limit
P27.04
K_p
PID Ref Source Sel
P27.10
Pump Type Select
P27.09
a_1
a_2
K_d
FixedLvRef P27.08
PID
Lift
Network
Off
PID Feedback Src Sel
P27.11
Force
K_i
Force
a_1
a_2
Network
Lift
Off
PID Integral Gain
P27.02
PID Lower Limit
P27.05
If External PID is selected, the External PID [27.00] parameter family is displayed under Auto Menu. The following parameters can be
configured:
Parameter
27.01
27.02
27.03
27.04
27.05
27.06
27.07
27.08
27.09
27.10
27.11
27.12
27.13
27.14
27.15
27.16
Name (HF/PC)
PID Prop Gain
PID Integral Gain
PID Der Gain
PID Upper Limit
PID Lower Limit
Threshold Upper
Threshold Lower
PID Fixed Ref
Pump Type Select
PID Ref Source Sel
PID Feedback Src Sel
PID Mode Sel
DI - PID Enable
Motor pause function
Current Limit for Pause func.
Time Limit for Pause
Description
PID regulator proportional gain
PID regulator integral gain
PID regulator derivative gain
PID regulator output upper limit
PID regulator output lower limit
Upper threshold for automatic start/stop command
Lower threshold for automatic start/stop command
PID fixed reference
PID error calculation selection
PID reference source selection
PID feedback source selection
PID function mode selection
Selection of digital input used for PID enable
Motor pause function disable/enable in External PID
Current limit to pause the motor action
Time with current under [27.15] or speed under [02.10] to start motor pause
By use of parameter PID Mode Sel [27.12] the PID function can be used in three different modes:
PID Mode Sel = Continuous
Continuous speed reference control
PID Mode Sel = On/Off
Hysteresis control on start/stop, with preset speed reference
PID Mode Sel = Both
Continuous speed reference control with hysteresis control on
start/stop
Parameter Pump Type Select [27.09] defines the error signal using the reference and feedback signals as follows:
Pump Type Select = Lift
error = reference– feedback
Pump Type Select = Force
error = feedback – reference
90
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.18.1. Motor Pause Function
The function of "motor pause" function allows tocan automatically stops the motor, when it works beneath if the pump output is below a
specific flow rate, or when if the motor speed is under or a setting threshold. When the pressure of the plant drops (due to an increase of
the water request), the motor is automatically restarted. This operation allows saving energysaves energy, by starting the pump only
when this it is required by the plant's pressure. The function is managed with the parameters parameters [27.14], [27.15], [27.16].
The motor pause function can be enabled through [27.14] and is available with [27.12] set in On/Off or Both mode only.
If this function is enabled, when motor speed reference goes below [02.10], or when motor torque current goes below [27.15], and this
happenthe condition persists continuously for a time longer than [27.16], the motor will be stoppedstops (motor pause).
During the pause phase the P.I.D. regulator of the inverter remains activated; as a matter of fact, when the pressure goes again below the
level established with [27.07], the inverter restarts the motor by accelerating it until it reaches the frequency reference itself.
For all the control modes (VHz, Foc and Sls), [27.15] threshold represents a percentage of the maximum full load torque current, which is calculated as:
27.15 = 02.06 2 − 02.07 2
Note: For the above parameter to be calculated correctly a proper value for the No Load Current [02.07] parameter must be entered. This
parameter is normally not required for V/Hz control mode operation.
This diagram shows a sequence of the operation of the function, pressure control whit current stops function:
P [Bar]
SET Pressure
Pressure
Feed-back
27.07
Press. restart
t (s)
Current
27.15
Switch off
current
t (s)
Run/Stop
Run
Run
Stop
27.16 (s)
Pre-pause
time
If [27.12] is continuous, the start / stop of the drive depends on the start stop command only.
t (s)
91
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
10.18.2. Continuous Speed Reference Control
This operating mode is selected through:
PID Mode Sel [27.12] = Continuous
The PID output is the speed reference. The start/stop command must be fed from terminal block or fieldbus.
If parameter DI - PID Enable [27.13] is set to “Unused”, the control still uses the PID regulator output as the speed reference. According to
the setting of parameter DI - PID Enable [27.13] (see Appendix D), the speed reference switches from the PID output to the source
defined by use of parameter Speed Ref Source Sel [22.01] (see paragraph 10.1.1). Switching follows this logic:
DI - PID Enable [27.13] state
On
Off
Speed reference source
PID Output
Speed Ref Source Sel [22.01]
The sources for the reference and feedback signals are selected through parameters PID Ref Source Sel [27.10] and PID Feedback Src
Sel [27.11]. The possible settings are:
PID Ref Source Sel=
AI 1
AI 2
FixedLvRef
Network
PID Feedback Src Sel= AI 1
AI 2
Network
reference from analog input AI 1;
reference from analog input AI 2;
preset reference;
reference from fieldbus.
feedback from analog input AI 1;
feedback from analog input AI 2;
feedback from fieldbus
If the preset reference signal (FixedLvRef) is selected, its value is set by parameter PID Fixed Ref [27.08].
The following parameters can be set to tune the PID regulator:
PID Prop Gain
[27.01]
PID Integral Gain
[27.02]
PID Der Gain
[27.03]
PID Upper Limit
[27.04]
PID Lower Limit
[27.05]
In this operating mode failure to set the integral gain value correctly may result in undesired overshoots. In this case it is recommended
that the integral gain be set to zero.
Warning: If reverse rotation of the motor must be prevented, the lower limit of the PID regulator must be set to zero: PID lower
limit = 0.
See Figure 10.19.1 and 10.19.2 for Continuous control of speed reference in Lift and Force mode.
10.18.3. Hysteresis Control On Start/Stop Command With Preset Speed Reference
This operating mode is selected through:
PID Mode Sel [27.12] = On/Off
The start/stop command is a logic AND between:
- the Start command used for normal operation .
- the hysteresis control done by comparing the external PID feedback with two thresholds that can be
configured by use of parameters Threshold Upper [27.06] and Threshold Lower [27.07].
The speed reference is set by parameter PID Upper Limit [27.04].
See Figure 10.19.3 and 10.19.4 for Hysteresis control on Start/stop command in Lift and Force mode.
10.18.4. Continuous Speed Reference Control And Hysteresis Control On Start/Stop Command
With Preset Speed Reference
This operating mode is selected through:
PID Mode Sel [27.12] = Both
It is a combination of the two operating modes described above, as shown in the diagrams.
Refer to the previous paragraphs as to regulator enabling, reference and feedback sources selection, setting of lower limit to prevent
reverse motor spinning.
With respect to the continuous speed reference control mode, in this case the integral gain control can be used without significant
restrictions.
See figures 10.19.5 and 10.19.6 in this chapter for Continuous speed reference control and hysteresis control on Start/stop command in
Lift and Force mode.
92
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
[27.09] = Lift
Enabling output level controller
Drive
Start
Stop
Command
Selected digital input
Main speed reference
off
PID
0
Speed
reference
on
[27.10]
[27.11]
+
-
[27.04]
[other]
[27.05]
[always]
[27.01]
[27.02]
[27.03]
[27.13]
Ramp
V/Hz characteristic
Figure 10.18.1. Continuous control of speed reference – Lift
[27.09] = Force
Enabling output level controller
Drive
Start
Stop
Command
Selected digital input
Main speed reference
off
PID
0
on
[27.11]
+
[27.10]
-
[27.04]
[other]
[27.05]
[always]
[27.01]
[27.02]
[27.03]
Speed
reference
[27.13]
Ramp
V/Hz characteristic
Figure 10.18.2. Continuous control of speed reference – Force
93
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
[27.14]
1
I (torque) < [27.15]
OR
Timer
Speed reference < [02.10]
[27.16]
Flip-Flop
function
[27.09] = Lift
[27.07]
[27.11]
[27.06]
[27.07] > [27.11]
S
[27.06] > [27.11]
R
Level
Controller
Start
Stop
Command
selected digital input
Main speed
Reference
off
[Other]
Ramp
Function
V/Hz
Characteristic
Ramp
Function
V/Hz
Characteristic
0
0
off
off
on
on
PID
[27.04]
[27.11] +
on
Speed
Reference
[Always]
-
[27.05]
[27.10]
[27.01]
[27.02]
[27.03]
Drive
Start
Stop
Command
[27.13]
Enabling output level controller
Figure 10.18.3. Hysteresis control on Start/stop command - Lift
[27.14]
1
I (torque) < [27.15]
OR
Timer
Speed reference < [02.10]
[27.16]
Flip-Flop
function
[27.09] = Force
[27.06]
[27.11]
[27.07]
[27.06] > [27.11]
S
[27.07] > [27.11]
R
Level
Controller
Start
Stop
Command
selected digital input
Main speed
Reference
off
0
[Other]
0
off
off
on
on
PID
[27.04]
[27.11]+
-
on
[Always]
[27.05]
[27.10]
[27.01]
[27.02]
[27.03]
[27.13]
Speed
Reference
Drive
Start
Stop
Command
Enabling output level controller
Figure 10.18.4 Hysteresis control on Start/stop command – Force
94
10. Standard Macros (Basic System Application Functions)
[27.14]
1
I (torque) < [27.15]
OR
Timer
Speed reference < [02.10]
[27.16]
[27.14]
[27.09] = Force
I (torque) < [27.15]
[27.06] < [02.10]
Speed reference
[27.06] > [27.11]
[27.11]
[27.09] = Lift
[27.07]
[27.07] > [27.11]
Level
Controller
Start
Stop
Command
R
Flip-Flop
function
[27.07]
[27.07]
selected digital
input> [27.11]
[27.11]
Main speed
Reference
1
Flip-Flop
function
Timer
S
[27.16]
OR
[27.06]
off
S
[27.06] > [27.11]
[Other]
Level
0
Controller
Start
Stop
Command
Speed
Reference
R
off
off
on
on
0
on
[27.04]
selected digital input [Always]
Main speed
Reference
[27.04]
off
[Other]
[27.13]
0
on
Enabling
output level controller
[Always]
V/Hz
Characteristic
Ramp
Function
Drive
Start
off
Stop
Command
off
on
on
Ramp
Function
V/Hz
Characteristic
0
Speed
Reference
Drive
Start
Stop
Command
[27.13]
Enabling output level controller
Figure 10.18.5 Continuous speed reference control and hysteresis control on Start/stop command - Lift
[27.14]
1
I (torque) < [27.15]
OR
Timer
Speed reference < [02.10]
[27.16]
[27.09] = Force
Flip-Flop
function
[27.06]
[27.11]
[27.07]
[27.06] > [27.11]
S
[27.07] > [27.11]
R
Level
Controller
Start
Stop
Command
selected digital input
Main speed
Reference
off
Ramp
Function
V/Hz
Characteristic
0
[Other]
0
off
off
on
on
on
[27.04]
[Always]
[27.13]
Speed
Reference
Drive
Start
Stop
Command
Enabling output level controller
Figure 10.18.6: Continuous speed reference control and hysteresis control on Start/stop command – Force
90
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
Application macros are available at level 3 and depending on control type, as shown in the following table:
MACRO
Control
DC braking
11.1
V/Hz
Current oscillations compensation
11.2
V/Hz
Jog
11.3
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
Speed Extern limits
11.4
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
Underload
11.5
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
Loss of output phase
11.6
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
V/Hz Curve Optimization
11.7
V/Hz, SLS
Emergency Stop
11.8
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
Master – Slave Configuration (Helper)
11.9
FOC
Torque control
11.10
SLS, FOC
Torque limits control
11.11
SLS, FOC
Motor stall
11.12
SLS, FOC
Speed Deviation
11.13
SLS, FOC
Torque Overboost
11.14
SLS
Trace settings
11.15
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
Analog Input User Trip/Alarm (Motor PTC/NTC Management)
11.16
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
Application Specific Function
11.17
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
NOTE
The macros Current Rollback, VDC Undervoltage Ride Through, Flying Restart are available at programming level 2 (se chap.
10) but the ralated tuning parameters are available at level 3.
91
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.1. DC Braking (V/Hz)
The function allows braking of the motor by feeding the stator with a DC voltage (the kinetic energy is therefore dissipated totally inside
the motor).
The function is enabled by setting the parameter shown here on the right side to
“DC Braking”
Param.
Name
12.02
Macro V/Hz Sel
Once selected, the DC Braking [48.00] parameter family is shown in the Auto Menu with the following parameters:
Param.
Unit
Name
Description
DC braking current
%
Motor current during DC braking
Freq threshold
Hz
Motor frequency threshold to activate DC braking during motor stops
48.10
DC braking time
s
48.11
DI-DCB enable
48.05
48.09
DC braking application time
Selection of DC digital input for DC braking enable.
The user must set the values of the following parameters according to the application requirements:
DC braking current
48.05
This parameter defines the value of the DC current as a percentage of the maximum current; the maximum
current is the product of the Mot Full Load Curr [02.06] value times parameter Motor Overload Lim [02.12].
Freq threshold
48.09
This parameter defines the frequency threshold for DC Braking: when, during a stop, the motor frequency goes
below this threshold, DC braking is activated.
DC braking time
48.10
This parameter defines the duration of DC Braking: when the motor frequency goes below the activation threshold
(parameter [48.09] Freq threshold), the DC braking is activated for the time set by this parameter.
A digital input that enables/disables DC braking can also be configured.
If selected, DC Braking is enabled or disabled through the configured digital input, with the following logic:
digital input open -> DC braking disable
digital input closed -> DC braking enable
If digital input is not selected, DC braking is actuated at each motor stop.
DI-DCB enable
48.11
When the DC braking function is enabled, the voltage regulator output changes the motor voltage to maintain the reference set by use of
parameter DC braking current [48.05].
Frequency (Hz)
Freq treshold [48.09]
Time (s)
DC Braking
DC Braking current [48.05]
DC Braking time[48.10]
Time (s)
Figure 11.1
WARNING: If the Fast-stop and DC braking function are used together, during a Fast-stop it is impossible to activate DC braking. Any
Fast-Stop activation during DC braking results in DC braking disabling.
92
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.2. Current Oscillations Compensation (V/Hz)
When running a motor in V/Hz mode the phase currents can show some instability zones in the frequency range from 0 to 20 Hz. This
instability is caused either by the load or by the characteristics and size of the motor.
In order to eliminate this instability, the control makes available a compensation algorithm, that can be activated by the function Low Frq
Curr Comp En [11.05] in the Standard Macro Enable family.
When the function is enabled, the parameter family is displayed in the Low Frequency Stability[18.00], under the Stability Menu.
The following table shows the parameters belonging to such a function:
Param.
Name
Description
18.01
Max Compens Freq
18.02
18.03
Compens Gain
Compens Cutoff Frq
The Current Compensation function operates in the frequency range from zero
Hz up to the frequency set by use of this parameter
Current oscillation compensation gain
Current oscillation filter cut-off frequency
Default
values
0 Hz
0.022 p.u.
10 Hz
The function has default settings, and generally no changes are required. If the default settings cannot prevent current oscillations that
can cause overcurrent trips or unacceptable instability, the user must:
a)
Check the instability conditions setting the Compens Gain [18.02] parameter to zero. In this way, the compensation system does
not operate. Feed the motor at the minimum operating frequency at which it is possible to display the phase current oscillations,
without drive protection tripping.
b)
Measure the phase current oscillations, estimating the instability frequency, as shown in figure 11.2.
Instability frequency = 1 / T_osc
A
200
150
100
50
0
-50
-100
t
I0
-150
-200
Inom
T_osc
T_osc
Figure 11.2 . Typical trend of phase current (reference set to 5Hz)f
d)
Set the cut-off frequency at a value higher than or equal to the instability frequency measured by setting:
Compens Cutoff Frq [18.03] ≅ Instability frequency [ Hz ]
e)
Set the Max Compens Freq [18.01] parameter to a frequency value higher than the Compens Cutoff Frq [18.03] frequency.
f)
Act on the Compens Gain [18.02] compensation proportional gain, if necessary, to dampen current oscillations.
The default value of the Compens Gain [18.02] parameter is set at 0.022. Whenever the current has the rated value, the reference
frequency is increased by 2.2%. If this parameter is not effective, it is possible to modify the cut-off frequency of the filter on the Compens
Cutoff Frq [18.03] current.
When making such adjustments, the user’s display shows the analog signals of phase current (TA weights) and speed reference. The
analog outputs of the control boards can be used to obtain the required signals.
Once the Max Compens Freq, Compens Gain and Compens Cutoff Frq values are selected, check the algorithm over the entire range of
frequencies that can be set.
During tuning, it is possible that a wrong setting of a tuning parameter value causes a trip of maximum current protection, or of maximum
DC voltage. In this case, reset the trip, reduce the value of the set parameter and increase or decrease the value of Max Compens Freq
[18.01] cutoff frequency, then restart the equipment.
93
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.3. Jog
When the drive is ready (pre-charge completed), enabling the jog function permits the motor to start using the preset speed reference.
The function can be configured by means of a digital input of the microprocessor board or of the digital expansion board, or a Command
Word from Fieldbus.
Digital input = Jog high (activated)
motor running
Digital input = Jog low (deactivated)
motor stopped
Two different digital inputs with two different jog functions and different preset speed values can be configured. To configure the jog
function, the user must configure the following parameters:
Parameter
Name
22.33
DI - Jog 1 enable
22.35
DI - Jog 2 enable
See Appendix D for the possible settings
of DI - Jog 1 enable and DI - Jog 2 enable.
When Jog 1 and Jog 2 are used, the preset speed reference is set through the following parameters:
Parameter
Name
Description
Unit
22.32
Jog reference 1
Jog 1 reference
%
22.34
Jog reference 2
Jog 2 reference
%
The preset speed values are given in % of maximum speed, as defined by use of parameter Motor Max Oper Freq [02.11].
The diagram shows the use of the Jog function, where Jog 1 has a positive reference and Jog 2 a negative one.
Figure 11.3 Jog Functions
11.4. Speed External Limits
A limit on the speed reference (upstream speed ramp) can be enabled through one of the configurable digital inputs.
If two inputs are used, two limits can be set.
The following table shows the setting to use to enable the limits:
Param #
Name
22.36
22.37
22.38
22.39
Speed limit 1 source
DI-Spd limit 1 enbl
Speed limit 2 source
DI-Spd limit 2 enbl
Description
Enable and select external limit #1 for speed reference upstream ramp
Digital input selection to enable limit #1 on speed reference downstream ramp
Enable and select external limit #2 for speed reference upstream ramp
Digital input selection to enable limit #2 on speed reference downstream ramp
Refer to Appendix D for possible settings of DI – Spd limit 1 enbl and DI – Spd limit 2 enbl.
Values for limits 1 and 2 are set through parameters Speed limit 1 source [22.36] and Speed limit 2 source [22.38]; they can be set to:
Off
AI1
AI2
Network
no limit selected
limit set through analog input 1
limit set through analog input 2
limit set through Fieldbus
Note: If two limits are set, only one limit at a time will be active. If both digital inputs are closed, no limit will be activated and the motor will
run at the active speed reference
94
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.5. Underload
This function permits an underload condition to be detected. Typically, this feature is used on pumps that are required to maintain a minimum flow or load level for
lubrication requirements. To enable this function a value other than zero must be set for parameter Under Load Limit [69.24] in the Protections [69.00] family. For all
control modes (V/Hz, FOC and SLS), this threshold is a percent of maximum full load torque current calculated as follows:
Full Load Torque Threshold = sqrt(Mot Full Load Curr [02.06]^2 – No Load Current[02.07]^2)
Note: For the above parameter to be calculated correctly parameter No Load Current [02.07] must be set at a correct value. This parameter is
normally not required for V/Hz control mode.
The parameter Under Load Time [69.25] is used to set the amount of time that must elapse before an underload fault is generated while the load is below the minimum
value programmed through parameter Under Load Limit
When the load is below the set threshold for the set time, a trip is generated. The following message annunciates it on keypad and PC Interface:
Under Load Fault
11.6. Loss of Output Phase
This function is enabled by setting parameter Loss of Output Phase [69.23] (which is included in the Protections [69.00] family) to
Enable.
It’s possible to decrease the function sensibility through the following parameters:
Phase Out Max Count [69.30]: number of failure during output phase control, current waveform could be perturbed and generates false
alarm.
Phase Out Spd Thr [69.31]: Speed threshold, The output phase control is enable for speed greater than this speed threshold.
If an output phase is lost, a trip is generated. This trip is annunciated on keyapad and PC interface by the following messages:
OutPhasOut
11.7. V/Hz Curve Optimization(V/Hz)
This function provides high operating efficiency by reducing motor voltage when the load requirements are lower than the rated values
(torque lower than 100%). Thus motor losses are minimized. The function uses the parameters [4.02], [4.03] included in the “V/HZ
settings” menu.
Figure 11.7 shows use of parameters [4.02], [4.03]
Motor
voltage
[02.05]
VHZ rated
curve
VHZ curve
modified
[04.02]=2/3
[04.03]=1/3
[04.02]= 4/9
[04.03] =1/6
1/3
Hz
2/3
Motor frequency
[02.08]
Figure 11.8: Use of [04.02] and [04.03] to change curve VHZ.
95
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.8. Emergency Stop
The Emergency Stop function can be used whenever the motor needs to be stopped in the shortest possible time. It can be activated
through a digital input or a significant bit word (Fieldbus) by configuring parameter DI-Fast stop select [65.08].
Digital Input = High
normal operation
Digital Input = Low
Fast Stop enabled
Refer to Appendix D for DI-Fast stop select settings.
The actions performed after an emergency stop through [65.08] input command can be configured through:
Parameter #
Name
65.02
Fast/coast trip enbl
65.03
Fast/coast mode sel
Fast/coast mode sel [65.03] selects the type of emergency stop. The possible settings are:
FastStopAct
FstStopPas
Controlled emergency stop: it follows the ramp rate defined by use of parameter Fast stop ramp time [65.05]
Uncontrolled emergency stop: the firing pulses are disabled and the motor spins freely to a stop
If the controlled Fast Stop is selected, the stop time can be very short only if a braking unit (chopper + braking resistor) or regenerative power (active front end
drive) is used. If these devices are not installed in the drive, the stop time cannot be very short because the mechanical power from the motor to the drive results in
an increase in DC bus voltage. This increase must be limited by reducing the deceleration rate (V/Hz) or the braking torque (FOC) in order to avoid a maximum DC
voltage trip .
Parameter Fast/coast trip enbl [65.02] defines the action the control performs after the motor stops following a Fast Stop command. The
possible settings are:
FstStopNrm
The drive switches to the “Ready” status after zero speed is sensed (Set Zero Frequency [02.14]).
FstStopTrp
After zero speed is sensed (Set Zero Frequency [02.14]), the drive trips after a time delay set by use of parameter Fast
coast trip del [65.06]. The trip is annunciated on keypad AF by message FastStop date - time :
The motor is considered to be stopped if the speed is lower than the Zero Speed threshold set through parameters Set Zero Frequency [02.14] and Set Zero Freq
Band [02.15].
After an emergency stop the selected Fast Stop input must be rearmed and, if Fast/coast trip enbl = FstStopTrp was selected, the drive
must be reset as necessary after any trip.
If Fast/coast mode sel [65.03] is set at FstStopAct, during a fast stop activated through the opening of the input selected through DI-Fast
stop select [65.08], the start command is ignored unless the motor is stopped even if the selected Fast Stop input is rearmed.
When Fast/coast mode sel [65.03] is set at “FstStopPas” and Fast /coast restart [65.04] is set at “Enable”, during a fast stop activated
through opening of the input selected by use of parameter DI-Fast stop select [65.08], the motor can be restarted also if it is still spinning,
if input [65.08] is rearmed.
If the Fast/coast mode sel [65.03] is set at “FstStopPas”, “Fast /coast restart” [65.04] is set at Enable and Fast Coast Trip Enbl [65.02] is
set at “FstStopNorm”, during a fast stop activated through opening of the input selected by use of parameter DI-Fast stop select [65.08],
the motor can be restarted also if it is still spinning, if input [65.08] is rearmed and a Start command is given.
Another type of fast stop function can be activated through
Parameter #
65.07
Name
DI-Coast stop select
The digital input logic is:
Digital Input = On Pulse enabled
Digital Input = Off Pulse disabled
During the fast stop activated through the opening of the input selected by use of DI-Coast stop select [65.07], and if this input is rearmed
and a start command given, the motor can be restarted also if it is still spinning. This emergency stop is not affected by any of the
parameters [65.02] through [65.06].
Refer to Appendix D for the possible DI-Coast Stop select [65.07] settings.
96
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.9. Master-Slave Configuration “Helper” (FOC)
The Helper function is available with FOC control only.
This function controls the load sharing between two drives when their motors are mechanically coupled or the process requires a masterslave configuration.
The working principles are the following (see also figure 11.9.1):
•
•
The master drive transmits the torque reference to the slave drive
The slave drive speed regulator is saturated through a variable threshold, therefore the slave drive is controlled through the
torque reference fed from the master drive.
11.9.1. Master Configuration
The master drive has a speed regulator that determines the torque references for both the drives. The torque reference must be put on an
analog output (refer to paragraph 12.4 for the analog output configuration).
NOTE
If an analog input is used, check filtering, gain, offset and terminal setting (See chapter 12 “I/O Configuration”)
The torque reference can be fed to the slave drive also via a serial link. In this case the master fieldbus must send the torque reference to
the slave. Refer to the Communication Manual for these settings.
Use the fieldbus option applications for slow torque dynamic requirements since fieldbuses usually introduce a 20 ms
NOTE
delay in torque reference transmission from master to slave.
11.9.2. Configuration
The slave drive has the same speed reference of the master and the speed feedback from speed transducer mounted on his motor. With
the Helper function enabled by the proper digital input, the slave drive has the speed regulator saturated by an offset value added to the
main reference and is controlled through the torque reference from the master drive. The torque reference can be modified. The speed
regulator is always active so if the slave slips, the speed regulator will force to the motor a speed a little higher than that of the master.
MASTER
PID
[17.04]
+
Speed_Ref
-
[17.05]
SpeedFbk_Master
[17.01]
[17.02]
[31.06]
0
Pulse
command
On
DspTorqueRef
31.08
[31.07]
0
Analog Output
Pulse
command
On
SLAVE
31.08
Off
Off
0
Off
0
Off
[31.03]
[31.02]
On
Select Min
On
[31.04]
+
-
+
+
X
On
[31.08]
[17.04]
Off
[ 31.05 ]
On
0
PID
Off
Speed_Ref
DspTrqueRef
+
+
-
[17.05]
SpeedFbk_Slave
[17.01]
[17.02]
Figure 11.9.1 Master-Slave Schematics of Helper Function
97
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
The parameters and operation of the control block are described hereafter. Refer to Figure 11.9.1 for the slave operating principle.
To select the Helper function for the slave drive, set the following parameters to “Helper”:
Parameter #
1201
Name
Macro Vector Sel
When the new function is selected, two new sub-menus are shown.
The first is sub-menu Helper shown under the Auto Menu. The following parameters can be configured:
Param #
Description
Step amplitude to increment the torque % supplied
Unit
Step Incr Trq
31.03
Step Decr Trq
Step amplitude to decrement the torque % supplied
%
31.04
Torque Share %
Torque % supplied
%
31.05
Offset Speed
Overspeed for speed regulator saturation
%
31.06
DI - Inc Torque
Digital input selection for up command
31.07
DI - Dec Torque
Digital input selection for down command
31.08
DI - Enable func
Enable/disable the helper function through digital selection.
31.02
Name
%
The second sub-menu shown is:
Param #
23.03
Description
Name
Trq Ref ULim Src Sel
Enable and select source for upper limit on torque reference
The possible selections for [23.03] are
Terminal
Torque limit from Analog Input AI 1 (sampling at1 ms)
AI 2
Torque limit from Analog Input AI 2 (sampling at10 ms)
Network
NOTE
Description
AI 1
Torque limit from Network (sampling at10 ms)
If an analog input is used, check settings (see chapter 13)
The Helper function can be enabled or disabled by means of the digital input specified at parameter DI - Enable func [31.08] based upon
the following setup:
“helper” enabled
Digital input = On
Digital input = Off
“helper” disabled
If the Helper function is disabled, the speed regulation mode is restored on the slave drive.
To saturate the speed regulator the speed reference must be increased by a percent of the maximum speed that can be set through
parameter Offset Speed [31.05].
The percent value of the torque reference is set on the slave drive through parameter Torque Share % [31.04].
To determine this value, use the following equation:
where:
Torque Share % =
100 - Cmaster
Cmaster
∗
CN_master
CN_slave
Cmaster = torque reference percent value with respect to master torque reference
CN_master = nominal torque of master drive motor
CN_slave = nominal torque of slave drive motor
This value can be modified during the operation of the drive, by using the commands that respectively increase and decrease the percent
torque value using parameters DI - Inc torque [31.06] and DI - Dec torque [31.07]. The increment and decrement steps are set by
parameters Step Incr Trq [31.02] and Step Decr Trq [31.03].
98
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.10. Torque Control (SLS, FOC)
The Torque Control mode completely excludes the speed controller and controls the drive by an external signal. The modification of the
upper and/or lower torque limits from an external signal is automatically set.
Param #
To select the function, the parameter
12.01
Name
must be set to: Trq ref cm.
Macro Vector Sel
When the function is selected Sub-Menu Torque ref/lim set [04.trq] comes in view under Auto Menu [Aut.04]. The following parameters
can be configured:
Param #
Torq Ref Source Sel
23.03
Trq Ref ULim Src Sel
Trq Ref LLim Src Sel
23.04
Possible settings of parameters [23.01], [23.03], [23.04]:
Name
23.01
23.01
Add Torq Ref Source Sel
Off
Network
AI 1
AI 2
parameter value not assigned
parameter value from Fieldbus
parameter value from analog input AI 1
parameter value from analog input AI 2
Considering Tq_max the maximum torque that the motor can deliver, the following scaling is applied when the reference signal is from
analog input:
±10 V @ ±Tq_max
If the reference is from fieldbus, the scaling is:
±26214 @ ±Tq_max
The external limits for the upper and lower torque limit can be positive and negative; in the event the upper and lower limits have the same
sign, the control automatically assigns the higher value to the upper limit.
The control also automatically limits the incoming signals to the values set by the torque limits (parameters Torq Upper Limit1 FW [17.04],
Torq Lower Limit1 FW [17.05] or Torq Upper Limit2 FW[17.13], Torq Lower Limit2 FW [17.14] and Torq Upper Limit1 [17.06], Torq Lower
Limit1 [17.07]).
EXTERNAL TORQUE CONTROL
Enable Torque Command Function
0
Torque Command Source Selection
TqRefFromNet
[ 12.01 ]
[ Other ]
(Off)
1
(Network)
XM1 26(+)/27(-)
[ 23.01 ]
AnaInp 1
XM1 28(+)/29(-)
AnaInp 2
[ Trq ref cm ]
(AI1 XM1-26)
(AI2 XM1-28)
Enable Torque Limit Command Function
DSP MAX VALUE
[ 12.01 ]
Torque Upper Limit Source Selection
[ Other ]
T Upper Profibus
(Off)
External
TrqRef
2
(Network)
XM1 26(+)/27(-)
[ 23.03 ]
AnaInp 1
XM1 28(+)/29(-)
Torque
command
pointer
AnaInp 2
[ Trq ref cm ]
(AI1 XM1-26)
(AI2 XM1-28)
Enable Torque Limit Command Function
-DSP MAX VALUE
Torque Lower Limit Source Selection
T Brake Profibus
[ 12.01 ]
[ Other ]
(Off)
3
(Network)
XM1 26(+)/27(-)
[ 23.04 ]
AnaInp 1
XM1 28(+)/29(-)
AnaInp 2
External
BrkRef
(AI1 XM1-26)
[ Trq ref cm ]
(AI2 XM1-28)
Figure 11.10.1 External Torque Command
99
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
Digital Input Configuration
[ 17.05 ]
[ 17.04 ]
[0]
[ 17.13 ]
[1]
External Trq Ref
(Change Parameter Set)
Kp
SpeedRefRamp
+
+
-
Ki
Speed
Feedback
from Encoder
Enable Torque
Command Function
[ 12.01 ]
[ Other ]
+
+
1/z
Torque Ref
+
[ Trq Ref Cm ]
Torque Command Pointer
External BrkRef
Digital Input Configuration
[ 17.15 ]
[ 17.05 ]
[0]
[ 17.14 ]
[1]
(Change Parameter Set)
LIMIT CHECK
3
External Brk Ref
External Brk Ref
External Trq Ref > External Brk Ref
2
External Trq Ref
External Trq Ref
Figure 11.10.2 Torque Command Function
11.11. Torque Limits Control (SLS, FOC)
This function controls the upper and lower torque limits through an external signal.
To select the function, the
parameter
Param #
12.01
Name
must be set to: Trq lim cm.
Macro Vector Sel
When the function is selected, sub-menu Torque ref/lim set [04.trq] comes in view under the Auto Menu [Aut.04]. The following
parameters can be configured:
Param #
Name
23.02
Add Torq Ref Source Sel
23.03
Trq Ref ULim Src Sel
23.04
Trq Ref LLim Src Sel
Possible settings of parameters [23.02], [23.03], [23.04]:
Off
Network
AI 1
AI 2
parameter value not assigned
parameter value from Fieldbus
parameter value from analog input AI 1
parameter value from analog input AI 2
Considering Tq_max the maximum torque that the motor can supply, the following scaling is applied when the reference signal is from
analog input: ±10 V @ ±Tq_max.
If the reference is from fieldbus, the scaling is: ±26214 @ ±Tq_max
The external limits for the upper and lower torque limit can be positive and negative; in the event the upper and lower limits have
the same sign, the control automatically assigns the higher value to the upper limit.
The control also automatically limits the incoming signals to the values set by the torque limits (parameters Torq Upper Limit1 FW
[17.04], Torq Lower Limit1 FW [17.05] or Torq Upper Limit2 FW[17.13], Torq Lower Limit2 FW [17.14] and Torq Upper Limit1
[17.06], Torq Lower Limit1 [17.07]).
100
The sign of the limit is given by the polarity of the voltage applied to the analog input. For this reason, a negative voltage is
generally applied for the lower limit.
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
Enable Torque Limit Command Function
DSP MAX VALUE
[ 12.01 ]
Torque Upper Limit Source Selection
[ Other ]
T Upper Profibus
(Off)
External
TrqRef
2
(Network)
XM1 26(+)/27(-)
[ 23.03 ]
AnaInp 1
(AI1 XM1-26)
(AI2 XM1-28)
AnaInp 2
XM1 28(+)/29(-)
[ Trq ref cm ]
Enable Torque Limit Command Function
-DSP MAX VALUE
[ 12.01 ]
Torque Lower Limit Source Selection
T Brake Profibus
[ Other ]
(Off)
3
(Network)
XM1 26(+)/27(-)
[ 23.04 ]
AnaInp 1
[ Trq ref cm ]
(AI1 XM1-26)
(AI2 XM1-28)
AnaInp 2
XM1 28(+)/29(-)
External
BrkRef
Figure 11.11.1 Torque Limit Command Function
Digital Input Configuration
[ 17.05 ]
[ 17.04 ]
[0]
[ 17.13 ]
[1]
External Trq Ref
(Change Parameter Set)
Kp
SpeedRefRamp
+
-
Ki
Speed
Feedback
from Encoder
+
+
+
Enable Torque
Command Function
[ 12.01 ]
[ Other ]
1/z
+
Torque Ref
[ Trq Ref Cm ]
Torque Command Pointer
External BrkRef
Digital Input Configuration
[ 17.15 ]
[ 17.05 ]
[ 17.14 ]
[0]
[1]
(Change Parameter Set)
LIMIT CHECK
3
External Brk Ref
External Brk Ref
External Trq Ref > External Brk Ref
2
External Trq Ref
External Trq Ref
Figure 11.11.2 Torque Limit
101
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.12. Motor Stall (SLS, FOC)
This function monitors the error between speed reference and feedback. If the speed error is greater than the value set by the parameter
[67.08] Motor stall max err during a time longer than the value set by the parameter [67.09] Motor stall max time, a motor stall trip occurs
(this is a software trip). It is visualized:
on the display of keypad AF through the message 6-Stall
The function is enabled only if maximum motor stall error is different from zero.
NOTE
This function is similar to the Speed Deviation function.
The speed deviation function uses a fixed threshold and can be configured as protection/alarm or alarm.
11.13. Speed Deviation
If in FOC, SLS or V/Hz control mode there is a speed feedback, the speed deviation function constantly checks the error between the
speed reference and the feedback.
If no speed feedback is available (V/Hz control only), the speed deviation function constantly checks the error between the speed
references upstream and downstream the ramp. In this case the function operates only if the Current Rollback is concurrently selected
(see paragraph 10.8). This function uses the following parameters:
Parameter
Name
67.01
Motor stall enable
67.02
67.03
Motor stall mode
Mtr stall delay time
Description
SpdDevOn
(speed deviation enabled)
SpdDevOff
(speed deviation disabled)
Speed deviation actions
Delay time after which a deviation speed error is sensed
Unit
sec
When the function is enabled, if the error exceeds the current reference by ±5% during a time longer that the value set for Mtr stall delay
time [67.03] the drive indicates an alarm or sets to protection depending on the selection made for parameter Motor stall mode [67.02]
and on the speed reference value.
Motor stall mode = Standard
If speed reference is set at the maximum value, the drive sets to protection.
Keypad AF displays the message:
SpdDev date-time
If speed reference is set to a value lower than the maximum value, the control indicates an alarm
Keypad AF displays the message:
SpeedDev date-time
The alarm can be sent also on a digital output.
Motor stall mode = Only Alarm
The control indicates an alarm irrespective of the speed reference value:
Keypad AF displays message:
SpeedDev date-time
The speed deviation function is active only when the drives runs at steady state. The error is not monitored during transient accelerations and
decelerations. Also, the check is performed if the speed reference is 10% higher than maximum.
102
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.14. Torque Overboost (SLS)
Torque Overboost is a special function available only when speed reference is positive and in applications that require a high static torque
(typically 150% of rated torque).
A typical application is with reciprocating pumps.
To enable the function, set parameter [12.01] as follows:
The parameter family “Torque ref/lim Sel” comes in view under the Auto Menu.
Set parameter [23.02] as follows:
A torque reference is added downstream
the speed regulator. it has the
characteristics shown in this figure:
Added Torque
(in % of max. torque)
[23.05]
[23.07]
[23.06]
Speed Reference
(in % of max. speed)
For example, with parameters (2305, 2306, 2307, 2308) 10% torque is added to the speed reference between 0 and 10% of maximum
motor speed. The added reference decreases according to a quadratic law, and reaches 0 when speed reference is equal to [23.07] +
[23.06].
The torque overboost becomes active only when the start command is applied, and is automatically set to zero when the drive is stopped.
With Sensorless control, in order to ensure correct motor rotation at very low speed, forced VHZ start is used. This forced start may have
a problem when torque overboost function is enabled, thus a reduction of parameter [23.08] may be required.
103
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.15. Trace Settings
This function is very useful to check the possible causes that have produced a drive trip.
The Trace Log consists of a cyclic memory used to record the events related to a drive trip. During normal operation the cyclic memory is
updated continually. If a trip occurs, the log is stopped and the data are frozen according to a trigger value ([60.03]) that can be set by the
user. The Trace Log contain data concerning 9 variables (analog and digital) and up to a maximum of 260 samples for each variable. The
sample time for the data log can also be selected. The Trace Settings family contains the parameters used to configure the “Trace”
function.
Parameter Trace enable [60.01]
enables and disables the Trace Log.
Parameters Trace variable 1 ÷ Trace
variable 9 [60.06 to 60.15] select the
variables to be memorized: refer to
paragraph 12.4 for the list of variables
that can be selected.
NOTE: Parameter [60.06] Trace
variable 0 it’s not available.
The setting of the [60.06] parameter
Trace variable 0 is default fixed to 0
(speed) for control modes FOC ad
SLS.
The trigger position is set in % through
parameter Trace trigger [60.03].
The number of samples for each
variable is set through parameter
Number of samples [60.04], by a
number in the range 1÷260.
Sampling time is set through parameter Trace cycle time sel [60.05]:
Trace cycle time sel = 2 msec
trace log with sampling time 1 msec
Trace cycle time sel = 10 msec
trace log with sampling time 10 msec
Trace cycle time sel = 100 msec
trace log with sampling time 100 msec
Trace cycle time sel = 250msec
trace log with sampling time 250 msec
Trace cycle time sel = 1 sec trace log with sampling time 1 sec
The information contained in the Trace Log are erased after a trip reset or automatically after the log data have been printed. The
parameter Trace restart [60.02] selects one of the two following action:
At Reset log data erased after a trip reset
After Prn log data erased after a print out
It’s possible to set monitor variable that represents the status of Trace function as following shown:
Monitor variable value
Description
Disable
Parameter Trace enable [60.01] is set on disables
Wait trig
Trace function is waiting a trigger to start
recording data
Active
Stopped
Trace function is storing Trace Log
Data are recorded. It’s possible to upload or visualize
Trace Log. Function waits “Reset” or “Print out” to
restart itself.
To visualize or upload the TRACE LOG refer to chapter 5.
The parameter [60.16] Force Trace Restar , sets to Enable, permits to force the restart of Trace function (i.e. after new variables set).
This parameter doesn’t work if there is a protection status.
104
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
The parameter Trace activation [60.17] permits to select if Trace function will be triggered by all occurred trips or by a specific trip.
−
Trace activation [60.17] = All trip
trace actived by all trip;
−
Trace activation [60.17] = sel trip trace actived by a specific trip (select trips through parameters Trig only [60.21 to 60.30])
It is also possible (only if the [60.02] parameter “Trace restart” is set to After Prn) to control the Trace data freezing using a variable and
two threshold as trigger. Set the parameter Trace activation [60.17] on threshold.
The [60.18] Trace act variable, [60.19] Trace act Thresh GT and [60.20] Trace act Thresh LT parameters set a variable (analog output
pick.list) for data Trace freezing and two threshold. The freezing is carried out if the variable [6018] is greater [6019] or lower [6020] than
the threshold value.
Refer to chapter 12 for a list of the Digital Inputs, signals and controls.
105
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.16. Analog Input User Trip/Alarm
This function is available at programming level 3. With the Analog input user trip/alarm function it is possible to set both a trip threshold
and an alarm threshold on analog input AI1 or AI2 of the Microprocessor Basic and Plus Boards.
The function is automatically enabled setting the analog input source AI1 or AI2 through the user parameter AI User T/A source [69.27]
in the “Protection” menu. The possible settings are:
AI User T/A source [69.27] = Off;
AI User T/A source [69.27] = AI 1;
AI User T/A source [69.27] = AI 2.
Through the user parameters AI User Alarm Th [69.28] and AI User Trip Th [69.29] it is possible to set the alarm and trip thresholds of
the Analog Input User Trip/Alarm function as a percentage of the analog input voltage.
Normally this function is used to manage the PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) or NTC (negative Temperature Coefficient)
thermistor installed on the motor for its thermal protection.
PTC Thermistor :
In this case the alarm threshold [69.28] is set to a value lower than the trip
threshold [69.29]; alarm and trip occur when the analog input voltage is
greater than the threshold.
NTC Thermistor :
In this case the alarm threshold [69.28] is set to a value greater than the trip
threshold [69.29]; alarm and trip occur when the analog input voltage is less
than threshold.
Keypads messages and digital outputs settings
on the Advanced Keypad or PC by the message:
AI User Tr
on the Advanced Keypad or PC by the message:
AI User Al
Through configurable digital outputs it is possible to set the following two functions:
AI User
It annunciates the alarm condition for AI User trip/alarm function :
AI
AI User
It annunciates the protection condition for AI User trip/alarm function :
Tr
On : output relay energized or open collector output on (24 V)
Off : output relay de-energized or open collector output off
On =
Off =
On =
Off =
no alarm
alarm occurred
no protection
protection occurred
Thresholds calculation
The two thresholds, [69.28] and [69.29], are calculated in % based on the following formula:
Threshold[%] =
R PTC
R + R PTC
* 100
Threshold[%] =
R NTC
R + R NTC
* 100
where RPTC or RNTC is the value , in Ohms, that the thermistor has at the alarm or trip temperature.
Remarks:
•
The thresholds set through user parameters [69.28] and [69.29] are in percentage and are referred to in the Analog Input Config
[09.00].
•
The default configuration is:
AIn = 0 [V]
==>
0 [%]
AIn = 10 [V]
==>
100 [%]
106
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.16.1. Cabling
For the management of the motor thermal protection by means of a PTC or NTC thermistor, it is possible to use Analog Input 1 or Analog
Input 2 on both the Microprocessor Basic and the Plus Board.
If Analog Input 1 is used (on both Microprocessor Basic and Plus Board), it is only necessary to connect the PTC/NTC thermistor to the
proper board terminals with proper jumpers settings (see Figure 1 and 3).
If Analog Input 2 is used (on both Microprocessor Basic and Plus Board), it is necessary to connect the PTC/NTC thermistor to the proper
board terminals with proper jumpers settings and also to add an external resistor (see Figure 2 and 4).
Figure 1
Microprocessor Basic Board – Analog Input 1
JP19
+10V
XM1-14
+
475R
JP18 : open
JP19 : closed
PTC
NTC
XM1-15
JP18
GND
XM1-13
Figure 2
Microprocessor Basic Board – Analog Input 2
AI1
XM1-30
+10V
1K
XM1-16
+
JP17 : open
475R
PTC
NTC
XM1-17
JP17
GND
XM1-13
Figure 3
Microprocessor Plus Board – Analog Input 1
SW3-C
+10V
XM1-26
+
475R
SW3 – B : open
SW3 – C : closed
SW3 – D : closed
AI2
PTC
NTC
XM1-27
AI1
SW3-B
SW3-D
GND
Figure 4
XM1-40
+10V
Microprocessor Plus Board – Analog Input 2
1K
XM1-28
+
475R
PTC
NTC
XM1-29
SW3-A : open
XM1-41
AI2
SW3-A
GND
107
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.17. Application Specific Functions
Application specific function are available at level 3 and depending on control type, as shown in the following table:
MACRO
108
Control
“Pope” function
11.17.1
SLS, FOC
Drooping
11.17.2
SLS, FOC
Tension regulator with load cell
11.17.3
SLS, FOC
Crane brake control
11.17.4
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
Safety override
11.17.5
V/Hz, SLS, FOC
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.17.1. “Pope” Function (SLS, FOC)
This function drives the peripheral winders. Its principle is similar to that of the Helper function. The main difference is that there is no
master drive in this case, therefore, the torque reference is modified with respect to an internal torque reference value, frozen when the
function is enabled.
Pulse
command
[28.04]
On
0
[28.05]
Pulse
command
On
[28.06]
[28.06]
0
Off
Off
0
0
Off
Off
[28.01]
On
+
[28.02]
On
-
+
Select Min
On
[17.04]
[ 31.05 ]
0
[ 28.06 ]
Off
On
PID
Off
DspTrqueRef
+
+
Speed_Ref
SpeedFbk_Slave
[17.05]
[17.01] [17.02]
Figure 11.17.1 Schematics of Pope function
To select the function, parameter:
Param #
1201
Name
Macro Vector Sel
must be set to “POPE”
When the function is selected, Sub-Menu Pope [04.PoP] is shown under the Auto Menu [Aut.04].
The following parameters can be configured:
Param #
Name
Description
Unit
28.01
Incr Torque Step
Percent increase of torque supplied
%
28.02
28.03
28.04
28.05
28.06
Decr Torque Step
Controller Overspeed
DI - Inc torque
DI - Dec torque
DI - Enable func
Percent decrease of torque supplied
Overspeed for saturation of speed regulator
Digital input selection for up command
Digital input selection for down command
Digital input selection to store last reference
%
%
The Pope function can be enabled or disabled by means of the digital input specified at parameter DI - Enable func [28.06] based on
following setup:
Digital input = On
“pope” enabled
Digital input = Off
“pope” disabled
Refer to Appendix D for the settings of DI - Enable func [28.06]
When the Pope function is disabled, speed regulation is restored. When the Pope function is enabled, torque limit is controlled by
saturating the speed regulator. Speed regulator saturation is obtained by adding a percent of maximum speed to the speed reference.
Maximum speed is set through parameter Controller Overspeed [28.03].
Once the Pope function is enabled it is possible to modify the torque reference by increasing or decreasing the percent torque. The
increment/decrement step can be set by use of parameters DI - Inc Torque [28.04] and DI - Dec Torque [28.05]. The amplitude for
increment/decrement of the percentage is set by use of parameters Inc Torque Step [28.01] and Dec Torque Step [28.02].
Refer to Appendix D for the settings of DI - Inc torque [28.04], DI - Dec torque [28.05] and DI - Enable func [28.06].
109
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.17.2. Drooping (SLS, FOC)
Internal Drooping
T
he Internal Drooping function is used to control several motors mechanically coupled in the same process line to prevent a drive from
braking due to speed inaccuracies. The speed reference of one motor is reduced by its control when the load increases, independently of
the action of the other motors.
24.01
(Network)
From Network
24.02
Fixed
24.03
Sign
Delta_Tq >0
24.05
24.04
X
On
X
Off
0
+ [Trq_Ref_Filt]
Delta_Tq
X
ABS
Trq_Ref_Filt
Delta_Tq <0
0
Speed regulator
Speed_Ref
+
-
Trq_Ref
__
Isq_Ref
Speed_Fbk
Flux
Figure 11.17.2.1 chematics of Internal Drooping Function
To select the function the parameter
must be set to “Drooping”:
Param #
12.01
Name
Macro Vector Sel
With the function selected, Sub-Menu Drooping [04.roL] is shown under the Auto Menu. The following parameters can be configured:
Param #
Name
Description
24.01
Droop Source Sel
Select source for roll-back percentage
24.02
24.03
24.04
24.05
Droop Fix Ref
Droop Trq Ref Flt
Droop Trq Thrshld
DI - Enable func
Fixed roll-back percentage value
Filter for roll-back torque reference
Torque threshold to activate roll-back
Enable/disable the drooping function through digital
selection.
Unit
%
Hz
%
The source for reference speed variation can be selected through parameter Droop Source Sel [24.01] and set to:
Fixed: the percent value is constant and set through parameter Droop Fix Ref [24.02];
Network: the percent value can be changed via fieldbus through configurable words IPZD
The Drooping function can be enabled or disabled through the digital input configured by use of parameter DI - Enable func [24.05], based
on the following setup:
Digital input = On
¾
“Drooping” enabled
Digital input = Off
¾
“Drooping” disabled
The following procedure must be carried out to share the load among the motors by changing the torque reference:
•
couple the motor to the process line
•
set [24.02] =5% and enable the Drooping function
•
increase the speed of the line sending the same speed reference to all the drives.
•
change parameter [24.02] according to desired torque reference.
The low-pass filter on the torque reference prevents the speed loop from becoming unstable. If instabilities arise, decrease the bandwidth
of the torque command used for the drooping function.
Cross Drooping
The cross drooping function can be used only when at least two drives (master and slave) are involved.
Correction must be enabled on the slave drive only as the slave drive is the one experiencing the speed reference reduction, based on
the torque produced by the motors. The correction is produced by acquiring the master torque reference from an analog input and feeding
it to the slave as a speed reference correction.
110
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
MASTER
Speed_Ref
SPEED REGULATOR
[17.04]
+
-
[17.05]
Speed_Fbk
Trq_Ref_Master
Analog Output
+
*
Offset Gain
[X]
Abs Clamp
Analog Output
Analog Input
Analog Input
Analog Input AI1
SLAVE
[22.06]
(AI1 XM1-26)
Trq_Ref_Master
Analog Input AI2
(AI2 XM1-28)
SPEED REGULATOR
Speed_Ref
+
+
-
[17.04]
+
Speed_Fbk
-
:
Isq_Ref
[17.05]
Internal
Drooping
Flux
Figure 11.17.2.2 Cross Drooping
The two drives must be configured as follows:
Configure one of the analog outputs to send torque reference to the slave drive (check that settings for gain, offset, clamp
and absolute value associated to the analog output used are as desired).
Enable the Internal Drooping function as described in the previous paragraph. Use one of the configurable analog inputs
(A|1, terminals XM1-27/26; A|2, terminals XM1-28/29), to acquire the torque reference from the master.
Set Add speed ref sel [22.06] = Anln1 or Add speed ref sel [22.06] = Anln2 (Setup Refs menu) according to the analog
input used to acquire torque reference.
This setting is used to generate an additional value for speed reference
Set Add speed ref pos [22.07] = DwnSt Ramp (Setup Refs menu) to sum up the additional speed reference value after
the speed ramp.
MASTER
SLAVE
The balance between the percent values of Internal Drooping and Cross Drooping, (for the same load sharing condition) depends on the
slave speed regulator tuning.
If the integral value of the regulator is different from
zero, the droop fix reference is given by:
where:
Droop_Fix_Ref =
Cmaster [%]
C slave [%]
∗
CM_slave [Nm]
CM_master [Nm]
* I nx Gn* 100
C master
= Percent value of torque supplied by the master with reference to the total torque.
C slave
= Percent value of torque supplied by the slave with reference to the total torque.
CM_master
= Maximum motor torque [Nm] supplied by the drive master.
CM_slave
= Maximum motor torque [Nm] supplied byf the drive slave.
MaxOperSpeed
= Maximum operating frequency (Max Oper Freq) [02.11] * 60 / pears of poles.
InxGn is the analog input gain used to acquire the torque reference from the master
InxGn =
[09.07]
[09.05]
−
MaxOperSpeed[rpm] MaxOperSpeed[rpm]
* 100
[09.06] − [09.04]
If the proportional value of the regulator is different from zero the load sharing is affected also by the percent of delivered torque.
Typical values :
[09.04] = -100%
[09.05] = 10% of the maximum operating frequency MaxOperSpeed [rpm] [09.06] = 100%
[09.07] = -10% of the maximum operating frequency MaxOperSpeed [rpm] [24.02] = 10%
111
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.17.3. Tension Regulator with Load Cells (SLS, FOC)
This function is used to apply a constant force to a material dragged by two drives controlled in speed. In this condition the force applied is
directly proportional to the speed difference between the two drives. The two drives have the same speed reference; the function is
enabled only on one of the two and will affect its speed reference to the ramp.
Select the function
Param #
12.01
Name
The parameter must be set to “tension”:
Macro Vector Sel
When the function is selected, sub-menu Tension [04.tEn] comes in view under the Auto Menu [Aut.04]. The following parameters can
be configured:
Param #
32.02
32.03
32.04
32.05
32.06
32.07
32.08
32.09
32.10
32.11
32.12
32.13
32.14
Description
Name
Tension Prp Gain
Prp Gain Divider
Tension Int Gain
Int Gain Divider
Tension Out Gain
Tension Upper Limit
Tension Lower Limit
Integral Rec Gain
Tension Ref Src Sel
Tension Fbk Src Sel
Load Cell Position
Integral Rec Type
DI – Enable func
Unit
Tension regulator proportional gain
Tension regulator proportional gain divider
Tension regulator integral gain
Tension regulator integral gain divider
Tension regulator output gain
Tension regulator output upper limit
Tension regulator output lower limit
Speed recalibration coefficient of tension regulator integral gain
Source selection for tension regulator reference
Source selection for tension regulator feedback
Load cell position
Tension regulator integral gain recalibration mode
Digital input selection to enable the function
%
Tension Regulator
[32.02]
[32.03]
Tension set
[ 32.07 ]
Kp
+
Tension set
[ 32.07 ]
-
Tension
feedback
Ki
+
1/Kr
+
+
1/z
[32.08]
+
[32.06]
[32.08]
Ki Tension
Select sign correction
from load cel position
[ 32.12 ]
[ 32.16 ]
Tension correction
Post pos.
(0)
*
-1
Ante pos.
0
(1)
Speed reference ramp
Figure 11.17.3.1 Tension regulator
112
+
+
Speed reference ramp
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
Tension Regulator
[32.02]
[32.03]
[ 32.07 ]
Kp
Tension set
+
[ 32.07 ]
-
Tension
feedback
Ki
+
1/Kr
+
+
1/z
[32.08]
+
[32.06]
Ki Tension
[32.08]
Select sign correction
from load cel position
[ 32.12 ]
Tension correction
[ 32.15 ]
Post pos.
(0)
*
+
Speed reference ramp
Ante pos.
0
-1
(1)
+
Speed reference ramp
Figure 11.17.3.2 Tension regulator
The function can be enabled and disabled through the digital input (parameter DI - Enable func [32.14]) that is based on the following
setting:
Digital input = On “Tension regulator” enabled
Digital input = Off “Tension regulator” disabled
Select the reference source, parameter Tension Ref Src Sel [32.10] must be set to:
Network
AI 1
AI 2
Tension reference from Fieldbus
Tension reference from analog input AI 1
Tension reference from analog input AI 2
Select the feedback source, parameter Tension Fbk Src Sel [32.11] must be set to:
Network
AI 1
AI 2
Tension feedback from Fieldbus
Tension feedback from analog input AI 1
Tension feedback form analog input AI 2
The tension loop performance can be changed by modifying the following parameters:
Param #
32.02
Name
Tension Prp Gain
Description
Tension regulator proportional gain
32.03
32.04
32.05
32.07
32.08
Prp Gain Divider
Tension Int Gain
Int Gain Divider
Tension Upper Limit
Tension Lower Limit
Tension regulator proportional gain divider
Tension regulator integral gain
Tension regulator integral gain divider
Tension regulator output upper limit
Tension regulator output lower limit
113
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
The dividers (Prp Gain Divider and Int Gain Divider) are used to increase numeric resolution.
Tension Prp Gain = 1
Prp Gain Divider =
10000
Example: to use a value of 0.0001 for the proportional gain, the following setting
must be used
The value set for integral gain can be recalibrated in two ways (defined through parameter Integral Rec Type [32.13]):
ki = ki ∗
Speed based on the ratio speed feedback / max
speed:
actual_spe ed
max_speed
ki = ki ∗ actual_speed ∗ factor
Factor based on speed feedback
In the latter case the re-calibration factor can be set through parameter Integral Rec Gain [32.09].
Integral Rec Type [32.13] = Factor
If no re-calibration is desired, the settings are:
Integral Rec Gain [32.09]= 0
Parameter Tension Out Gain [32.06] sets the maximum value of the correction that the tension regulator can perform on the speed
reference. This limit is set as a % of the maximum motor speed (parameter Motor Max Oper Freq [02.08]).
Depending on the position of the load cell with respect to the motor, the tension regulator action can be added or subtracted from the
speed reference. The position of the load cell must be set through parameter Load Cell Position [32.12].
Load
Cell
DRIVE
DRIVE
Tension Feedback
Load Cell Position =Pos Ante
Figure 11.17.3.3: Position Ante (correction is subtracted from speed reference)
Load
Cell
DRIVE
DRIVE
Tension Feedback
Load Cell Position =Pos Post
Figure 11.17.4.2 Position Post (correction is added to speed reference)
To tune the tension regulator the following variables can be sent on analog
outputs and visualized through an oscilloscope:
114
Tension reference
Tension feedback
(67)
(68)
Tension regulator output
(70)
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
11.17.4. Crane Brake Control (FOC, SLS, VHz)
With this macro it is possible to manage the opening and closing of a mechanical brake with the relative safety procedure and diagnostics.
This macro is available for all the motor control types: Foc Ctrl, SLS Ctrl, VHz Ctrl.
Parameters List
The parameters needed for this function are under the group Auto Menu in a new family called Crane control [30.00]:
The parameters under the “Motor Data” [02.00] family allow to set the correct values of the zero frequency threshold and zero frequency
band.
The parameters under the “Digital Output Cfg ” [08.00] allow to configurr the digital output used for the brake command and for
diagnostics.
Enabling/Disabling the Crane Brake Management
Using the parameter “Macro App. Sel”, under the family “Application Macro En [12.00]”, it is possible to enable/ or disable the crane brake
management. When the function is enabled, the brake management is always active.
Enabling the crane brake management:
Param #
12.03
Name
Macro App. Sel
Units
Setting
= Crane Ctrl
When the function is enabled, the related family “Crane Control” appears under the Group “Auto Menu”. Furthermore, a digital output must
be configured as brake command. Example: it is possible to chose the digital output RO2 as brake command with the following setting:
Param #
Name
08.01
RO2 – XM1
Disabling crane the brake management:
Param #
12.03
Units
Setting
= Brake Cmd
Name
Macro App. Sel
Units
Setting
= Off
115
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
Procedure to Open the Brake
Start Sequence: Time Diagram (FOC, SLS)
Start sequence: Description
In order to open the brake, the drive control follows this procedure starting from the “READY” drive status:
1) The drive receives the start command and starts the torque proving procedure in one of two different modes depending from on the
Motor Control Mode [01.02]. The torque proving is a function to ensure, before releasing the brake and starting the crane operation, that
the drive is able to produce torque.
Proving Procedure for Motor Control Mode [01.02] = FOC or SLS
Torque proving is performed by giving a torque reference with the brake applied. If torque proving is successful, that means torque
reaches the correct level, the next step in the starting sequence is operative.
•
The control sets a speed demand upstream ramp according to the value set through the parameter [30.02] Trq Prov Speed Ref
and sets the torque upper limit to a value 10% (FOC) or 25 % (SLS) more than the value set through the parameter [30.01]
Torque proving threshold.
•
The torque feedback must be greater than the value set through the parameter [30.01] Torque proving threshold for the time set
through the parameter [30.03] Torque proving time.
Proving Procedure for Motor Control Mode [01.02] = VHz
Torque proving is performed by giving a frequency reference with the brake applied. If torque proving is successful, that means frequency
reaches the correct level, the next step in the starting sequence is initialised.
•
The control sets a speed demand upstream ramp according to the value set through the parameter [30.02] Trq Prov Speed Ref.
•
The frequency feedback must be greater than the value set through the parameter [30.02] Trq Prov Speed Ref for the time set
through the parameter [30.03] Torque proving time.
2) Safety delay time:
If torque proving is successful, the torque upper limit is open to the original value and the speed demand is set to zero. After the time set
through the parameter [30.08] Open order dly time, the drive starts the open brake procedure.
3) Opening brake procedure:
•
Sends the open command to the digital output that was chosen selected for to command the brake.
•
If the parameter [30.06] DI - Brake Status is not set to “Unused”, when the brake status feedback coming through the selected
digital input confirms the open status, the motor follows the required speed demand. It is possible to set a minimum time to wait
for the open status, after the brake command, using the parameter [30.09] Brake opening time.
•
If the brake is not open in the time set through the parameter [30.10] Brake open chk time, the drive trips, closes immediately
the brake, and gives an sw fault (“Open Brake” on the AF keypad and PC Tools) to point out the fault on opening brake.
•
If the parameter [30.08] DI - Brake Status is set to “Unused”, the drive waits for the time set through the parameter [30.09] Brake
opening time, then follows the required speed demand.
116
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
Procedure to Close the Brake
-
Stop sequence: Time Diagram (FOC, SLS)
Stop sequence: Description
In order to close the brake, the drive control follows this procedure starting from the “RUN” drive status:
1) The drive receives the stop command and then waits that until the speed decreases under the speed threshold, which is set through
the parameter [30.13] Close brake speed.
2) Wait the close order time.
After the time set throug the parameter [30.14] Close order dly time, the drive starts the close brake procedure.
3) Closing brake procedure.
•
Sends the close command to the digital output chosen that was selected for command the brake.
•
If the parameter [30.06] DI - Brake Status is not set to “Unused”, when the brake status feedback coming through the selected
digital input confirms the closed status, the brake closing procedure is finished. It is possible to set a minimum waiting time for
the close status, after the brake command, using the parameter [30.15] Brake closing time.
•
If the close brake status is not present after the time defined by [30.16] Brake fail chk time, the drive gives an alarm (“ClsBrk
Alm” on the AF keypad and PC Tools) and maintains the zero speed for the time set by the parameter [30.17] Unclosed alarm
time. After this time, the drive switches off the firing pulses and gives an sw fault (“Close Brk” on the AF keypad and PC Tools)
to point out the fault on closing brake.
•
If the parameter [30.06] DI - Brake Status is set to “Unused”, the drive control waits for the time set by the parameter [30.15]
Brake closing time, then finishes the brake closing procedure.
•
The drive switches off the firing pulses after the time set by the parameter [30.18] Stop fluxing time. During this time the upper
and lower torque limit are set to zero.
117
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
Remarks
Torque proving
With the Motor control Mode [01.02] set to SLS Ctrl or FOC Ctrl, it is possible to disable the torque proving procedure by setting the torque
proving threshold to zero.
Param #
30.01
Name
Torque proving thres
Units
pu
Setting
=0
With the Motor control Mode [01.02] set to VHz Ctrl it is possible to disable the torque proving procedure by setting the torque proving
speed ref parameter to zero.
Param #
Name
Units
Setting
30.02
Trq Prov Speed Ref
%
=0
30.03
Trque Proving time
s
=0
Drive fault management
If the drive trips during a movement, the brake closes immediately without taking into account the time set through the parameter [30.14]
Close order dly time, or any other parameter.
With the parameter “[30.12] Unwanted closed mode” set to FAIL, if, during a movement, the control detects a brake closing at least for the
time set trough by the parameter [30.11] Unwanted closed time, the drive trips and produces an sw fault (“Brk & Run” on the AF keypad
and PC Tools) to point out an unwanted brake closing.
With the parameter “[30.12] Unwanted closed mode” set to ALARM, if, during a movement, the control detects a brake closing at least for
the time set trough by the parameter [30.11] Unwanted closed time, the drive produces an sw alarm (ClsBrk Alm on the AF keypad and
PC Tools) to point out an unwanted brake closing.
Emergency restart:
Time diagram
If, during the closing procedure, the close brake status is not present after the time defined by [30.16] Brake fail chk time, the drive gives
an alarm (“ClsBrk Alm” on the AF keypad and PC Tools), and maintains the zero speed for the time set by the parameter [30.17]
Unclosed alarm time.
During this time, it is possible to give for an emergency restart in order to take the load on the ground and than avoid the possible load
fall-down. In this case, of course, the torque proving procedure will not be done.
Brake status feedback
The logic used on the brake status feedback coming from the digital input selected through the parameter [30.06] DI - Brake Status, can
be changed through the parameter [30.07] Open brake status :
[30.07] Open brake status = On “On” level on digital input means brake open
[30.07] Open brake status = Off “Off” level on digital input means brake open
118
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
Alarms and Trips - Diagnostic of the Crane Applications
The drive must be able to point outgenerates the followings trips:
Protection name
Description
Remark
“Trq Prove”
Torque proving failed because the Motor Torque is not greater than the threshold set by
[30.01]. It is possible to delay the torque proving test using the parameter [30.04].
TrqProvWork
“Trq Th High”
Torque The torque threshold is too high, causes causing motor rotation during torque proving.
There is a motor rotation when the brake is closed.
TrqThHi_work
“Brk & Run”
The brake status (Digital Input) selected by [30.06] and [30.07], indicates that the brake is
closing when the motor is running.
It appears only if the parameter [30.12] is set to “Fault”.
CloseBrkInRunwork
“Open Brake”
The brake status, (Digital Input) selected by [30.06] and [30.07], remains closed during the
open procedure. Check parameter [30.09] in order to be sureto verify that mechanical times
needed for the brake opening are set correctly.
OpenBrkwork
“Close Brk”
The brake status , (Digital Input), selected by [30.06] and [30.07], remains opened during the
close procedure. Check parameter [30.15] in order to be sureto verify that mechanical times
needed for the brake closing are set correctly.
CloseBrkwork
The drive must be able to point outgenerates the followings alarms:
“ClsBrk Alm”
1) - If the parameter [30.12] is set to “Alarm”, the Alarm “ClsBrk Alm” is generated when the
brake status (Digital Input) selected by [30.06] and [30.07] indicates that the brake is closing
when the motor is running.
In this case after the closing procedure the trip “Close Brk” will be generated.
2) - If the brake status (Digital Input) selected by [30.06] and [30.07], indicates that the brake
was not closed during the closing procedure, the Alarm “ClsBrk Alm” is generated.
The Alarm “ClsBrk Alm” is automatically reset when the close brake command is correctly
actuated.
CloseBrakeAlarm
All the alarms and trips are available separately on Profibus, ModBus and on every digital output on the control board.
On the parameters used for the Digital Output Configuration, five new selection are added:
OpBrk Fail
Open brake fail
ClBrk Fail
Close brake fail
TqProvFail
Torque proving fail
TqProvHigh
Torque proving threshold greater than brake torque capability
Brk & RUN
Unwanted brake close condition
ClBrk Alm
Close brake non actuated alarm
The digital output status related to these new selections is:
Off
No protection/Alarm
On
Protection or Alarm
119
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
Weighing Function
The function, used in lifting applications (cranes, etc.) with motor operating in constant power region, allows to always obtain maximum
motor speed according to the actual load torque. This is achieved by weighing the load and increasing the speed reference value so as to
avoid the motor current exceeding the rated value in steady state conditions.
Torque-Speed characteristic
S
T
Lifting
Tn, Ωn
Hoisting : positive
Tx, Ωx
Lowering:negative
Constant Torque
Constant
Base Speed
speed
Example: if the load needs the torque Tx, the speed reference will be set to Ωx value (greater than the base value Ωn).
With the function enabled, at every start command, if the speed reference is greater than the value corresponding to the base speed, the
motor accelerates up to the base speed and remains at this speed for a certain time during which the drive weighs the actual load
(“weighing”). After the weighing, if the load is lower than the rated value, the drive increases the speed reference to the maximum value
compatible with the actual load according the following formula.
N = BaseSpeed•
Tn
T
For instance, if the base speed is equal to 1500 rpm and the calculated torque is equal to 60% of the rated torque, the speed reference
after the weighing will be:
N = 1500 •
1
= 2500 → RPM
0.6
11.17.4.7.1
Function description
The Weighing Function is operating with speed reference coming from internal preset speed selectable by means of the digital inputs.
With the function enabled, at every start command, if the speed reference is greater than the value corresponding to the base speed set
by means of the parameter “Weighing Speed“ [30.20], the motor accelerate according the set ramp up to the weighing speed.
The speed reference is:
Nwei . = BaseSpeed•
[30.20]
100
The weighing speed is set by means of the parameter [30.20] as a function of the base speed of the motor. The default value of this
parameter is 90 (maximum value 100), so as default the weighing is carry out at 90 % of the base speed.
The weighing speed will be constant for the time set by means of the parameter “Weighing Time“ [30.21], after this time the ATV
calculates (weighing) the average value of the load torque (Twei.) supplied by the motor throughout a same time set by the parameter
“Weighing Time” [30.21]. The default value of [30.21]. is 400 ms;
Than the motor rotates at the “Weighing Speed” for a time double than “Weighing Time”.
The calculated load torque value Twei can be changed by means of the parameter “Weighing Change” [30.22]:
T = Twei . •
[30.22]
100
This allows, for instance, to overestimate the load so to reduce the speed at wich the motor will rotate (the default value of this parameter
is 100 and so the weighing value is not changed).
If the calculated torque T is lower than the motor rated torque Tn, the ATV gives the following speed reference:
N = BaseSpeed•
120
Tn
T
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
To this speed reference correspond the maximum speed compatible with the actual load.
The motor will accelerate from weighing speed till to the speed correspondings to this value.
In short, at the start command the motor accelerate with ramp till to the weighing speed, than it rotate at this speed for a time double than
“Weighing Time” and than, if the load is lower than the rated one, it accelerates till to the maximum speed compatible with the calculated
load torque.
At the start command with the speed reference value lower than the “Weighing Speed“ [30.20] (default value 90, maximum value
100) the weighing function do not act and the speed will be always equal or lower than the base speed.
The weighing can be done in the hoisting and lowering condition. Because off the different effect of the friction torque in the two
conditions, to have the same speed is available the parameter [30.22] “Lowering Friction balance”. This parameter allows to change the
value of the torque used to calculate the maximum lowering speed adding a correttive term to the calculated torque.
The parameter [30.22] must be set so as, with the same load, the hoisting speed and lowering speed will be the same.
Application example
Motor :
Base speed :
Maximum speed:
160 kW – 440 V – 60 Hz – 4 poles
1800 rpm
2200 rpm
Two internal positive preset speed and two internal negative preset speed, choosed by means of two digital inputs, are used.
slow positive reference
fast positive reference
slow negative reference
fast negative reference
The slow references are lower than the base speed, the fast references are greater than the base speed. With the slow references
operating the weighing function do not act.
With the fast references choosed the weighing function acts:
the motor starts with speed reference value equal to the value of the weighing speed (default value : 90 % of the base speed), it rotates at
this speed for a time double of the Weighing Time and than, if the load is lower than the rated load, the speed will increase according to
the set ramp up to the value calculated after the weighing (value greater than the base speed and suitable to assure the torque required
by the load).
11.17.4.7.2
Parameters
Internal preset speed:
Preset Speed 1 [22.26]
Preset Speed 2 [22.27]
Preset Speed 3 [22.28]
Preset Speed 4 [22.29]
selectable by means of two digital inputs by means the following parameters:
DI-Fix speed Sel1 [22.30]
DI-Fix speed Sel2 [22.31]
(for details see the paragraph 10.3). The configuration parameters of the Weighing Function are the following:
30.19
30.20
30.21
30.22
30.23
Parameter
Weight Proof En
Weigth Proof Speed
Weigth Proof Time
Weigth Proof Recalib
Friction Compensat
Description
Function enabling
Weighing Speed
Weighing Time
Weighing change o
Lowering Friction balance
Unit
Bit
%
ms
%
%
Min
0
50
10
50
0
Max
1
100
5000
150
100
Default
0
90
400
100
5
The function is enabled by means of the parameter [30.19].
Parameter [30.20] “Weighing Speed”
The parameter [30.20] set the speed at wich is done the weighing, as a in percentages of the base speed of the motor:
Npes = [02.08] •
[30.20]
100
The parameter [02.08] Motor Frequency (Hz) set the base speed of the motor.
The default value of the speed at which the weighing is done is equal to 90 % of the motor base speed.
Parameter [30.21] “Weighing Time”
The parameter [30.21] set the time throughout the wich the weighing is done:
the weighing speed is maintaned for the the time set by means of the parameter [30.21] after this time the ATV control calculates,
throughout the time set by the parameter [30.21], the average value of the torque supplied by the motor (this average value of the
torque Twei. is the result of the weighing).
Parameter [30.22] “Change of the weighing”
By means of the parameter [30.22] is possible to change the value of the calculated torque during the weighing:
T = Twei . •
[30.22]
100
by means of this parameter it is possible, for instance, to overestimate the load so to reduce the speed at wich the motor will rotate; the
default value of this parameter is 100 so as default the weighing is not changed.
121
11. Application Macros (Advanced System Application Functions)
Parameter [30.23] “Lowering Friction Compensation”
By means of the parameter [30.23] it is possible to balance out the different effect of the friction torque during the hoisting and the
lowering conditions: this parameter must be set so that the hoisting and lowering speed with the same load will have the same value.
11.17.5. Safety Override
Safety Override function can be used whenever the drive must be disables all software protections in case one of this occurred.
The Safety Override function can be activated through a digital input or a bit significant word (Fieldbus) by configuring the parameter DI Mask SW Trips [69.26] in “Protections” menu.
Digital Input = High
Digital Input = Low
Safety Override enabled
Safety Override disabled
Refer to Appendix D for the DI - Mask SW Trips possible settings.
The lists of SW Protection ignored are:
Precharge Fault
Overspeed Trip
Configuration error
DSP Program not responding
Network Communication Loss
Motor Stalled
Emergency Stop Protection
Undervoltage Protection
Drive size not selected
Ground Fault Protection
Motor Overload Trip
Inverter Overload Trip
Speed Deviation Trip
DSP formulation error
Offset on current measurement
Error writing on RAM DSP
Switching Frequency Error (not allowed)
Switching Frequency Configuration Error
Under Load fault
Loss Speed Reference (analog input)
Loss of Output Phase
Floating Point Error
Crane Brake Control: Open Brake
Crane Brake Control: Close Brake
Crane Brake Control: Torque Proving
Crane Brake Control: Torque High
Crane Brake Control: Open Brake
Analog Input User Trip (PTC/NTC)
122
12. I/O configuration
The I/O configuration of the Microprocessor Board is available at programming level #2.
12.1. Digital Input Configuration
The digital inputs are described in the chapters covering the functions that use these inputs.
12.1.1. Digital Output Configuration
This chapter describes the procedure to be used to configure the digital outputs of the microprocessor board.
Up to six digital outputs are available on the Microprocessor Plus board
Output name
Terminal block XM1
1
RO1 Fault
RO2 Configurable
RO3 Configurable
DO 4/DI 9
Open
collector
DO 5 /DI
output
10 6
DO
*
NA
3
1
45
21
22
23
COM
4
2
46
25
25
25
Configuration parameter
2
NC
44
43
//
//
//
//
Not configurable
RO2 – XM1.1/2/43 [08.01]
RO3 – XM1.45/46 [08.02]
DO4 – XM1.21/25 [08.03]
DO5 – XM1.22/25 [08.04]
DO6 – XM1.23/25 [08.05]
The pre-defined relay output RO1 Fault annunciates the drive trip, according to the following logic:
Relay RO1 de-energized =
trip occurred
Relay RO1 energized
=
no trips occurred
The following logic is used for the configurable outputs:
Digital output = 0
contact open
(Off)
Digital output = 1
contact closed (On)
The outputs are programmed by parameters: 08.01,-08.02, 08.03 in Sub-menu Digital output cfg shown under the Drive Menu.
Digital Output Configuration window displayed from PC interface in case of Microprocessor Plus:
1
Normally open
2 Normally
(*) 24V–10mA static output
closed
if the load is inductive type (relay coil), install a suitable diode in parallel
123
12. I/O configuration
The outputs can be configured through the configuration parameters shown in the previous. All parameters can be visualized at
programming level #2. The selectable functions are explained in the following table:
Disable:
Ready:
Running:
ZeroSpd:
SetPoint1G
SetPoint2G
SetPoint1L
SetPoint2L
Reset
AUT/MAN
SpdControl
SpdNotZero
SatSpdReg
Prech Ok
Net Ref
TermBlkRef
Alarm
SpdReached
FluxNoSat
SpdDeviat
Start Prec
DrvEnStat
NetLnkOk:
SpdRefLost
124
No function selected.
The drive is ready to receive the Start command. This happens when the pre-charge is completed and the Drive Enable command
is set at ON.
Off = pre-charge not accomplished or Drive Enable command set at Off
On = pre-charge accomplished and Drive Enable command set at On
Annunciates that ATV is operating (firing pulses enabled):
Off = firing pulses disabled
On = firing pulses enabled
The motor speed is below a minimum value defined through Set Zero Frequency [02.14] (Setpoint value) and Set Zero Freq Band
[02.15] (Hysteresis value). The logic for this function is:
Off = speed greater than Set Zero Frequency plus Set Zero Freq Band
On = speed lower than Set Zero Frequency minus Set Zero Freq Band
If the zero frequency value is lower than the minimum frequency (set through [02.10]) digital output switching occurs on start/stop
command only. When the drive is running, whatever the speed reference, the digital output remains off because the motor speed
cannot be lower than the minimum frequency [02.10], see figure 12.1
Annunciates when a certain variable exceeds a setpoint value. The desired variable is selected by configuring parameter Comp 1
Variable [08.06] (the variables list is shown in paragraph 12.4). The values of the threshold and hysteresis are set up through
parameters Comp 1 Threshold [08.07] and Comp 1 Hysteresis [08.08]. The logic is as follows:
On if abs(Comp 1 Variable) > Comp 1 Threshold + Comp 1 Hysteresis
Off if abs(Comp 1 Variable) < Comp 1 Threshold - Comp 1 Hysteresis
Same as per SetPoint1G. Parameters are Comp 2 Variable [08.09], Comp 2 Threshold [08.10], and Comp 2 Hysteresis [08.11].
Annunciates when the threshold of a variable goes below a setpoint value. The desired variable is selected by configuring
parameter Comp 1 Variable [08.06] (the variables list is shown in paragraph 12.4). The values of the threshold and hysteresis are
set up through parameters Comp 1 Threshold [08.07] and Comp 1 Hysteresis [08.08]. The logic is as follows:
On if abs(Comp 1 Variable) < Comp 1 Threshold - Comp 1 Hysteresis
Off if abs(Comp 1 Variable) > Comp 1 Threshold + Comp 1 Hysteresis
Same as SetPoint1L. Parameters are Comp 2 Variable [08.09], Comp 2 Threshold [08.10], and Comp 2 Hysteresis [08.11].
Feedback indicating that a trip reset (fed from keypad, digital input,
Off =
trip reset not active
network or Microprocessor boards) is active:
On =
trip reset active
Shows that the drive is in Automatic or Manual Mode:
Off =
Drive in Automatic Mode
On =
Drive in Manual Mode
Annunciates if the speed or torque regulation is active:
On =
speed regulation active
Function it is available in FOC or Sls control
Off =
torque regulation active
It is the opposite of the ZeroSpd function:
On =
speed other than zero
Off =
speed below the minimum value
Annunciates the status of the speed regulator:
On =
speed regulator in saturation
Off =
speed regulator in linear operation
Marks the end of the pre-charge phase (when the voltage on the DC
Off =
pre-charge not accomplished
bus exceeds the pre-charge threshold) :
On =
pre-charge accomplished
The drive is controlled from remote through a Fieldbus communication: Off =
operation from Fieldbus disabled
On =
operation from Fieldbus enabled
Annunciates if the drive is controlled from remote through terminal
Off =
Drive controlled from Fieldbus
block or through Fieldbus:
On =
Drive controlled from terminal block
Indicates the presence of an alarm:
On =
alarm present
Off =
alarm not present
Indicates that the speed set point value (coming from keypad, terminal
On =
speed reached
block or Fieldbus) has been reached
Off =
speed not reached
Annunciates the status of the flux regulator:
On =
flux regulator in saturation
Off =
flux regulator in linear operation
If the speed deviation function is enabled, the digital output
On =
speed deviation greater than the limit
annunciates a speed error greater than 5%:
Off =
speed deviation within the limit
This function is meant to be used only in retrofit of old drives. Do not
On =
pre-charge command active
use for new application.
Off =
pre-charge command not active
Indicates the presence of the pre-charge command:
Shows the status of Drive Enable Command:
On =
Drive enable contact closed.
Off =
Drive enable contact open.
Shows the status of the fieldbus connection:
On =
Fieldbus operates correctly
Off =
loss of fieldbus connection
Annunciates the speed reference loss from analog input:
On =
speed reference lost
Note: refer to paragraph 10.3
Off =
speed reference available
12. I/O configuration
FromNet
Auto Reset
Auto ByPass
Brake Cmd
OpBrk Fail
ClBrk Fail
TqProvFail
TqProvHig
Brk & Run
ClBrk Alm
OverSW Trip
AI User AI
AI User Tr
Drv Fault
MotTHAlarm
MotTHFault
Forward
Bacward
SetP1Gsign
SetP2Gsign
SetP1Lsign
SetP2Lsign
The digital output is handled by Fieldbus.
Note : in case of communication loss the output is set to Off (contact open)
Only for RO2 output and if the Autoreset & Restart function is enabled. The output is low if the reset attempts fail for a number of times
equal to Auto Reset Attempts [70.02]:
On =
reset attempts number lower then Auto Reset Attempt [70.02].
Off =
reset attempts number greater then Auto Reset Attempts [70.02].
It indicates that the drive is unable to run but the motor still is. This digital output is true when the drive is in automatic mode, the auto
run contact (DI) is closed, and a fault occurs other than a ground fault or a motor overtemperature fault. The output function state
depend to value of [08.12] Auto bypass status (ON default value):
If [08.12] = On
if [08.12] = Off
On=
protections occurred
On =
no protections
Off =
no protections
Off =
protections occurred
Show the status of the brake command :
On =
brake opened
Off =
brake closed
It annunciates the protection condition for open brake
On =
protections occurred
failed:
Off =
no protections
It annunciates the protection condition for close brake
On =
protections occurred
failed:
Off =
no protections
It annunciates the protection condition for torque proving & On =
protections occurred
torque proving threshold greater than brake torque
Off =
no protections
capability:
It annunciates the condition for the Torque proving
On =
Torque proving threshold > than brake torque
threshold greater than brake torque capability:
Off =
Torque proving threshold < than brake torque
It annunciates the protection condition for unwanted brake On =
protections
close condition:
Off =
no protections
It annunciates the close brake non actuated alarm:
On =
alarm occured
Off =
no alarm
Annunciates if the Safety Override function is active:
On =
Safety Override active
Off =
Safety Override not active
It annunciates the alarm condition for AI User trip/alarm
On =
no alarm
function: analog input voltage greater or less than AI User
Off =
alarm occurred
Alarm Th [69.28]:
It annunciates the protection condition for AI User
On =
no protection
trip/alarm function: analog input voltage greater or less
Off =
protection occurred
than AI User Trip Th [69.29]:
It annunciates the protection condition for ATV drive:
On =
no protection
Off =
protection occurred
It annunciates the alarm condition for motor overload.
On =
no alarm
Off =
alarm occurred
It annunciates the protection condition for motor overload.
On =
no protection
Off =
protection occurred
It annunciates a positive value for the motor speed.
On =
motor speed positive
Off =
motor speed less equal than zero
It annunciates a negative value for the motor speed.
On =
motor speed negative
Off =
motor speed great equal than zero
The logic is like the SetPoint1G function but in this case
SetP1Gsign
the variable is managed with sign
The logic is like the SetPoint2G function but in this case
SetP2Gsign
the variable is managed with sign
The logic is like the SetPoint1L function but in this case
SetP1Lsign
the variable is managed with sign
The logic is like the SetPoint2L function but in this case
SetP2Lsign
the variable is managed with sign
Figure 12.1
125
12. I/O configuration
12.2. Analog Input Configuration
Two analog inputs are available, that can be configured through parameters belong to submenu Analog Input cfg [09.00].
The possible input signals are:
Voltage signals
-10 V to + 10 V
Current signals
0 to ± 20 mA
In order to select voltage signals or current signals it is necessary:
•
set the Jumpers correctly on the microprocessor board (refer to Maintenance Manual)
•
select through the parameters [09.02], [09.11] the kind of analog input signals you need. Possible selections for these
parameters are: +10 / -10 [V], +20 / -20 [mA], +4 / +20 [mA]
Signals
Current
0 t- ± 20 mA or
4 -+ 20 mA
Close the dip switch SW3-A (AI2 input) and SW3-B
(AI2 input)
Voltage
-10 a + 10 V
Open the dip switch SW3-A and SW3-B
Serial address Parameter configuration
09.01
09.02
09.03
09.01
09.02
09.03
09.04
09.05
09.06
09.07
09.08
09.09
09.10
09.11
09.12
09.10
09.11
09.12
09.13
09.14
09.15
09.16
09.17
09.18
AI1 XM1-14/15 Use
Al1 Volt or mA
AI1 XM1-14/15 Filt
AI1 XM1-26/27 Use
Al1 Volt or mA
AI1 XM1-26/27 Filt
AI1 Setpoint #1 (%)
AI1 Setpoint #1 Val
AI1 Setpoint #2 (%)
AI1 Setpoint #2 Val
AI1 Speed Profile
AI1 Abs Value
AI2 XM1-16/17 Use
Al1 Volt or mA
AI2 XM1-16/17 Filt
AI2 XM1-28/29 Use
Al1 Volt or mA
AI2 XM1-28/29 Filt
AI2 Setpoint #1 (%)
AI2 Setpoint #1 Val
AI2 Setpoint #2 (%)
AI2 Setpoint #2 Val
AI2 Speed Profile
AI2 Abs Value
Configuration
126
Microprocessor board switchs
Description
Analog input 1 configuration monitor
Analog input 1 voltage or current setting
Analog input 1 filter cut-off frequency
Analog input 1 configuration monitor
Analog input 1 voltage or current setting
Analog input 1 filter cut-off frequency
X coordinate AI1 first point characteristic
Y coordinate AI1 first point characteristic
X coordinate AI1 second point characteristic
Y coordinate AI1 second point characteristic
Speed profile function Al1
Absolute value function AI1
Analog input 2 configuration monitor
Analog input 2 voltage or current setting
Analog input 2 filter cut-off frequency
Analog input 2 configuration monitor
Analog input 2 voltage or current setting
Analog input 2 filter cut-off frequency
X coordinate AI2 first point characteristic
Y coordinate AI2 first point characteristic
X coordinate AI2 second point characteristic
Y coordinate AI2 second point characteristic
Speed profile function Al2
Absolute value function AI2
Progr. level
2
2
3
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
12. I/O configuration
AI 1 XM... Use
09.01
AI1 Setpoint 2 Val
P09.07
AI1 Setpoint 1 (%)
P09.04
AI1 Abs Val
P09.09
Freq/RPM/...
AI 1
V/mA_in
a_1
V/mA_in*
an_1_offset
P09.24
-100
20
100
%
an_1_gain
P09.29
AI1 Speed Profile
P09.08
K=100/10
K=100/20
if 09.02=1
if 09.02=2,3
AI1 Volt or mA
P09.02
AI1 XM.... Filt
P09.03
AI1 Setpoint 2 (%)
P09.06
AI1 Setpoint 1 Val
P09.05
AI1 Use: It is a read-only parameter. It shows the selected use for analog input 1. All configurations possible for AI1 are listed in the
following table:
ID#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Signal
Unused
Spd demand
Frq demand
AuxSpd Dem
AuxFrq Dem
AddSpd Dem
AddFrq Dem
LimSpd D1
LimFrq D1
LimSpd D2
LimFrq D2
Trq demand
AddTrq Dem
Torque UL
Torque LL
ExtPID Dem
ExtPID Fbk
Tens Dem
Tens FbK
AI Us Trip
Function
Not used
Main speed reference
Main frequency reference
Auxiliary speed reference
Auxiliary frequency reference
Speed reference in addition
Frequency reference in addition
Speed limit D1
Frequency limit D1
Speed limit D2
Frequency limit D2
Torque reference
Torque reference in addition
Upper torque limit
Lower torque limit
External PID reference
External PID feedback
Tension reference
Tension feedback
Analog Input User Trip/Alarm
(*)Unit
Rpm
Hz
Rpm
Hz
Rpm
Hz
Rpm
Hz
Rpm
Hz
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
By default, the maximum value of a variable associated to an analog input corresponds to:
±10 V
if the analog input signal is a voltage
±20 mA
if the analog input signal is a current
This can be modified by properly adjusting the Analog Input linear characteristic as specified later in this paragraph.
AI1 Filt:
Cut-off frequency of the first order low-pass digital filter used for analog input 1. →Range 0 ÷100 Hz
AI1 Setpoint #1 (%):
X coordinate of the first point of AI1 linear characteristic.
→Between ±100 % of 10 V if the analog input signal is a voltage
→Between ±100 % of 20 mA is the analog input signal is a current
AI1 Setpoint
Val(*):
Y of the first point of AI1 linear characteristic. →Value of function associated to AI1
below)
#1
AI1 Setpoint #2 (%):
X coordinate of second point of AI1 linear characteristic.
→Between ±100 % of 10 V if the analog input signal is a voltage
→Between ±100 % of 20 mA if the analog input signal is a current
AI1 Setpoint
Val(*):
Y coordinates of the second point of AI1 linear characteristic.
(see example below)
NOTE
#2
(see example
→Value of function associated to AI1
The Default value of AI1 Setpoint 1 %, AI1 Setpoint 2 %, AI1 Setpoint 1 Val, Setpoint2 Val are automatically set when the user
change the parameter [09.02]
127
12. I/O configuration
EXAMPLE 1
Speed demand
The analog input being used as Spd demand
(to acquire the speed reference), to have:
1500
1200
300 RPM @ 0V
900 RPM @ 8V
900
these settings must be used:
AI1(2) Setpoint #1 (%)
= 0%
AI1(2) Setpoint #1 Val
= 300
AI1(2) Setpoint #2 (%)
= 80%
AI1(2) Setpoint #2 Val
= 900
300
600
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
4
2
6
8
-300
10 Analog
Input [V]
-600
-900
-1200
-1500
EXAMPLE 2
Speed demand
1500
The analog input being used as Spd demand (to
acquire the speed reference), to have:
1200
0 RPM @ 4 mA
1500 RPM @ 20 mA
900
these settings must be used:
Al1 Volt or mA
= 4 – 20 mA
AI1(2) Setpoint #2 (%) = 100%
AI1(2) Setpoint #2 Val
= 1500
Automatcally set:
AI1(2) Setpoint #1 (%) = 20%
AI1(2) Setpoint #1 Val
=0
300
600
-20
-16
-12
-8
Analog
Input
-4
4
8
12
16
20
[mA]
-300
-600
-900
-1200
-1500
AI1 Speed Profile: Speed profile function for AI1. If enabled (ON) the negative values of analog input signals are available (see example)
ON
=
Speed profile enabled
OFF
=
Speed profile disabled
AI1 Abs Value:
Absolute value functions for AI1. If enabled (ON) the absolute values of AN1 linear characteristic are available (see example)
ON
=
Absolute value enabled
OFF
=
Absolute value disabled
EXAMPLE: The following diagrams show the
different settings of AI1 Speed Profile and AI1
Abs Value:
Al1 Use =
Spd demand;
Al1 Volt or mA
=
Volt;
AI1 Setpoint #1 (%)
=
0%;
AI1 Setpoint #1 Val
=
0;
AI1 Setpoint #2 (%)
=
100%;
AI1 Setpoint #2 Val
=
1500.
Speed
Reference
1500
1200
900
600
300
-10 -8
-6 -4
-2
-300
-600
2
4
6
8
10 Analog
Input
-900
-1200
-1500
128
AI1 Speed Profile = On
AI1 Abs Value
= Off
12. I/O configuration
Speed
Reference
-10 -8
-6 -4
Speed
Reference
1500
1500
1200
1200
900
900
600
600
300
300
-2
-300
-600
2
4
6
8
10 Analog
Input
-10 -8
-6 -4
-2
-300
-900
-1200
-1200
AI1 Speed Profile = On
AI1 Abs Value
= On
4
6
8
10 Analog
Input
-600
-900
-1500
2
AI1 Speed Profile = Off
AI1 Abs Value
= Off
-1500
AI2 Use:
This is a read-only parameter. It shows the use selected for analog input 2. All configurations possible for AI2
are the same as listed for AI1.
By default, the maximum value of a variable associated to an analog input corresponds to:
±10 V
if the analog input signal is a voltage
±20 mA if the analog input signal is a current
This correspondence can be modified by correctly adjusting the Analog Input linear characteristic as specified
later in this paragraph.
AI2 Filt:
Cut-off frequency of the first order low-pass digital filter used for analog input 2.
→Range 0 ÷100 Hz
AI2 Setpoint #1 (%):
X coordinate of the first point of AI2 linear characteristic.
→Between ±100 % of 10 V if the analog input signal is a voltage
→Between ±100 % of 20 mA is the analog input signal is a current
AI2 Setpoint #1 Val(*):
Y of the first point of AI 2 linear characteristic.
→Value of function associated to AI2 (see example below)
AI2 Setpoint #2 (%):
X coordinate of second point of AI2 linear characteristic.
→Between ±100 % of 10 V if the analog input signal is a voltage
→Between ±100 % of 20 mA if the analog input signal is a current
AI2 Setpoint #2 Val(*):
Y coordinate of the second point of AI2 linear characteristic.
→Value of function associated to AI2 (see example below)
AI2 Speed Profile:
Speed profile function for AI2. If enabled (ON) the negative values of analog input signals are available (see
example)
ON
=
Speed profile enabled
OFF
=
Speed profile disabled
AI2 Abs Value:
Absolute value function for AI2. If enabled (ON) the absolute values of AN1 linear characteristic are available
(see example)
ON
=
Absolute value enabled
OFF
=
Absolute value disabled
NOTE
CAUTION
Default value of AI2 Setpoint 1 %, AI2 Setpoint 2 %, AI2 Setpoint 1 Val, AI2 Setpoint 2 Val are set automatically when
the parameter [09.11] is changed.
If another function uses the selected analog input, the selection is not accepted.
A dialog window will be displayed, that shows this message:
“Analog In already used, try another input”
129
12. I/O configuration
12.2.1. Analog Output Configuration
The analog outputs are configurable, and are refreshed every 1 ms. Possible output signals are
Voltage signals: -10 a + 10 V
close the jumper JP5 between 1-2 (AO1 output) or JP7 (AO2 output).
Current signals: 0 to + 20 mA or
close the jumper JP5 between 2-3 (AO1 output) or JP7 (AO2 output).
4 to + 20 mA (for AO1 e AO2 only)
Warning: The current signals for output AO1 and AO2 have positive range only
In order to select voltage signals or current signals (for A01 and A02 only) it is necessary:
Set the jumpers JP5 and JP7 correctly on the microprocessor board (refer to Maintenance Manual)
Voltage signals
Current signals
•
Jumper JP5 (AO1 output) or JP7 (AO2 output) in 1-2 position.
Jumper JP5 (AO1 output) or JP7 (AO2 output) in 2-3 position.
Set the gain [10.02] and the offset [10.03] of AO1, the gain [10.07] and the offset [10.08] of AO2 to following values:
o
o
-10 to + 10 V [10.02], [10.07] = 100 %,
0 to ± 20 mA [10.02], [10.07] = 100 %,
4 to + 20 mA [10.02], [10.07] = 80 %,
Signal
Terminal block
[10.03], [10.08] = 0 V
[10.03], [10.08] = 0 V
[10.03], [10.08] = 2 V
Configuration parameters
12.3. Function
s
AO 1
AO 2
XM1 - 34
AO1 - XM1.34 [10.01]
Configurabile
XM1 - 35
AO2 - XM1.35 [10.06]
Configurabile
XM1 - 36
0V per AO 1 & AO 2
AO 3
XM1 - 37
AO3 - XM1.37 [10.11]
Configurabile
AO 4
XM1 - 38
AO4 - XM1.38 [10.16]
Configurabile
XM1 - 39
0V per AO 3 & AO 4
The parameters used for analog outputs configuration are under Sub-Menu Analog output [10.00].
The following table lists the variables that can be programmed for the analog outputs:
ID#
Signal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Rotor Speed ( VHz with Encoder)
Flux Current (Isd)
Torque Current (Isq)
Motor Current (Is)
Motor Voltage (Us)
DC bus Voltage (Vdc)
Power
Frequency
In automatic mode: Main speed reference
Auxiliary speed reference
Additional speed reference
Speed reference (upstream ramp )
Speed reference (downstream ramp)
Voltage on analog input 1
Voltage on analog input 2
Analog output 1 command from network (AO1)
Analog output 2 command from network (AO2)
Analog output 3 command from network (AO3)
Analog output 4 command from network (AO4)
External PID reference
External PID feedback
External PID output
Current transducer U phase (Is1)
Current transducer W phase (Is3)
Firing impulse enabled (triggered for trip)
Limited Torque reference (output speed controller)
Unlimited Torque reference (output speed controller)
Total Torque reference (output speed controller plus additional torque)
Estimated Torque
Isd reference (Isd_Ref)
Isq reference (Isq_Ref)
Flying restart status
Isd controller output(MonUsd_Ref)
Isq controller output (MonUsq_Ref)
130
FOC
Availability
SLS
V/Hz
12. I/O configuration
ID#
Signal
FOC
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75÷91
92
Rotor speed not filtered (VHz with encoder)
Upper Torque limit
Lower Torque Limit
Upper Torque Limit (external reference from special function)
Lower Torque Limit (external reference from special function)
Flux reference
Estimated Stator Flux (MonFis)
Estimated Rotor Flux (MonPsimr)
Tension controller: Reference
Tension controller: Feedback
Tension controller: Error
Tension controller: Output
Internal drooping: speed reference correction
Step reference for controller manual calibration
Frequency reference corrected by the ramp lock controllers
Rotor position (VHz with encoder)
Not used
Torque adding reference
Availability
ID#
Signal
Analog output configuration showed on the
PC Inteface with Microprocessor board:
It is possible, for each analog output:
to set the gain, the offset, the clamp and the
absolute value (abs).
Analog output
Progr. level 2
AO1 - XM1.33 or 34 [10.01]
AO2 - XM1.34 or 35 [10.06]
AO3 - XM1.37 [10.11]
AO4 - XM1.38 [10.16]
Gain [%]
Progr. level 3
AO1 Scaler [10.02]
AO2 Scaler [10.07]
AO3 Scaler [10.12]
AO4 Scaler [10.17]
Offset [V]
Progr. level 3
AO1 Offset [10.03]
AO2 Offset [10.08]
AO3 Offset [10.13]
AO4 Offset [10.18]
Clamp
Progr. level 3
AO1 Clamp [10.04]
AO2 Clamp [10.09]
AO3 Clamp [10.14]
AO4 Clamp [10.19]
Absolute value
Progr. level 3
AO1 absolute value [10.05]
AO2 absolute value[10.10]
AO3 absolute value [10.15]
AO4 absolute value [10.20]
Gain and offset can be set according to the following relations:
Offset =
(OfsValue/FSValue) * FSVout
Gain
=
(FSValue–OfsValue)/MaxValue * (Volt@MaxValue/FSVout)
•
•
•
•
•
FSValue
MaxValue
OfsValue
Volt@MaxValue
FSVout
=
=
=
=
=
Full scale value of variable
Maximum value corresponding to maximum input voltage applied.
Minimum value corresponding to minimum input voltage
Voltage at analog output corresponding to maximum value
Full scale value for analog output
131
12. I/O configuration
EXAMPLE:
It is assumed that basic speed is set at 1500 RPM, that speed feedback is on programmable analog output #1, and that a
minimum value of 300 RPM and a maximum value of 1000 RPM corresponding to 8V are required. This gives:
OfsValue= 300 RPM
MaxValue= 1000 RPM
Volt@MaxValue= 8V.
300
∗ 10 = 2 V
1500
1500 - 300 8
Gain =
∗
∗ 100 = 96 %
1000
10
Offset =
Offset and gain values are to be set:
Both the clamp and absolute value functions can be enabled for each output.
Absolute Value
P10.05
AO 1 -XM1---P10.01
10V=Scada+
8V=ScadaB
a_out
A0_1
pick-list
AO 1 Scaler AO 1 Offset
P10.02
P10.03
Scada Plus
V
Offset
V0_1
clamp=on
clamp=off
a_in
Scada+
DAC
a_out
1.0X
20mA
Clamp
P10.04
10V
Scada Basic
Offset
V0_1
1.0X
Output Measure
Variable value
1500
1200
Max variable
value
900
600
Modified
Slope
300
-10
-8
-6
Default Slope
-4
-2
-300
-600
-900
2
Output V/mA
6
8
10 Analog
Ouput
Clamp = Off
Abs
= Off
-1200
-1500
10V / 20mA
4
Output
Measures
1500
Output
Measure
1500
1200
1200
900
900
600
600
300
300
-10
-10
-6 -4 -2
-300
-600
-900
Clamp = Off
-1200
Abs
= On
-1500
132
-8
2
4
6
8
10
-8
-6
Analog
Ouput
-4 -2
-300
-600
-900
Clamp = On
Abs
= Off
-1200
-1500
2
4
6
8
10
Analog
Ouput
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
13.1. Inverter Trips, Alarms and Reset
During normal operation, the drive control carries out all hardware and software checks in order to detect any possible abnormal
operation.
If an abnormal condition is detected, the operator is informed as follows :
the relay-type digital output “RO1 Fault” is de-energized (XM1 – 3/4/44 terminal block);
the red LED “FAULT” on Keypad or the emulated red LED “FAULT” on the PC interface comes on. The LED is on with steady
light if one or more trips have occurred or if trips and alarms are present concurrently. It flashes if there are only alarms (one
alarm or more);
a message about the trip/alarm cause is displayed on the keypad. If there are more trips/alarms, all trips/alarms messages are
displayed in cyclic mode; using the PC interface, the trip/alarm cause can be displayed trough the monitor variables [78.02] HW
fault (hw protections), [78.04] SW fault (sw protections) and [78.10] Cpu sw alarms (alarms)
If the operator changes the menu on the keypad, the trips/alarms codes are displayed again automatically after approximately 2 minutes.
-
Trips and alarms are stored inside the memory of the control. After the causes of the trips/alarms are removed, the control can be RESET
through the special button of the Keypad and PC Interface or through a Reset Command from digital input or from Fieldbus (see
paragraph 13.5 “Protection Menu”).
133
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
13.2. Fault/Alarm Log
The control can store up to 30 trip/alarm events in a cyclic buffer (historical log).
Through the Fault/Alarm Log [59.00] family (group Logs Control) the user can see the faults or the alarms occurred and stored in the
buffer:
The log shows the real time (year, months, day, hour, minute) when the trip or alarm occurred.
It is possible to select up to five protections that will not be stored in the historical log (Trace): the [6200] Logger maintenance family, has
5 parameters which them the user can choose either a protection that he will not store.
It is also possible to disable the store of all alarms through the parameter [62.07] Log Alarms Filter.
Example: set of four (4) protections and one (1) alarm that the user will not display in the historical log
The Fault/Alarm Log [59.00] family list can be cleared by use of parameter Clr fault/Alarm log [62.01].
13.3. Real Time Clock
The “Real Time Clock” function can be configured by use of the parameters in the following PC interface window:
The RTC settings [61.00] family is available under the Log Control menu ;
By use of the RTC settings [61.00] family, the user can set the year, month, hour, minutes, and the date format (European or American).
These settings are used in the Fault/Alarm Log [59.00] family.
134
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
13.3.1. Protections and Alarms List
PROTECTIONS
HW PROTECTIONS
MESSAGE
SW PROTECTIONS
MEANING
MESSAGE
Overcurrent
Overvoltage
External protection
Desaturation
Loss of modulator power supply
Dual Port error
Minimum DC bus voltage
Protection from interface board (overcurrent or
INTVEC Pr
overvoltage)
Over Temp Overtemperature
ThyrComErr Internal pre-charge system failure
Mod Conf Modulator start-up error
Over Curr
Over Volt
Extrn Trp
Desaturat
Mod Supply
DPRAM Err
Vdc Min
MEANING
Prec Fail
Over Spd
Confg Err
DSP Fail
Net Fail
Inv ThPrt
Stall
Pre-charge fault
Overspeed
Configuration error
DSP program not responding
Serial communication loss
Drive overload
Motor stalled
Fast Stop
Emergency stop
UnderVolt
DrivSzErr
Gnd Flt
Minimum DC bus voltage
Drive size not selected
Ground fault
UndSpd Er
Mot ThPrt
Speed Dev
DSPFormErr
Curr Offs
Ram Error
SWF Error
UnderLoad
SpdRfLs
OutPhasOut
FP Error
Open Brake
Close Brk
Trq Prove
TrqTh High
Brk & Run
AI User Fl
SWF CfgErr
Cks MODErr
Under speed
Motor overload
Speed deviation
DSP formulation error
Offset on current measurement
Write error in DSP RAM
Switching frequency error
Minimum load
Loss of speed reference (Analog Input)
Loss of Output phase
Floating Point Error
Crane Brake Control: Open Brake
Crane Brake Control: Close Brake
Crane Brake Control: Torque Proving
Crane Brake Control: Torque High
Crane Brake Control: Open Brake
Analog Input User Trip (PTC/NTC)
Switching frequency configuration error
Message from modulator corrupted
ALARMS
MESSAGE
MEANING
MESSAGE
MEANING
Spd High
Overspeed
Therm Hi
Motor overload
Curr High
Overcurrent
Speed Dev
Speed deviation
ClsBrk Alm
Crane Brake control: Close Brake Alarm
Net Link
Serial communication loss
IntEE Wbad
EEPROM write error
SpdRfLs
Loss of main reference (analog input)
AI User Al
Analog Input User Alarm
AnOvRng
Overrange of analog input
IntEE Rbad
EEPROM read error
DipModEnb
Dipolar modulation enabled
135
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
13.3.2. Protection Menu
Parameter family Protections [69.00] (under the Protect menu) is shown below:
Through the parameters of this family the user can:
•
select digital inputs or Fieldbus as the source of external trip (hw protection Extrn Trp); this selection is made through the
parameters from [69.04] DI-User trip #1 to [69.21] DI-User trip #18;
•
enable or disable the ground fault protection through parameter [69.02] Ground Fault Enable;
•
enable/disable and configure the loss of output phase protection through parameters [69.23] Loss of Output Phase Enable,
[69.30] Phase Out Max Count, [69.31] Phase Out Spd Thr.
•
enable/disable and configure the underload protection through parameters [69.24] Under Load Time, and [69.25] Under Load
Limit;
•
select digital inputs or Fieldbus as source of Safety Override function (see paragraph 11.23); this selection is made through the
parameters from [69.26] DI-Mask SW Trips;
•
select the analog input to be used for the analog input user trip/alarm function through the parameter [69.27] AI User A/T
source and also set the related thresholds through the parameters [69.28] AI User Alarm Th (alarm AI User Al) and [69.29] AI
User Trip Th (protection AI User Fl)..
the reset command is programmed on digital input DI 7 by default. To change this, the user must refer to the signal list in Appendix D).
136
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
13.3.3. Troubleshooting
MESSAGE ON KEYPAD
OR
PC INTERFACE
DESCRIPTION
CAUSE / ACTION
ALL CHECKS CONCERNING EQUIPMENT WIRING OR MOTOR WINDING (INSULATION) CONDITIONS MUST BE CARRIED OUT WITH NO
VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THE POWER CIRCUITS AND AFTER A WAITING TIME (10 MINUTES AT LEAST) TO ALLOW FOR DISCHARGE OF
CAPACITOR BANKS
These precautions are necessary for the safety of operators.
Over Curr
Protection trip:
maximum instantaneous overcurrent at drive output
Over Volt
Protection trip:
maximum DC bus overvoltage; instantaneous value of DC A motor stop was initiated with too short deceleration time.
voltage has exceeded the protection trip threshold..
Extrn Trp
External protection.
- check that neither short circuit between motor phases or phase fault to ground exists;
- check the wiring and for correct operation of the encoder and its mechanical coupling (FOC only );
- check that the acceleration ramp time is not too short;
- check the torque reference upper limits and torque current.
The dedicated digital input reached level zero.
Check the state of the contacts (to be found on the Equipment Elementary Diagram) that are connected to the
terminal board to implement such logic input, and/or other possible external protections, active through the
NETWORK.
ALL CHECKS CONCERNING EQUIPMENT WIRING OR MOTOR WINDING (INSULATION) CONDITIONS MUST BE CARRIED OUT WITH NO
VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THE POWER CIRCUITS AND AFTER A WAITING TIME (10 MINUTES AT LEAST) TO ALLOW FOR DISCHARGE OF
CAPACITOR BANKS
These precautions are necessary for the safety of operators.
Desaturat
Protection trip:
Gate unit anomaly (faulty operation detected by the Gate
unit; one of the IGBT firing boards)
Protection trip causes:
a)
IGBT desaturation;
b)
Loss of power supply to firing circuits;
Suggested checks:
a)
Check IGBTs.
b) Check power supply to firing circuits;
NOTE: Sometimes this protection may cut-in in case of an overcurrent event. In such a case follow the instructions
given at Over Curr.
137
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
MESSAGE ON KEYPAD
OR
PC INTERFACE
DESCRIPTION
CAUSE / ACTION
Mod Supply
Protection trip:
minimum modulator supply
The instantaneous value of the rectified voltage that supplies the modulator board has fallen below the safety
threshold value.
This rectified voltage is obtained from G1 power supply.
DPRAM Err
Dual Port error
Check microprocessor board
Vdc Min
INTVEC Pr
Protection trip:
minimum DC bus voltage detected by hardware.
The instantaneous value of the DC bus voltage has fallen below the threshold value. This protection is not necessary
for ATV inverter and must be disabled opening the JP19 jumper on the SCADA control board.
ALL CHECKS CONCERNING EQUIPMENT WIRING OR MOTOR WINDING (INSULATION) CONDITIONS MUST BE CARRIED OUT WITH NO
OVER CURRENT
The instantaneous value of the output current of one drive VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THE POWER CIRCUITS AND AFTER A WAITING TIME (10 MINUTES AT LEAST) TO ALLOW FOR DISCHARGE OF
phase module has exceeded the protection trip threshold. CAPACITOR BANKS
These precautions are necessary for the safety of operators.
OVER CURRENT:
OVER VOLTAGE
The instantaneous value of DC voltage has exceeded the - check that neither short circuit between motor phases nor phase fault to ground exists;
protection trip threshold
- check the wiring and the correct operation of the encoder and its mechanical coupling (FOC only).
- check that the acceleration ramp times are not too short;
CURRENT UNBALANCE
Protection trip occurs whenever an unbalance is detected - check the upper limits of torque reference and torque current.
among the phase currents of ATV bridges in parallel.
OVER VOLTAGE
A motor stop was initiated with too short deceleration time.
CURRENT UNBALANCE:
- check the wiring and the correct operation of the phase modules of all drive bridges, their IGBT firing cards and the
phase current transducers (TA LEM);
- check security of the bolts of the drive output bars
The temperature of one or more heat sinks has exceeded
the preset limit causing the related thermal switch to trip.
Overt Temp
138
All signals from such thermal switches are combined as
normally closed, with contacts series connected, and
monitored by the diagnostics of the control module as a
single switch.
Check the cooling system for correct operation.
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
MESSAGE ON KEYPAD
OR
PC INTERFACE
DESCRIPTION
CAUSE / ACTION
ALL CHECKS CONCERNING EQUIPMENT WIRING OR MOTOR WINDING (INSULATION) CONDITIONS MUST BE CARRIED OUT WITH NO
VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THE POWER CIRCUITS AND AFTER A WAITING TIME (10 MINUTES AT LEAST) TO ALLOW FOR DISCHARGE OF
CAPACITOR BANKS
ThyrComErr
Internal pre-charge system failure.
Check if the green LED D2 on the INTPREA board (control panel position …….) is on.
Check the fiber optics between the INTPREA board and the TCPSA/B boards on the rectifier bridges.
Problem on the modulator board sw bootstrap (MODVEC board, control panel position ….).
Change the modulator board.
Mod Conf
Modulator start-up error.
Prec Fail
Pre-charge fault
Over Spd
This protection is active in FOC and SLS operation modes The motor has exceeded the preset speed limit threshold.
only.
Check the value of the preset speed limit threshold.
The speed regulator is not correctly adjusted.
Confg Err
Incorrect parameter configuration.
Check the monitor parameter [78.05] Config error to understand what configuration error has occurred.
DSP Fail
Error at start of DSP program
Replace the microprocessor board.
Loss of communication network.
Check the status of the net Master: it must be active.
Check that the Microprocessor Board is correctly connected to the Profibus expansion board (Network Board or PLC
Interface Board). Also check the connection cable between the ATV and the net master for damage.
Check consistency between the profibus node setting, parameter [06.13] Profibus ID (for PROFIBUS network) or
parameter [06.14] Modbus ID (for MODBUS network) and the drive Network address sent by the net master.
Net Fail
Stall
Set speed not reached.
The difference (in %) between the speed reference and
actual motor speed exceeded the value set at parameter
[67.08] Motor stall max err for more seconds than set by
use of parameter [67.09] Motor stall max time.
Check the parameters related to the function for consistency.
Check the setting of torque and torque current limits.
Check the encoder for correct operation.
Load too high.
If the protection trip is wrong:
Fast Stop
Emergency stop.
- Check the setting of parameter [65.02] Fast/coast trip enbl (family [65.00] Fast-Coast config on the Protect Menu).
- Check the digital input on the terminal block
139
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
MESSAGE ON KEYPAD
OR
PC INTERFACE
DESCRIPTION
CAUSE / ACTION
The instantaneous value of the DC bus voltage has fallen below the threshold value set by 70% of :
UnderVolt
Minimum DC bus voltage sw checked.
DrivSzErr
Drive size not selected.
Gnd Flt
Drive size not selected.
Select the actual drive size.
ALL CHECKS CONCERNING EQUIPMENT WIRING OR MOTOR WINDING (INSULATION) CONDITIONS MUST BE CARRIED OUT WITH NO
VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THE POWER CIRCUITS AND AFTER A WAITING TIME (10 MINUTES AT LEAST) TO ALLOW FOR DISCHARGE OF
CAPACITOR BANKS
These precautions are necessary for the safety of operators.
An insulation loss occurred, either in the connection cables to the motor, or inside the motor windings.
This protection may trip only in case one output phase is connected to ground.
Protection against inverter overload.
The inverter operated in overload conditions for a time longer than the related preset value fixed by the inverter
overload class (parameter [06.08] Ovl Class Selection).
The motor speed is under a preset value for a time
greather than a preset time.
The motor is overloaded.
Check the acceleration ramp.
Check the parameters [67.10] Undspd flt setpoint (minimum speed fault setpoint) and [67.11] Undspd timeout
(maximum time under the minimum speed fault setpoint).
Mot ThPrt
Protection against motor overload.
The motor operated in overload conditions for a time longer than the related preset value (parameters [66.02]
Overload and [66.03] Overload timeout )..
Speed Dev
Motor speed different from the speed demand.
This protection trips if the motor steady state speed is different from the set reference.
The motor is overloaded.
DSP initialization error.
Check microprocessor board.
Curr Offs
Current offset.
Check current transducers.
RAM Error
RAM DSP error.
Check microprocessor board.
Inv ThPrt
UnderSpd Er
DSPFormErr
140
Ground fault.
The instantaneous value of the sum of the drive output
currents has exceeded the protection trip threshold.
[06.03] AC input voltage * 1.35.
Check the value of the DC bus voltages measured by the voltage transducers by checking the VDC parameters on
the user's display (in Monitor mode).
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
MESSAGE ON KEYPAD
OR
PC INTERFACE
DESCRIPTION
CAUSE / ACTION
SWF Error
Switching frequency not allowed.
Change the switching frequency parameter value (parameter [06.12] Switching Frequency, family [06.00] Drive data,
Drive Menu).
UnderLoad
Loss of load.
Check if Underload settings are correct for load motor shaft
Loss of speed reference.
Check external analog signal connections at microprocessor board terminals (e.g. disconnected wire), and analog
input configuration.
ALL CHECKS CONCERNING EQUIPMENT WIRING OR MOTOR WINDING (INSULATION) CONDITIONS MUST BE CARRIED OUT WITH NO
VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THE POWER CIRCUITS AND AFTER A WAITING TIME (10 MINUTES AT LEAST) TO ALLOW FOR DISCHARGE OF
Loss of one phase on motor.
CAPACITOR BANKS
SpdRfLs
OutPhasOut
These precautions are necessary for the safety of operators.
Check connection at drive and motor terminals and the motor cable.
FP Error
Floating Point Error.
Check microprocessor board.
Open Brake
Crane control: open brake fault.
The brake status, (Digital Input) selected by [30.06] DI - Brake Status and [30.07] Brake open status, remains closed
during the open procedure. Check parameter [30.09] Brake opening time in order to be sure to verify that mechanical
times needed for the brake opening are set correctly.
Close Brk
Crane control: close brake fault.
The brake status , (Digital Input), selected by [30.06] DI - Brake Status and [30.07] Brake open status, remains
opened during the close procedure. Check parameter [30.15] Brake closing time in order to be sure to verify that
mechanical times needed for the brake closing are set correctly.
Trq Prove
Crane control: Toque proving fail
Torque proving failed because the motor torque is not greater than the threshold set by [30.01] Torque proving thres.
It is possible to delay the torque proving test using the parameter [30.04] Trq prov fail time.
TrqTh High
Crane control: Torque proving threshold greater than
brake torque capability
The torque threshold is too high, causing motor rotation during torque proving.
There is a motor rotation when the brake is closed.
Brk & Run
Crane control: Unwanted brake close condition
The brake status (Digital Input) selected by [30.06] DI - Brake Status and [30.07] Brake open status, indicates that
the brake is closing when the motor is running.
It appears only if the parameter [30.12] Unwanted closed mode is set to “Fault”.
141
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
MESSAGE ON KEYPAD
OR
PC INTERFACE
AI User Fl
142
DESCRIPTION
CAUSE / ACTION
Analog Input NTC/PTC management
Check the temperature of thermistor connected to analog input
SWF CfgErr
Switching frequency configuration error
The switching frequency selected through the parameter [06.12] Switching Frequency is incompatible with the
MODVEC board switch setting.
Change the parameter setting or the MODVEC SW3 switch setting.
Cks MODErr
Corrupted message from modulator to control board.
Check the connection between the modulator board (MODVEC board) and the control board (SCADA board).
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
13.4. Monitor Variables
13.4.1. General
By means of monitor variables the user can monitor the most important variables of the drive in real time, through the PC or the keypad.
The monitor variables are grouped in the Meter Menu. The following families are included:
o
Mechanical [74.00]: includes the variables regarding speed and torque.
o
Electrical [75.00]: includes the variables regarding electrical quantities of the drive.
o
Demands/Feedback [76.00]: includes the variables regarding references or feedbacks (speed, torque, tension, etc.)
o
I/O Status [77.00]: includes the variables regarding Input / Output status (i.e. Digital I/O, DI/DO Expansion Board, Network Command Word, etc.)
o
Drive [78.00]: includes the overall information regarding the Drive Status (i.e.: protections, alarms, programming levels, etc.)
o
DI - Use [80.00]: includes the digital input configuration status.
o
Fast Variable Use [81.00]: visualization of variables updated at 1 ms. Refer to Appendix F for further information.
The complete set of monitor variables is shown in the table at
the end of the paragraph.
13.4.2. Selection of Variables via PC Interface
152
The monitor variables are
displayed at the bottom left
of the PC Interface window.
This figure shows the default
configuration:
It is possible to add or
remove monitor variables.
153
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
Removing a Monitor Variable
Right click on the variable name (e.g. “Config error”).
This window comes in view:
By clicking on “Clear” key the variable is deleted from
the Monitors. By clicking on “Cancel” key the operation
is aborted.
Adding a Monitor Variable
Right click over an empty
space of the monitor.
This window comes in
view:
The user can navigate inside the “Meter” Menu simply by double clicking with the left key of the mouse over the name displayed.
For example, if the user wants to see the monitor variable
“Power”, he/she has to do the following steps:
double click over “Electrical”; this causes the visualization
of this menu:
154
Double click over “Motor Power[kW]”. The variable is placed in the selected position in the “Monitors” window in real time, as shown here on the side:
Note: If the user starts this procedure by clicking over a taken space instead of a blank space, the new monitor variable replaces the old one.
13.4.3. Saving a Monitor Variable Configuration
Any change of Monitor Menu (i.e. adding or removing variables) is stored automatically into the Monitor.mon file. This file is contained in the directory c:\…\…\WzPlus\data. Whenever the PC Interface is
open, the last saved configuration of monitor variables is displayed. It is possible to save different Monitor configuration files.
155
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
Right click over the monitor
space.
This window will come in
view:
By clicking key “Save” the
display shows:
It is now possible to save the monitor configuration with the desired file name.
156
Whenever the PC Interface is reopened it is possible to click the “Open”
key and select the desired monitor
configuration file :
NOTE
Note: If the user wants to set the default configuration shown above automatically, he/she must delete the Monitor.mon file When the PC Interface is opened, a Monitor.mon file is created automatically and
the Monitor window shows the default configuration of the monitor variables.
See chapter 5 for the selection of monitor variables through the keypad.
157
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
13.4.4. List of Monitor Variables
Information about the overall monitor variables available is provided hereafter.
Param #
Name (HF/PC)
Value
Unit
Description
Control
V/Hz, Sls, FOC
7401
Motor speed [rpm]
rpm
Motor speed in rpm
7402
7403
7404
7405
7406
Motor speed [%]
Motor torque [Nm]
Motor torque [%]
Torque max [%]
Torque min [%]
%
Nm
%
%
%
Motor speed in % of the motor maximum speed
Motor torque in Nm
Motor torque in % of the motor maximum torque
Maximum torque limit in % of the maximum torque
Minimum torque limit in % of the maximum torque
V, S, F
V, S, F
S, F
S, F
S, F
S, F
7501
7502
7503
7504
7505
7506
7507
7508
7509
7510
7511
7512
7513
7514
7515
7516
7517
7518
Mtr current [A]
Mtr current [%]
Mtr voltage [V]
Mtr voltage [%]
VDC voltage [V]
VDC voltage [%]
Isd current [A]
Isd current [%]
Isq current [A]
Isq current [%]
Motor power [kW]
Motor power [hp]
Motor power [%]
Motor freq [Hz]
Motor freq [%]
Active current [A]
VDC #2 voltage [V]
Power factor
A
%
V
%
V
%
A
%
A
%
KW
hp
%
Hz
%
A
V
RMS motor current in ampere
RMS motor current in %
Motor voltage in volt
Motor voltage in %
Total DC bus voltage in volt
DC bus voltage in %
Direct motor current in ampere
Direct motor current in % of the maximum motor current
Quadrature motor current
Quadrature motor current in % of the maximum motor current
Motor power in kW
Motor power in hp
Motor power in % of the motor maximum power
Motor frequency in Hz
Motor frequency in %
Motor active current in ampere
Voltage on the DC bus #2 in volt
Motor power factor
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V
V, S, F
V, S, F
7601
Spd dmnd src
Speed reference source
Reference from Analog Input 1- AI1
Reference from serial network
Reference from Preset Speed (1,2,3,4)
Reference from Analog Input 2 - AI2
Reference from keypad
Reference from digital potentiometer
V, S, F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
158
Alphabetic
Selection
AI1 XM1-26 /14
Network
FixedSpd
AI2 XM1-28 /16
Keypad
MotorPot
Off
Param #
Name (HF/PC)
Value
7
8
9
10
7602
7603
7604
7605
7606
Spd dmnd UR[rpm]
Spd dmnd UR[%]
Spd dmnd DR[rpm]
Spd dmnd DR[%]
Aux ref src
Alphabetic
Selection
Self Comm
Ext PID
Hand mode
Jog
Unit
RPM
%
RPM
%
0
1
2
3
4
5
AI1 XM1-26 /14
Network
FixedSpd
AI2 XM1-28 /16
Keypad
Off
Description
Control
V/Hz, Sls, FOC
Reference from Self-commissioning function
Reference from PID regulator
Reference from manual mode
Reference from Jog function
Speed reference upstream ramp
Speed reference upstream ramp
Speed reference downstream ramp
Speed reference downstream ramp in %
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
Source selection of auxiliary speed reference
V, S, F
159
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
Param #
7607
Add spd ref src
7608
Spd limit 1 src
7609
7610
7611
7612
Spd limit 2 src
Torq demand [Nm]
Torq demand [%]
Torq dmnd src
7613
7614
7615
7616
7617
7618
Added torq [Nm]
Added torq [%]
Added torq src
Ext trq UL src
Ext trq LL src
PID ref src
7619
7620
160
Name (HF/PC)
PID fbk src
Tens ref src
7621
Tens fbk src
7622
7623
7624
Frq dmnd UR[Hz]
Frq dmnd DR[Hz]
Frq dmnd UR[%]
Value
Alphabetic
Unit
0
Off
1
Network
2
FixedSpd
3
AI1 XM1-26 /14
4
AI2 XM1-28 /16
0
Off
1
AI1 XM1-26 /14
2
AI2 XM1-28 /16
3
Network
See variable 7608
Source of additional speed reference
Enable and select external limit #1 for upstream ramp speed reference
Nm
%
0
1
2
3
Description
Off
AI1 XM1-26 /14
Network
AI2 XM1-28 /16
Nm
%
See variable 7612
See variable 7612
See variable 7612
0
AI1 XM1-26 /14
1
AI2 XM1-28 /16
2
FixedLvRef
3
Network
4
Off
0
AI2 XM1-28 /16
1
AI1 XM1-26 /14
2
Network
3
Off
0
ReferNet
1
AI2 XM1-28 /14
2
AI2 XM1-28 /16
3
Off
0
AI1 XM1-26 /14
1
AI2 XM1-28 /16
2
Off
Enable and select external limit #2 for upstream ramp speed reference
Torque reference in Nm
Torque reference in %
Select source for direct torque
command
Additional torque reference
Additional torque reference in %
Enable and select source for additional torque reference
Enable and select source for upper limit on torque reference
Enable and select source for lower limit on torque reference
Select source for PID regulator reference
Control
V/Hz, Sls, FOC
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
S, F
S, F
S, F
S, F
S, F
S, F
S, F
S, F
V, S, F
Source selection for PID regulator feedback
V, S, F
Source selection for tension
controller reference
Source selection for tension controller feedback
Hz
Hz
%
Frequency demand upstream ramp in Hz
Frequency demand downstream ramp in Hz
Frequency demand upstream ramp in %
S, F
S, F
V
V
V
Param #
Name (HF/PC)
7625
7626
Frq dmnd DR[%]
Enabled ramp
7701
DI1 XM1.13 ST
7703
7704
7705
7706
7707
7708
7709
7710
7711
7712
7713
7714
DI3 XM1.15
DI4 XM1.16
DI5 XM1.17
DI6 XM1.18
DI7 XM1.19
DI8 XM1.20 DE
DI9 XM1.21
DI10 XM1.22
Main cont
Net cmd wrd l
Net cmd wrd h
Anlg input 1
Value
Alphabetic
Unit
%
0
1
2
3
Ramp #1
Ramp #2
Ramp #3
Ramp #4
0
Off
1
On
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
Bin
Bin
%
Description
Frequency demand downstream ramp in %
Enabled ramp
Control
V/Hz, Sls, FOC
V
V, S, F
Status of digital input XM1.13 (Start / Stop command)
V, S, F
Status of digital input XM1.15
Status of digital input XM1.16
Status of digital input XM1.17
Status of digital input XM1.18
Status of digital input XM1.19
Status of digital input XM1.20 (drive enable)
Status of digital input XM1.21 (I/O configuration)
Status of digital input XM1.22 (I/O configuration)
Status of digital input (main contactor status)
Low byte of network command word
High byte of network command word
Analog input #1 value in %
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
161
13. Diagnostics, Protections and Troubleshooting
Param #
7715
7737
7738
7739
7740
7741
7742
7759
7760
7761
7762
Anlg input 2
RO1
RO2
RO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
AO1
AO2
AO3
AO4
7801
7802
# of HW flts
HW fault
7803
7804
162
Name (HF/PC)
# of SW flts
SW fault
Value
Alphabetic
Unit
%
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
See variable 7701
%
%
%
%
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Over Curr
Over Volt
Extrn Trp
Desaturat
Mod Supply
Reserved
Reserved
DPRAM Err
Reserved
Vdc Min
INTVEC Pr
Over Temp
ThyrComErr
Mod Conf
Reserved
Reserved
No Trips
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Prec Fail
Over Spd
Confg Err
DSP Fail
Net Fail
Inv ThPrt
Stall
Fast Stop
UnderVolt
Description
Analog input #2 value in %
Status of digital output RO1 fault
Status of digital outputRO2: configurable
Status of digital output RO3 configurable
Status of digital inputs/outputs DO4 configurable
Status of digital inputs/outputs DO5 configurable
Status of digital inputs/outputs DO6 configurable
Voltage on the analog output #1 (XM1-34) in %
Voltage on the analog output #2 (XM1-35) in %
Voltage on the analog output #3 (XM1-37) in %
Voltage on the analog output #4 (XM1-38) in %
Number of present hw faults
HW protection message
Control
V/Hz, Sls, FOC
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
Number of present sw faults
SW protection message
V, S, F
V, S, F
Param #
7805
Name (HF/PC)
Config error
Value
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Alphabetic
DrivSzErr
Gnd Flt
UndSpd Er
Mot ThPrtt
Speed Dev
InpPhasOut
DSPFormErr
Curr Offs
Ram Error
SWF Error
Underload
SpdRfLs
OutPhasOut
FP Error
Error!
Open Brake
Close Brk
Trq Prove
TrqTh High
Brk & Run
AI User Tr
SWF CfgErr
Cks MODErr
No Trips
No Error
DigInp Err
MotPar Err
PFB Brd Er
Not used
DupDI Func
DI&DO Err
INom<=Imag
INom>Imax
PlateError
Dup AI Use
SelCommErr
SpcFncErr
VInpAcErr
MDB Brd Er
DVN Brd Er
MDB SW Err
Cfg Tst CW
Aut-Alm Er
IPZD Dupl
Unit
Description
Control
V/Hz, Sls, FOC
Drive parameterization error code: wrong settings
Digital input already used as digital output
Motor parameters
Profibus
Same function on two or more different digital input
Digital input already used as digital output
Motors parameter
Motor parameters
Self-commissioning error
Multiple conf. for An.Inp.
Self-commissioning error
Application function configuration error
Error on parameter [06.03] AC input voltage
ModBus
Device Net
Modbus
Network communication
Network communication
Network communication
V, S, F
163
Param #
7806
7807
7809
7810
Param #
Name (HF/PC)
User trip monitor
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
No Trips
UsrTrip 1
UsrTrip 2
UsrTrip 3
UsrTrip 4
UsrTrip 5
UsrTrip 6
UsrTrip 7
UsrTrip 8
UsrTrip 9
UsrTrip 10
UsrTrip 11
UsrTrip 12
UsrTrip 13
UsrTrip 14
UsrTrip 15
UsrTrip 16
UsrTrip 17
UsrTrip 18
0
1
2
3
Disabled
Stopped
Wait trig
Active
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Spd High
Curr High
DipModEnb
ClsBrk Alm
IntEE Wbad
AI User Al
Reserved
Not used
Therm Hi
Speed Dev
Net Link
SpdRfLs
AnOvRng
Unit
Net comm stat
Cpu sw alarms
Value
Control
V/Hz, Sls, FOC
V, S, F
Hex
Name (HF/PC)
Description
Cause of the external trip
Trace trig stat
13
14
15
164
Alphabetic
Alphabetic
RideTh Alm
Reserved
IntEE Rbad
Trace trigger status
Trace disabled
Trace stored
Trace wait for trigger
Trace started
PROFIBUS status code
SW alarms message
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
Unit
Description
Control
V/Hz, Sls, FOC
V, S, F
Param #
7812
7814
7815
7816
7817
7818
Name (HF/PC)
Drive status
SW Release
Release Date
Src run disable
Prg Level
Drive Size
Value
16
0
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Alphabetic
Unit
No Alarms
Startup
Protection
PreCharge
Idle
ElcDelay
Run
Stopping
FastStop
TuneFlux
TuneIsd
FlyRestart
Jog
Fluxing
BusDroop
TuneSpeed
MainCDelay
LockRmpCur
LockRmpVlt
DC_Braking
Self_Comm
Idle
0
1
2
None
FSI open
FRI open
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Undefined
2K0 24
3K0 24
4K0 24
6K0 24
8K0 24
9K0 24
12K0 24
1K6 W 33
2K4 W 33
3K6 W 33
4K8 W 33
7K2 W 33
10K8 W 33
14K4 W 33
1K3 A 33
Description
Control
V/Hz, Sls, FOC
Drive status
V, S, F
ad
Code sw release
Date of SW Release
Drive run disable cause
Fast stop input open
Free run stop command open
Programming level
Drive size
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
165
Param #
Name (HF/PC)
Value
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
7840
7850
7851
166
SuprbSWRel
Date from RTC
Time from RTC
Alphabetic
Unit
Description
Control
V/Hz, Sls, FOC
1K8 A 33
2K6 A 33
3K6 A 33
5K2 A 33
7K8 A 33
10K4 A 33
LAB TN
Profibus expansion board sw release
Date from internal real time clock
Time from internal real time clock
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
8001
DI2 use
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Unused
ChgToAuxR
ChngRot
CngRmpRat1
FixSpd_1/2
Jog1
Jog2
Spd Lim 1
Spd Lim 2
ChgPrmSet
Prefluxing
Reset
Free stop
ChgCWandRf
Inc
Dec
Enab func
Enab LevC
UsrTrip 1
UsrTrip 2
UsrTrip 3
UsrTrip 4
UsrTrip 5
UsrTrip 6
UsrTrip 7
UsrTrip 8
UsrTrip 9
UsrTrip 10
UsrTrip 11
UsrTrip 12
UsrTrip 13
UsrTrip 14
UsrTrip 15
UsrTrip 16
UsrTrip 17
Fast stop
FixSpd_3/4
CngRmpRat2
Pulse_Stop
DC Brk Enb
PulseStart
HOA Hand
HOA Auto
Use of digital input XM1-14
V, S, F
167
8002
8003
8004
8005
8006
8007
8008
8025
8026
8027
8028
8029
8030
8031
8032
8033
8034
8035
8036
8037
8101
8102
8103
8104
8105
8106
8107
8108
DI3 use
DI4 use
DI5 use
DI6 use
DI7 use
DI9 use
DI10 use
Net cw-1 use
Net cw-4 use
Net cw-5 use
Net cw-6 use
Net cw-7 use
Net cw-8 use
Net cw-9 use
Net cw-10 use
Net cw-11 use
Net cw-12 use
Net cw-13 use
Net cw-14 use
Net cw-15 use
Fast Variable 1
Fast Variable 2
Fast Variable 3
Fast Variable 4
Fast Variable 5
Fast Variable 6
Fast Variable 7
Fast Variable 8
44
HOA SpdSe
45
Mask SW Trip
46
Brk Status
47
Revs_Start
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
See variable 8001
Variables whose refresh time can be shortened. See Appendix F.
168
Use of input XM1-15
Use of input XM1-16
Use of input XM1-17
Use of input XM1-18
Use of input XM1-19
Use of input XM1-21_IO
Use of input XM1-22_IO
Use of input CW-Bit 1
Use of input CW-Bit 4
Use of input CW-Bit 5
Use of input CW-Bit 6
Use of input CW-Bit 7
Use of input CW-Bit 8
Use of input CW-Bit 9
Use of input CW-Bit 10
Use of input CW-Bit 11
Use of input CW-Bit 12
Use of input CW-Bit 13
Use of input CW-Bit 14
Use of input CW-Bit 15
Fast Variable 1 *
Fast Variable 2 *
Fast Variable 3 *
Fast Variable 4 *
Fast Variable 5 *
Fast Variable 6 *
Fast Variable 7 *
Fast Variable 8 *
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
V, S, F
14. Appendix A: Programming Level 1 - Parameters
14.1. Introduction
•
•
•
•
•
Column 1 (Param #) identifies the parameter number (NOTE).
Column 2 (Name (AF/PC)) identifies the parameter name that is applicable with
keypad Advanced and with the PC Interface.
Column 3 (Name (BF)) identifies the parameter name that is applicable with
keypad Basic.
Column 4 (DEF) identifies the default value of the parameter.
Column 5 (Alphabetical Value) identifies the alphanumeric value of the variable.
(NOTE)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Column 6 (Alphabetical Selection) identifies the “word” description for the variable.
Column 7 (Prgm Range) identifies the ranges available for the parameter.
Column 8 (Units) identifies the unit of measure for the parameter.
Column 9 (Prgm Range from Network) identifies parameters that can be derived from the
Network.
Column 10 (Description) briefly describes the parameter.
Column 11 (Control) defines parameter availability with different controls FOC (F), SLS (S),
V/HZ (V)).
Param Parameters modifiable only with drive not running (motor at standstill)
CAUTION A dialog box comes in view if the user tries to modify these parameters while the drive is running
(*)
Parameters with default value depending on Drive Size (see appendix E)
Param Parameters always modifiable (Drive running or not running)
Param Parameter not downloadable
169
14.2. Parameters List
•
49.00 - AUTO MENU’ – QUICK-START-UP
Param #
Name (HF/PC)
Name (SF)
101
EU-NEMA Select
P01.01
102
Motor Control Mode
P0.102
Def
Literal val.
EU
0
1
Literal select
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range from Network
EU
NEMA
0
to
1
0
to
32767
V/Hz Ctrl
0
1
2
V/Hz Ctrl
SLs Ctrl
FOC Ctrl
0
to
2
0
to
32767
Description
Control F, S, V
Power unit of measure selection (Power in W and cosϕ for
EU, Power in Hp and η for NEMA)
F,S,V
Selection of the drive control mode
F, S,V
201(*)
202(*)
205(*)
206(*)
Motor Power EU
Motor Power NEMA
Motor Voltage
Mot Full Load Curr
P02.01
P02.02
P02.05
P02.06
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
0.1
0.1
0.1
1.0
to
to
to
to
3000.0
3000.0
1500.0
3000.0
kW
HP
V
A
1
1
1
1
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
Motor rated power
Motor rated power
Motor rated voltage
Motor rated current
F, S
F, S
F, S
F,S,V
208
209
210
211
217
218
Motor Frequency
Mot Full Load Speed
Motor Min Oper Freq
Motor Max Oper Freq
Motor Power Factor
Motor Efficiency
P02.08
P02.09
P02.10
P02.11
P02.17
P02.18
50
1500
0
60
0,85
0.90
0.01
1
0
5
0.0
0.0
to
to
to
to
to
to
200.00
6000
200.0
200.00
1.000
1.000
Hz
RPM
Hz
Hz
1
1
1
1
1
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Motor rated frequency
Motor rated speed
Minimum motor operating frequency
Maximum motor operating frequency
Motor power factor
Motor efficiency
F,S,V
F, S
F,S,V
F,S,V
F, S
F, S
405
603(*)
1110
V/Hz voltage boost
AC input voltage
Autotuning Select
P04.05
P06.03
P11.10
0.010
(*)
Tune Off
0.000
380
0
to
to
to
1.000
690
43
pu
V
0
0
0
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
V/Hz voltage boost
AC drive voltage supply
Enables speed controller tuning of self commissioning and
related menu
V
F,S,V
F, S
2212
2213
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
P22.12
P22.13
60.0
60.0
0.1
0.1
to
to
262.1
262.1
sec
sec
0
0
to
to
32767
32767
Ramp up time set #1
Ramp down time set #1
F,S,V
F,S,V
170
0
1
2
3
Tune Off
Self comm
Mot prm C
Stand Self
Example of QUICK-START-UP form
•
62.00 - LOGS CONTROLL – LOGGER MAINTENANCE
Param #
6201
Name (HF/PC)
Clr Fault/Allarm log
Name (SF)
P62.01
Def
Literal val.
Off
0
1
Literal select
On
Off
Prgm Range
0
to
Unit
1
Prgm Range from Network
0
to
32767
Description
Control F, S, V
Clear list of Fault and Allarm log list “59.00-Fault/alarm log”
F,S,V
171
15. Appendix B: Programming Levels 1 and 2 - Parameters
15.1. Introduction
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Column 1 (Param #) identifies the parameter number (NOTE).
Column 2 (Name (AF/PC)) identifies the parameter name that is applicable with Advanced keypad and PC.
Column 3 (Name (BF)) identifies the parameter name that is applicable with keypad Basic.
Column 4 (DEF) identifies the default value of the parameter.
Column 5 (Alphabetical Value) identifies the alphanumeric value for the variable.
Column 6 (Alphabetical Selection) identifies the “word” description for the variable.
Column 7 (Prgm Range) identifies the possible ranges available for the parameter.
Column 8 (Units) identifies the unit of measure for the parameter.
Column 9 (Prgm Range from Network) identifies parameters that can be derived from the Network.
Column 10 (Description) briefly describes the parameter.
Column 11 (Control) defines parameter availability with different controls (FOC (F), SLS (S), V/HZ
(V)).
Parameters can be modified only when the drive is not running (motor at standstill)
Param CAUTION A dialog box comes in view if the user tries to modify these parameters when the drive is running
NOTE
(*)
Parameters with default value depending on drive size (see appendix E )
(1)
Frequency upper limit is also due to the the nominal frequency of the motor
Param Parameters that can nbe modified always (driver running or not running)
Param Parameter not downloadable
The parameters available at programming level 1 are pointed out in bold face.
15.1.1. B.2. Parameters List
Param #
101
102
103
201(*)
202(*)
205(*)
206(*)
208
209
210
211
217
218
219
405
406
172
Name (AF/PC)
EU-NEMA Select
Motor Control Mode
Name (BF)
P01.01
P01.02
Literal Value
EU
0
1
EU
NEMA
0
0
1
2
V/Hz Ctrl
0
to
2
0
to 32767
Selection of the drive control mode
F, S,V
0
to
1
0
to 32767
Macro to load user default
F, S,V
0.1
0.1
0.1
1.0
0.01
1
0
5.00
0
0
50
0.000
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
3000.0
3000.0
1500.0
3000.0
200.00
6000
200.00
200.00
1.000
1.000
100
1.000
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
Motor rated power
Motor rated power
Motor rated voltage
Motor rated current
Motor rated frequency
Motor rated speed
Minimum motor operating frequency
Maximum motor operating frequency
Motor power factor
Motor efficiency
Energy Saver Minimum Flux allowed: 100% =rated flux
V/Hz voltage boost
V/Hz frequency boost
F, S
F, S
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F, S
F,S,V
F,S,V
F, S
F, S
F,S
V
V
V/Hz Ctrl
Reset All
P01.03
Off
Motor Power EU
Motor Power NEMA
Motor Voltage
Mot Full Load Curr
Motor Frequency
Mot Full Load Speed
Motor Min Oper Freq
Motor Max Oper Freq
Motor Power Factor
Motor Efficiency
NRG Saver Min Flux
V/Hz voltage boost
Boost shutoff freq
P02.01
P02.02
P02.05
P02.06
P02.08
P02.09
P02.10
P02.11
P02.17
P02.18
P02.19
P04.05
P04.06
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
50
1500
0
60
0,85
0.90
100
0.010
6
0
1
Literal select.
Prgm Range
to
Unit
1
Prgm Range fron Network
0
Description
Control
Def
to 32767
F,S,V
Power unit of measure selection
SLs Ctrl
FOC Ctrl
Off
On
kW
HP
V
A
Hz
RPM
Hz
Hz
%
pu
Hz
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Param #
Name (AF/PC)
Name (BF)
Def
603(*)
801
AC input voltage
RO2 – XM1.1/2 or
RO2 – XM1.1/2/43
P06.03
P08.01
(*)
Running
802
803
RO3 – XM1.45/46
DO4 –XM1.21/25
P08.02
P08.03
Prech Ok
AUT/MAN
Literal Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
13
9
Literal select.
Prgm Range
380
0
to
to
Unit
690
45
Disable
Ready
Running
ZeroSpd
SetPoint1G
SetPoint2G
SetPoint1L
SetPoint2L
Reset
AUT/MAN
SpdControl
SpdNotZero
SatSpdReg
Prech Ok
Net Ref
TermBlkRef
Alarm
SpdReached
FluxNoSat
SpdDeviat
Start Prec
DrvEnStat
NetLnkOk
SpdRefLost
FromNet
AutoByPass
MotTHAlarm
MotTHFault
Brake Cmd
OpBrk Fail
ClBrk Fail
TqProvFail
TqProvHigh
Brk & Run
ClBrk Alm
Over SW Trip
Ai User Al
Ai User Tr
Drv Fault
Foreward
Backward
SetP1Gsign
SetP2Gsign
SetP1Lsign
SetP2Lsign
Auto Reset
See Param 801 without item 45 (Auto Reset)
See Param 802
V
Prgm Range fron Network
0
0
to 32767
to 32767
Description
Control
AC inverter voltage supply
Function selection for digital output #1 Microprocessor Base or Plus (output available
also as input)
F,S,V
F,S,V
Function selection for digital output #5 Mic.Plus (relay output)
Function selection for output #2 (output available also as input)
F,S,V
F,S,V
173
Param #
Def
Literal Value
Literal select.
901
AI1 XM1-26/27 Use
Name (AF/PC)
P09.01
Name (BF)
Spd demand
902
Al1 Volt or mA
P09.02
Volt
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
0
1
2
Unused
Spd demand
Frq demand
AuxSpd Dem
AuxFrq Dem
AddSpd Dem
AddFrq Dem
LimSpd D1
LimFrq D1
LimSpd D2
LimFrq D2
Trq demand
AddTrq Dem
Torque UL
Torque LL
ExtPID Dem
ExtPID Fbk
Tens Dem
Tens Fbk
AI Us Trip
Volt
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
904
905
906
907
910
AI1 Setpoint #1 Val
AI1 Setpoint #2 (%)
AI1 Setpoint #2 Val
AI1 Setpoint #2 Val
AI2 XM1-28/29
P09.04
P09.05
P09.06
P09.07
P09.10
0
100
26214
5
AuxSpd Dem
911
Al1 Volt or mA
P09.11
Volt
913
914
AI2 Setpoint #1 (%)
P09.13
P09.14
0
0
P09.15
P09.16
P10.01
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range fron Network
19
0
0
to
2
0
-32767
-1000
-32767
-32767
to
to
to
to
32767
1000
32767
32767
0
to
2
-100.0
-32767
to
to
100.0
32767
%
-32767
-32767
to 32767 X coordinate AI2 first point characteristic
to 32767 Y coordinate AI2 first point characteristic
F,S,V
F,S,V
100
5
3
-100.0
-32767
0
to
to
to
100.0
32767
225
%
-32767
-32767
0
to 32767 X coordinate AI2 second point characteristic
to 32767 Y coordinate AI2 second point characteristic
to 32767 Variable selection for analog output #1
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
-32767
-32767
-32767
-32767
to
Volt
0-20 mA
4-20 mA

0
32767 Analog input 1 voltage or current setting (0-20 mA, 4-20 mA)
to 32767
to 32767
to 32767
to 32767
See Param 901
0
1
2
to
Read-only monitor variable, analog input #1
Control
to
%
to 32767
Description
0
Y coordinate AI1 first point characteristic
X coordinate AI1 second point characteristic
Y coordinate AI1 second point characteristic
Coordinata y del secondo punto della caratteristica lineare AI1
Monitor read-only variable of analog input #2
32767 Analog input 2 voltage or current setting (0-20 mA, 4-20 mA)
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
P10.06
7
0
to
225
0
to 32767 Variable selection for analog output #2
F,S,V
1011
1016
1101
AI2 Setpoint #1 Val
AI2 Setpoint #2 (%)
AI2 Setpoint #2 Val
AO1 - XM1.33 or
AO1 - XM1.34
AO2 - XM1.34 or
AO2 - XM1.35
AO3 - XM1.37
AO4 - XM1.38
Critical Speed En
P10.11
P10.16
P11.01
4
0
Disabled
0
0
0
to
to
to
225
225
1
0
0
0
to 32767 Variable selection for analog output #3
to 32767 Variable selection for analog output #4
to 32767 Enable critical speed skip and related menu
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
1102
Curr Rollback En
P11.02
Enabled
0
to
1
0
to 32767 Enable lock speed ramp for current limit and related menu, only for V/Hz.
1103
VDC Rollback En
P11.03
Enabled
0
to
1
1104
Flying Restart En
P11.04
Disabled
0
to
1
915
916
1001
1006
174
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enable lock speed ramp for DC voltage limit and related menu.
0
to 32767 Enable flying restart and related menu.
V
F,S,V
S,V
Param #
1106
1107
Name (AF/PC)
Def
Literal Value
P11.06
Name (BF)
Disabled
P11.07
Disabled
P11.10
Tune Off
P11.14
Disabled
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Motor pot enable
1110
VDC Undervolt En
Autotuning Select
1114
1115
Free Run Stop
HOA/Pulsed StartStop
P11.15
Auto_Edge
Literal select.
Disabled
Enabled
Disable
Rd Through
Tune Off
Self comm
Mot prm C
Disable
Enable
Auto_Edge
Auto_Level
Keypad
Pot
Select
PSS
PSS_Keypad
PSS_Pot
PSS_Select
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range fron Network
Description
Control
0
to
1
0
to 32767 Enable digital potentiometer
F,S,V
0
to
3
0
to 32767 Enable bus drop function
F,S,V
0
to
3
0
to 32767 Autotunig procedure select
F, S
0
to
1
0
to 32767 Stop free run
F,S,V
0
to
8
0
to 8
F,S,V
HOA or Pulsed Start Stop function enabvle
175
Param #
Name (AF/PC)
Def
Literal Value
1116
AutoReset&Start Enb
P11.16
Name (BF)
Disabled
1117
Auto On/ Off Enable
P11.17
Disabilitato
1118
Input Single Phasing
P11.18
Disabilitato
1120
External PID
P11.20
Disabled
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Power Red
Protection
Disable
Enable
1721
2201
Input Phasing Trq Red
Speed Ref Source Sel
P17.21
P22.01
50
MotorPot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
AI1 XM1-26
Network
FixedSpd
AI2 XM1-28
Keypad
MotorPot
Off
AI1 XM1-26
Network
FixedSpd
AI2 XM1-28
Keypad
Off
See appendix D
See appendix D
2202
Aux Ref Source Sel
P22.02
Network
2203
2204
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
DI - Aux Ref En Sel
DI - Reverse En Sel
Rev Ref Speed Limit
Fwd Ref Speed Limit
Rev Ref Freq Limit
Fwd Ref Freq Limit
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Accel multiplier
P22.03
P22.04
P22.08
P22.09
P22.10
P22.11
P22.12
P22.13
P22.14
Net CW-B10
Unused
-200
200
-200.0
200.0
60.0
60.0
Off
2215
Decel multiplier
P22.15
Off
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Accel Time 3
Decel Time 3
Accel Time 4
Decel Time 4
Jerk rate time
DI-Chg rmp rate sel1
DI-Chg rmp rate sel2
Ramp enable
P22.16
P22.17
P22.18
P22.19
P22.20
P22.21
P22.22
P22.23
P22.25
P22.25
120.0
120.0
120.0
120.0
120.0
120.0
0.0
Unused
Unused
Ramp ON
2226
2227
2228
Preset speed 1
Preset speed 2
Preset speed 3
P22.26
P22.27
P22.28
15
30
40
176
0
1
2
0
1
2
Literal select.
Off
*10
*25
Off
*10
*25
See appendix D
0
1
Ramp OFF
Ramp ON
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range fron Network
Description
Control
0
to
1
0
to 32767
Autoreset of protection and restart
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to 32767
Auto On/ Off function enable
F,S,V
0
to
2
0
to 32767
Input Single Phasing enable
F,S
0
to
1
0
to 32767
Enable PID
F,S,V
0
0
to
to
50
6
0
0
to 32767
to 32767
Torque limit reduction with input phasing
Source selection for main speed reference
F,S
F,S,V
0
to
5
0
to 32767
Source selection for auxiliary speed reference
F,S,V
0
0
-6000
0
-2000
0
0.1
0.1
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
20
20
0
6000
0
2000
262.1
262.1
2
0
0
-32767
0
-32767
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
Digital input selection to enable the auxiliary speed demand
Digital input selection to enable change rotation sense
Minimum allowed speed reverse demand
Maximum allowed speed foward demand
Minimum allowed frequency reverse demand
Maximum allowed frequency foward demand
Ramp up time set #1
Ramp down time set #1
Gain on acceleration ramp time
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S
F,S
V
V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
262.1
262.1
262.1
262.1
262.1
262.1
262.1
20
20
1
-2000
-2000
-2000
to
to
to
2000
2000
2000
%
RPM
RPM
Hz
Hz
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
Hz
Hz
Hz
32767
32767
0
32767
0
32767
32767
32767
32767
0
to 32767
Gain on deceleration ramp time
F,S,V
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
Ramp up time set #2
Ramp down time set #2
Ramp up time set #3
Ramp down time set #3
Ramp up time set #4
Ramp down time set #4
Acceleration/deceleration time
Digital input selection to enable change ramp rate
Digital input selection to enable change ramp rate
Disable ramps
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Fixed speed reference #1
Fixed speed reference #2
Fixed speed reference #3
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
-32767
-32767
-32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
to 32767
to 32767
to 32767
Param #
Name (AF/PC)
Name (BF)
Def
2229
2230
2231
2241
Preset speed 4
DI-Fix speed Sel 1
DI-Fix speed Sel 2
Change Ramp Mode
P22.29
P22.23
P22.23
P22.41
50
Unused
Unused
Dig Input
2242
Speed Threshold 1
P22.42
2243
Speed Threshold 2
2244
Literal Value
Literal select.
Prgm Range
Unit
to
to
to
to
2000
20
20
1
33.00
0
to
100.00
P22.43
66.00
0
to
100.00
Speed Threshold 3
P22.44
98.99
0
to
100.00
2245
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2601
2602
2603
2604
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
Speed Histeresis
DI - Pulse Stop
DI - Pulse Start
DI - Hand
DI - Auto
DI - HOA Speed sel
Auto off threshold
Auto on threshold
Delay off
Delay on
PID Prop Gain
PID Integral Gain
PID Der Gain
PID Upper Limit
PID Lower Limit
Threshold Upper
Threshold Lower
PID Fixed Ref
Pump Type Select
P22.45
P25.01
P25.02
P25.03
P25.04
P25.05
P26.01
P26.02
P26.03
P26.04
P27.01
P27.02
P27.03
P27.04
P27.05
P27.06
P27.07
P27.08
P27.09
3.00
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
0.0
1.0
0.50
0.50
0.500
0.200
0
1.00
0
80.0
60.0
0
Lift
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
0.25
0.25
0
0
0
0
-1.25
0
0
-100
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
100.00
20
20
20
20
20
100.0
100.0
100.00
100.00
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.25
0
100.0
100.0
100
1
2710
PID Ref Source Sel
P27.10
Off
0
to
4
0
2711
PID Feedback Src Sel
P27.11
Off
0
to
3
2712
PID Mode Sel
P27.12
Continuous
0
to
2713
2714
DI - PID Enable
Motor pause func.
P27.13
P27.14
Unused
Disabled
0
0
Curr Limit for Pause
Time Limit for Pause
Critical Speed 1
Critical speed1 Band
Critical Speed 2
P27.15
P27.16
P33.01
P33.02
P33.03
40.0
10
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
0
2715
2716
3301(1)
3302(1)
3303(1)
See App D
0
1
Dig Input
Speed Thr
See App D
0
Lift
1
Force
0
XM1-26
1
XM1-28
2
FixedLvRef
3
Network
Off
4
0
XM1-28
1
XM1-26
2
Network
Off
3
0
Continuous
1
On/Off
2
Both
See appendix A4
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
Hz
Prgm Range fron Network
-2000
0
0
0
-32767
0
0
0
Control
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
This value indicates at which value happened change acceleration ramp (from 1 to
2)
This value indicates at which value happened change acceleration ramp (from 2 to
3)
This value indicates at which value happened change acceleration ramp (from 3 to
4)
Histeresis applied among varius transition between consecutive ramps
Digital input selection for stop pulsed cmd
Digital input selection for start pulsed cmd
Digital input selection for Hand cmd
Digital input selection for Auto cmd
Digital input selection for Speed demand whith HOA function activated
Speed demand threshold to stop the drive
Speed demand threshold to start the drive
Delay on the automatic stop
Delay on the automatic start
External PID proportional gain
External PID integral gain
External PID derivative gain
External PID upper limit
External PID lower limit
Upper threshold for on-off mode
Lower threshold for on-off mode
External PID fixed reference
Pump type
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
to 32767
Source selection for External PID reference
F,S,V
0
to 32767
Source selection for External PID feedback
F,S,V
2
0
to 32767
External PID mode selection
F,S,V
to
to
20
1
0
0
to 32767
to 32767
Digital input selection to enable External PID
Motor pause function disable/enable in External PID
F,S,V
F,S,V
to
to
to
to
to
95,0
300
200
200
200
to
to
to
to
to
Current limit to pause the motor action
Time with current under [27.15] or speed under [02.10] to start motor pause
Critical frequency #1
Critical frequency band #1
Critical frequency #2
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
%
%
%
%
%
Sec
Sec
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
%
%
%
%
sec
Hz
Hz
Hz
0
to 26214
0
to 26214
0
to 26214
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-32767
0
0
-32767
0
0
0
0
0
0
32767
32767
32767
32767
Description
Fixed speed reference #4
Digital input selection to enable the fixed speed demand
Digital input selection to enable the fixed speed demand
Change Ramp mode or speed threshold
%
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
26214
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
0
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
F,S,V
F,S,V
177
Param #
3304(1)
3305(1)
3306(1)
3401
3501
3504
3601
3602
3603
3604
Name (AF/PC)
Name (BF)
Def
Critical speed2 Band
Critical Speed 3
Critical speed3 Band
Current Threshold
VDC Threshold
VDC Upper Limit
Start Speed
Magn Current FR
Min Freq FR
Scan Range
P33.04
P33.05
P33.06
P34.01
P35.01
P35.04
P36.01
P36.02
P36.03
P36.04
0.0
0.0
0.0
100.0
0
0
0
30
0
Pos & Neg
3605
3611
3612
3613
3614
3615
4001
4002
4003
4004
Scan step size
Isd forced peak val
Isd forced reference
Oscillation amplit
Flying restart time
% time peak current
Speed step increment
Speed step decrement
Rmp start delay time
Speed reverse enable
P36.05
P36.11
P36.12
P36.13
P36.15
P36.16
P40.01
P40.02
P40.03
P40.04
10
100
80
50
2.0
30
1.00
1.00
2.0
MtpRev off
4005
4006
4007
4701
4702
6901
4709
4710
6201
DI- Increment source
DI- Decrement source
DI - Memory source
VDC to shutoff
Restart delay
UV-Vdc Set Point
Vdc Reference offset
Min Rd throught time
Clr Fault/Alarm log
P40.05
P40.06
P40.07
P47.01
P47.02
P69.01
P47.09
P47.10
P62.01
Net CW-B 8
Net CW-B 9
Net CW-B11
80
10.0
70
0
0.1
Off
6601
Trip/alarm mode sel
P66.01
ImTrmTrip
6602
6603
6604
Overload
Overload timeout
Speed OverLoad
P66.02
P66.03
P66.04
110
60
Disable
6803
Signal loss alm enbl
P68.03
AlarmOff
6924
6925
7001
7002
7003
7004
Under Load Limit
Under Load Time
Auto Reset Time
Auto Reset Attempt
Auto Memory Time
Reset Desaturation
P69.24
P69.25
P70.01
P70.02
P70.03
P70.04
0.0
0
20
5
20
Disable
7005
Reset IOC
P70.05
Disable
178
Literal Value
0
1
0
1
0-20
0-20
0-20
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Literal select.
Pos & Neg
Only Pos
MtpRev off
MtpRev on
See appendix D
See appendix D
See appendix D
Off
On
ImTrmAlarm
ImTrmTrip
Disable
Enable
AlarmOff
AlarmOn
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range fron Network
Description
Control
0
0
0
0.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
200
200
200
125.0
50
1000
1000
1000
10000
1
Hz
Hz
Hz
%
V
%
%
%
Hz
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
26214
32767
Critical frequency band #2
Critical frequency #3
Critical frequency band #3
Current threshold for acceleration ramp lock and current limit controller set point
Threshold voltage adjusting for activating the VDC Rollback function
DC voltage limit controller upper limit
Flying restart start speed
Magnetizing current for flying restart
Minimum frequency for flying restart
Search direction for flying restart
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
V
F,S,V
V
V
V
V
V
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
300
250
250
100
1000
100.00
100.00
100.00
10.0
1
%
%
%
%
sec
%
%
%
sec
%
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
250
250
100
10000
100
26214
26214
32767
32767
Step change frequency for flying restart
Isd forced peak value
Isd forced reference
Oscillations amplitude
Flying restart time
% time for peak current
Speed reference increment step amplitude
Speed reference decrement step amplitude
Time to ramp change on reference
Enabling reverse digital potentiometer
V
S
S
S
S
S
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
75
0
70
-10
0.1
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
85
200
80
20
3.0
1
0
to
1
75
1
0
to
to
to
350
18000
1
0
to
1
0.0
0
1
1
1
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
100.0
300
120
128
540
1
0
to
1
%
sec
%
%
sec
%
sec
%
sec
sec
min
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Digital input selection for up command
Digital input selection for down command
Digital input selection to store last reference
DC voltage level to remove firing pulses
Time delay to apply the firing pulses after the DC volt reset.
DC bus undervoltage: protection setpoint
Offset on reference of DC voltage regulator
Minimum activation time delay of ride throught
Clear Fault/Alrm Log (Fault/Alarm Log [59.00] )
0
to
32767
Action of thermal image protection
F,S,V
0
0
0
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
Motor overload for thermal image protection
Motor overload time
Overload proportional to the speed
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
32767
Loss of analog speed demand enabling
F,S,V
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Under Load limit
Time-out on Under Load limit
Auto Reset Time
Auto Reset Attempt
Reset Memory Time
Enables/disables the auto reset feature for OOS trips
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
32767
Enables/disables the auto reset feature for IOC trips
F,S,V
Param #
Def
Literal Value
7006
Reset Overvoltage
Name (AF/PC)
P70.06
Name (BF)
Disable
7007
Reset Undervolt SW
P70.07
Disable
7008
Reset Therm. Ovld
P70.08
Disable
7009
Reset Undervolt HW
P70.09
Disable
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Literal select.
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range fron Network
Description
Control
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enables/disables the auto reset feature for Overvoltage trips
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enables/disables the auto reset feature for Undervolt SW trips
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enables/disables the auto reset feature for Overload trips
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enables/disables the auto reset feature for Undervolt HW trips
F,S,V
179
16. Appendix C: Programming Level 1, 2 and 3 - Parameters
16.1. Introduction
• Column 7 (Prgm Range) identifies the possible ranges available for the parameter.
• Column 8 (Unit) defines the available unit of measurement for the parameter.
• Column 9 (Prgm Range from Network) identifies those parameters that can be derived from the Network.
• Column 10 (Description) briefly describes the parameter.
• Column 11 (Control) defines the applicable controls FOC (F) , SLS (S), VH/Z (V) available for the
parameter.
• Column 12 (Functions) defines the parameters with macro function is enabled to controls
Column 1 (Param #) identifies the parameter number (NOTE).
Column 2 (Name (HF/PC) identifies the parameter name applicable with the high-feature (HF) keypad/PC.
Column 3 (Name (SF) identifies the parameter name applicable with the standard-feature (SF) keypad.
Column 4 (DEF) identifies the default unit of measure for the parameter.
Column 5 (Literal Value) identifies the literal numeric value for the variable.
Column 6 (Literal Selection) identifies the “word” description for the variable.
NOTE
Param Parameters modifiable only with drive not running (motor at standstill)
CAUTION A dialog box comes in view if the user tries to modify these parameters while the drive is running
(*)
Parameters with default value depending on Drive Size (see appendix E )
Param Parameter not downloadable
Parameters always modifiable (Drive running or not running)
16.1.1. Parameters List
Def
Literal val.
EU-NEMA Select
P01.01
EU
102
Motor Control Mode
P01.02
V/Hz Ctrl
103
Reset All
P01.03
Off
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
Parameter Security
Motor Power EU
Motor Power NEMA
Motor Power EU
Motor Power NEMA
Motor Voltage
Mot Full Load Curr
Motor NoLoad current
Motor Frequency
Mot Full Load Speed
Motor Min Oper Freq
Motor Max Oper Freq
Motor Overload Lim
Encoder pulse #
Set Zero Frequency
Set Zero Freq Band
Mtr Base Spd Offset
Motor Power Factor
Motor Efficiency
NRG Saver Min Flux
P01.05
P02.01
P02.02
P0.203
P02.04
P02.05
P02.06
P02.07
P02.08
P02.09
P02.10
P02.11
P02.12
P02.13
P02.14
P02.15
P02.16
P02.17
P02.18
P02.19
0
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
1
105
201(*)
202(*)
203(*)
204(*)
205(*)
206(*)
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
180
Name (HF/PC)
1500
0
110
1024
1.3
0.1
0
0,85
0.95
100
Literal select
EU
NEMA
V/Hz Ctrl
SLs Ctrl
FOC Ctrl
Off
On
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range from Network
Description
Control F, S, V
Function
0
to
1
0
to
32767 Power unit measurement selection
F,S,V
0
to
2
0
to
32767 Selection the control mode to the drive
F, S,V
to
1
to
32767 Macro to load user default
F, S,V
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
3000.0
3000.0
3000.0
3000.0
1500.0
3000.0
3000.0
200.00
6000
200.0
200.00
350
8191
180.0
20.0
0
1.000
1.000
100
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
6000
3000
32767
32767
32767
32767
F, S,V
F, S
F, S
V
V
F, S
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F, S
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S
F, S
F, S
F,S
0
-32767
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
1.0
1.0
0.01
1
0.0
5
100
512
0.2
0.0
-1500
0
0
50
0
kW
HP
kW
HP
V
TO
TO
Hz
RPM
Hz
Hz
%
Pls
Hz
Hz
RPM
%
-32767
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
Lock Code to avoid parameters modification
Motor rated power
Motor rated power
Motor rated power
Motor rated power
Motor rated voltage
Motor rated current
Motor magnetizing current
Motor rated frequency
Motor rated speed
Minimum motor operating frequency
Maximum motor operating frequency
Motor overload
Encoder pulse number
Zero frequency value
Zero frequency histeresis
Speed to start motor defluxing
Motor power factor
Motor efficiency
Energy Saver Minimum Flux allowed: 100% means rated flux
Main Settings
Name (SF)
101
Motor Data
Param #
100E-2
100E-2
100E-2
100E-2
100E-2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.3
1.0
50
1
0.667
0.333
Fdbk = Ref
V/Hz voltage boost
Boost shutoff freq
AC input voltage
Encoder Dig Filt En
P04.05
P04.06
P06.03
P06.06
0.010
5
(*)
Disabled
608
VT CT Select
P06.08
VT-Class 1
610
Command TB/Net Sel
P06.10
Term Block
611
612
Drive Address Select
Swithing Frequency
P06.11
P06.12
3
1 kHz
613
614
616
Profibus ID
Modbus ID
11/10 bit ansi data
P06.13
P06.14
P06.16
3
1
11 bit
Literal val.
0
1
2
Literal select
Fdbk = Ref
Encoder
AnalogIn1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Disabled
Enabled
VT-Class 1
VT-Class 2
Term Block
Network
0
1
2
1000 Hz
780 kHz
500 kHz
0
1
11 bit
10 bit
Prgm Range
Unit
1
1
1
1
1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
-100
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
999
999
999
999
999
1500.0
3000.0
1500.0
3000.0
1500.0
3000.0
1500.0
3000.0
1500.0
3000.0
100.0
100.0
500
1.000
1.000
1.000
2
Ohm
Ohm
H
H
H
V
A
V
A
V
A
V
A
V
A
Hz
Hz
%
pu
pu
pu
0.000
0
380
0
to
to
to
to
1.000
10
4000
1
pu
Hz
V
0
to
0
Prgm Range from Network
Description
Control F, S, V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Rotor resistance (stator side)
Stator resistance
Rotor leakage inductance (stator side)
Stator leakage inductance
Magnetizing inductance
Magnetizing curve
Magnetizing curve
Magnetizing curve
Magnetizing curve
Magnetizing curve
Magnetizing curve
Magnetizing curve
Magnetizing curve
Magnetizing curve
Magnetizing curve
Cut-off filter flux observer
Cut-off filter flux observer for flying restart
Rs gain for flying restart
Voltage gain to change V/Hz characteristic
Voltage at 2/3 of V/Hz characteristics
Voltage at 1/3 of V/Hz characteristics
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
S
S
S
V
V
V
Speed feedback selection
V
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
V/Hz voltage boost
V/Hz frequency boost
AC inverter voltage supply
V
V
F,S,V
Enabling digital filter on encoder signal
F,S,V
1
0
to
32767
Inverter overload class
(Class 1 = 110%, Class 2 = 150%)
F,S,V
to
1
0
to
32767
Command source selection
F,S,V
1
0
to
to
99
2
1
0
to
to
99
32767
Select slave station number
Switching Frequency selection
F,S,V
F,S,V
3
1
0
to
to
to
125
247
1
1
1
0
to
to
to
125
247
32767
Select PROFIBUS slave station number
Select MODBUS slave station number
F,S,V
F,S,V
11/10 ANSI Data length
F,S,V
Function
Motor Parameters For Flying Restart Sls
Def
P03.01
P03.02
P03.03
P03.04
P03.05
P03.06
P03.07
P03.08
P03.09
P03.10
P03.11
P03.12
P03.13
P03.14
P03.15
P03.16
P03.17
P03.18
P04.01
P04.02
P04.03
P04.04
405
406
603(*)
606
Name (HF/PC)
V/HZ Charac.
Name (SF)
Rotor Resistance
Stator Resistance
Rotor Leakage Induct
Stat Leakage Induct
Magnetizing Induct
Set Mag Curve V1
Set Mag Curve I1
Set Mag Curve V2
Set Mag Curve I2
Set Mag Curve V3
Set Mag Curve I3
Set Mag Curve V4
Set Mag Curve I4
Set Mag Curve V5
Set Mag Curve I5
Flux Obs Flt Freq
FR Flux Obs Flt Freq
Stator Res Gain FR
V/Hz Ratio
V/Hz Ratio 2/3 Point
V/Hz Ratio 1/3 Point
Speed Fdbck Select
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
401
402
403
404
Drive Data
Param #
181
Name (SF)
Def
801
RO2 – XM1.1/2/43
P08.01
Running
802
RO3 - XM1.45/46
P08.02
Prech Ok
803
804
805
806
807
DO4 - XM1.21/25
DO5 - XM1.22/25
DO5 - XM1.23/25
Comp 1 Variable
Comp 1 Threshold
182
Name (HF/PC)
P08.03
P08.04
P08.05
P08.06
P08.07
AUT/MAN
Disable
Disable
0
10
Literal val.
Literal select
0
Disable
1
Ready
2
Running
3
ZeroSpd
4
SetPoint1G
5
SetPoint2G
6
SetPoint1L
7
SetPoint2L
8
Reset
9
AUT/MAN
10
SpdControl
11
SpdNotZero
12
SatSpdReg
13
Prech Ok
14
Net Ref
15
TermBlkRef
16
Alarm
17
SpdReached
18
FluxNoSat
19
SpdDeviat
20
Start Prec
21
DrvEnStat
22
NetLnkOk
23
SpdRefLost
24
FromNet
25
AutoByPass
26
MotTHAlarm
27
MotTHFault
28
Brake Cmd
29
OpBrk Fail
30
ClBrk Fail
31
TqProvFail
32
TqProvHigh
33
Brk & Run
34
ClBrk Alm
35
Over SW Trip
36
Ai User Al
37
Ai User Tr
38
Drv Fault
39
Foreward
40
Backward
41
SetP1Gsign
42
SetP2Gsign
43
SetP1Lsign
44
SetP2Lsign
45
Auto Reset
See Param 801 without item 45
(Auto Reset)
9
0
0
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range from Network
0
to
45
0
to
32767
0
to
38
0
to
32767
Description
Control F, S, V
Function selection for digital output #2 (relè)
F,S,V
Function selection for digital output #5
F,S,V
Function selection for digital output #3 (rele)
Function selection for output #4 (output available also as input)
Function selection for digital output #6
Selection of analog variable for threshold commutation of a digital output
Commutation threshold for set point 1
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Function
Digital Outputs
Param #
0
-100.0
to
to
See Param 802
See Param 802
See Param 802
75
AVN
0
100.0
%
-32767
to
to
32767
32767
Def
Comp 1 Hysterisis
Comp 2 Variable
Comp 2 Threshold
Comp 2 Hysterisis
Auto bypass status
Name (HF/PC)
P08.08
P08.09
P08.10
P08.11
P08.12
0.10
0
10
0.10
On
901
902
AI1 XM1-26/27 Use
Al1 Volt or mA
P09.01
P09.02
Unused
Volt
903
904
905
906
907
908
AI1 XM1-26/27 Filt
AI1 Setpoint #1 (%)
AI1 Setpoint #1 Val
AI1 Setpoint #2 (%)
AI1 Setpoint #2 Val
AI1 Speed Profile
P09.03
P09.04
P09.05
P09.06
P09.07
P09.08
10.00
0
909
AI1 Abs Value
P09.09
Abs Off
910
911
AI2 XM1-28/29 Use
Al2 Volt or mA
P09.10
P09.11
Unused
Volt
912
913
914
915
916
917
AI2-XM1.28/29 Filt
AI2 Setpoint #1 (%)
AI2 Setpoint #1 Val
AI2 Setpoint #2 (%)
AI2 Setpoint #2 Val
AI2 Speed Profile
P09.12
P09.13
P09.14
P09.15
P09.16
P09.17
10.00
0
918
AI2 Abs Value
P09.18
Abs Off
919
920
921
932
933
Speed feedback filt
VDC Fbk Filter
Power Calc Filter
Active Current Filt
VDC for compensation
P09.19
P09..20
P09..21
P09.32
P09.33
20.0
5.00
1.00
1.00
Filtered
1001
1002
1003
1004
AO1 - XM1.33 o 34
AO1 Scaler
AO1 Offset
AO1 Clamp
P10.01
P10.02
P10.03
P10.04
3
100.0
0.00
Clamp Off
1005
AO1 Absolute value
P10.05
Abs Off
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
AO2 - XM1.34 o 35
AO2 Scaler
AO2 Offset
AO2 Clamp
AO2 Absolute value
AO3 - XM1.37
P10.06
P10.07
P10.08
P10.09
P10.10
P10.11
7
100.0
0.00
Clamp Off
Abs Off
4
Literal val.
Literal select
0
1
Off
On
0
1
2
Volt
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
100
Off
0
1
0
1
Off
On
Abs Off
Abs On
0
1
2
Volt
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
100
Off
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Off
On
Abs Off
Abs On
Filtered
Unfiltered
Clamp Off
Clamp On
Abs Off
Abs On
Prgm Range
Unit
0.00
0
-100.0
0.00
0
to
to
to
to
to
3.00
75
100.0
3.00
1
0
0
to
to
19
2
0.00
-100.0
-32767
-100.0
-32767
0
to 100.00
to 100.0
to 32767
to 100.0
to 32767
to
1
%
AVN
%
%
Hz
%
%
Prgm Range from Network
Description
Control F, S, V
0
0
-32767
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Histeresis on commutation threshold for set point 1
Selection of analog variable for threshold commutation of a digital output
Commutation threshold for set point 2
Histeresis on commutation threshold for set point 2
0
0
to
to
32767
32767
Utilization of analog input #1
0
-32767
-32767
-32767
-32767
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Digital filter for analog input #1
Minimum voltage on analog input #1
Value at minimum voltage on analog input #1
Maximum voltage on analog input #1
Value at maximum voltage on analog input #1
Speed Profile enabling for analog input #1
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Absolute value enabling for analog input #1
F,S,V
Utilization of analog input #2
F,S,V
F,S,V
Select the auto bypass logic (on = rele energized, off = rele not energized)
Al1 is Volt, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
0
to
2
0
to
32767
Al2 is Volt, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
0
-32767
-32767
-32767
-32767
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Digital filter for analog input #2
Minimum voltage on analog input #2
Value at minimum voltage on analog input #2
Maximum voltage on analog input #2
Value at maximum voltage on analog input #2
0
to
32767
Absolute value enabling for analog input #2
F,S,V
0.00
-100.0
-32767
-100.0
-32767
0
to 100.00
to 100.0
to 32767
to 100.0
to 32767
to
1
Hz
%
%
Speed Profile enabling for analog input #2
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
1
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0
to
to
to
to
to
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
1
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Cut-off frequency of the speed feedback digital filter
Cut-off frequency of the DC voltage feedback digital filter
Cut-off frequency of the power calculated digital filter
Active Current Filter
Reading VDC to compensate DC-bus oscilllations
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
V
V
0
-250.0
-12.50
0
to
to
to
to
225
250.0
12.50
1
%
V
0
-32767
-32767
0
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
Variable selection for analog output #1
Gain for analog output #1
Offset for analog output #1
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Clamp enabling for analog output #1
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Absolute value enabling for analog output #1
F,S,V
0
-32767
-32767
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
0
to
32767
Variable selection for analog output #2
Gain for analog output #2
Offset for analog output #2
Clamp enabling for analog output #2
Absolute value enabling for analog output #2
Variable selection for analog output #3
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
-250.0 to
-12.50 to
225
250.0
12.50
%
V
See Param 1004
See Param 1005
0
to
225
Function
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Analog Input Config
Name (SF)
808
809
810
811
812
Analog Output
Param #
183
Name (HF/PC)
Name (SF)
Def
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1101
AO3 Scaler
AO3 Offset
AO3 Clamp
AO3 Absolute value
AO4 - XM1.38
AO4 Scaler
AO4 Offset
AO4 Clamp
AO4 Absolute value
Critical Speed En
P10.12
P10.13
P10.14
P10.15
P10.16
P10.17
P10.18
P10.19
P10.20
P11.01
1102
Curr Rollback En
P11.02
Enabled
1103
VDC Rollback En
P11.03
Enabled
1104
Flying Restart En
P11.04
Disabled
1105
Low Frq Curr Comp En
P11.05
Disabled
1106
Motor pot enable
P11.06
Enable
1107
VDC Undervolt En
P11.07
Disable
1110
Autotuning Select
P11.10
Tune Off
1111
Tuning Manual Trim
P11.11
Tune Off
1112
1113
1114
1115
Main Contactor Delay
Drive Rdy Delay Time
Free Run Stop
HOA/Pulsed StartStop
P11.12
P11.13
P11.14
P11.15
1
0.5
Disabled
Auto_Edge
1116
AutoReset&Start
P11.16
Disabled
1117
Auto On/ Off Enable
P11.17
Disabled
1120
External PID
P11.20
Disabilitato
184
100.0
0.00
Clamp Off
Abs Off
0
100.0
0.00
Clamp Off
Abs Off
Disabled
Literal val.
Literal select
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range from Network
-250.0 to
-12.50 to
250.0
12.50
%
V
-32767
-32767
to
to
32767
32767
0
to
-250.0 to
-12.50 to
225
250.0
12.50
%
V
0
-32767
-32767
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
0
to
1
0
to
32767
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enable lock speed ramp for current limit , only for V/Hz control.
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enable lock speed ramp for DC voltage limit .
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enable flying restart
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enable compensation of current oscillations at low frequencies
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enable digital potentiometer
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enable bus drop function
0
to
3
0
to
32767
Autotunig procedure select .
0
to
4
0
to
32767
Tuning manual trim procedure select
1
0.5
0
0
to
to
to
to
20
60.0
1
8
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
8
Delay on the main contactor command
Delay on the change to the ready state
Free run stop
HOA or Pulsed Start Stop function enable
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Autoreset of protection and restart
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Auto On/ Off function enable
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enable external PID
See Param 1004
See Param 1005
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
0
1
0
1
See Param 1004
See Param 1005
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enebled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disable
Rd Through
Tune Off
Self comm
Mot prm C
Stand Self
Tune Off
Tune R_r
Tune Flux
Tune Isd
Tune Spd
Disable
Auto_Edge
Auto_Level
Keypad
Pot
Select
PSS
PSS_Keypad
PSS_Pot
PSS_Select
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disabilita
Abilita
Description
Gain for analog output #3
Offset for analog output #3
Clamp enabling for analog output #3
Absolute value enabling for analog output #3
Variable selection for analog output #4
Gain for analog output #4
Offset for analog output #4
Clamp enabling for analog output #4
Absolute value enabling for analog output #4
Enable critical speed skip
sec
sec
Control F, S, V
Function
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
V
F,S,V
S,V
V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F, S
F,S
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Standard Macro En.
Param #
Literal val.
Off
Literal select
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range from Network
Description
Control F, S, V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
0
Disable
Enable
Set to Enable to enable the function; it will show “Backlash Function” family
[1900] inside of the Stability Menu.
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
Off
Trq lim cm
Helper
Pope
Drooping
Tension
Trq ref cm
Off
DC braking
Off
Crane Brk
None
ProfibusDP
ModbusRTU
DeviceNet
0
to
8
0
to
32767
Vector control application function selection
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Scalar control application function selection
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Application function selection
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Selection of communication expansion board
0
0
0
0
-1.25
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.25
0
1
0
0
0
0
-32767
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
0
32767
Speed controller proportional gain #1
Speed controller integral gain #1
Speed controller derivative gain #1
Output speed controller upper limit #1, reduced in field weakening
Output speed controller lower limit #1, reduced in field weakening
Torque limit inversion enabling
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enable opening torque limit at zero speed
0
0
0
0
-1.25
0
0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
-125
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.25
0
37
37
100
1.000
99.99
1.0
1.0
0
Hz
pu
Hz
pu
sec
sec
0
0
0
0
-32767
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
0
32767
32767
26214
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Speed controller proportional gain #2
Speed controller integral gain #2
Speed controller derivative gain #2
Output speed controller upper limit #2, reduced in field weakening
Output speed controller lower limit #2, reduced in field weakening
Digital input selection to enable the speed controller second gains set
Digital input selection to enable the motor prefluxing
Disable compensation frequency
Current oscillation compensation gain
Current oscillation filter cut-off freq.
Proportional gain for DC current regulator
Maximum delta of active current to for regulator
Active current regulator low limit
1201
Macro Vector Sel
P12.01
1202
Macro V/Hz Sel
P12.02
1203
Macro App. Sel
P12.03
1303
Com Card Select
P13.03
None
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1708
Speed Cntr1 Prp Gain
Speed Cntr1 Int Gain
Speed Cntr1 Der Gain
Torq Upper Limit1 FW
Torq Lower Limit1 FW
Torq Invert Limit En
P17.01
P17.02
P17.03
P17.04
P17.05
P17.08
0.040
0.003
0.000
1.00
-0.15
Disable
1709
Zero Spd Torq Lim En
P17.09
Enable
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1731
1801
1802
1803
1901
1902
1903
Speed Cntr2 Prp Gain
Speed Cntr2 Int Gain
Speed Cntr2 Der Gain
Torq Upper Limit2 FW
Torq Lower Limit2 FW
DI - Speed Gain Sel
DI - Premagn En
Max Compens Freq
Compens Gain
Compens Cutoff Frq
Active Curr Kp
BacklashTime
OpenLimitTime
P17.10
P17.11
P17.12
P17.13
P17.14
P17.15
P17.31
P18.01
P18.02
P18.03
P19.01
P19.02
P19.03
0.040
0.003
0.000
1.00
-0.01
Unused
Unused
0
0.022
10.00
0.1
0.5
7.0
1904
Torq_Hyst
P19.04
2.0
0
to
125
%
0
to
32767
Active current regulator high limit
2001
Unbalance Prp Gain
P20.01
0.1
0.0
to
1.0
pu
0
to
32767
Proportional gain regulator for compensation of umbalanced capacitor voltage
F,S,V
2002
Unbalance Int Gain
P20.02
0.001
0.0
to
1.0
pu
0
to
32767
Integral gain regulator for compensation of umbalanced capacitor voltage
F,S,V
2003
Offset Modul Limit
P20.03
0.013
0.0
to
1.0
pu
0
to
32767
Offset modulating signal limit for compensation of umbalanced capacitors V.
F,S,V
0
1
0
1
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
See Appendix D
See Appendix D
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
Function
V
F,S
V
Application Macro
Def
Disable
F,S,V
F,S,V
Expansion
Board
P11.21
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Vector Control Reg
Name (SF)
BacklashEn
Low
Freq
Stab.
Active Current Reg
Name (HF/PC)
1121
Unbalanced
Capacitor
Compensation
Param #
185
Def
Literal val.
Literal select
Offset Modul Sign
P20.04
Negative
0
1
Positive
Negative
2005
2006
No load threshold
Vdc reduct offset
P20.05
P20.06
0
0
0
-100
to
to
100
100
2007
Activ func hyst
P20.07
0
-100
to
2008
2009
Ramp Time limit
Task Manag Function
P20.08
P20.09
0
10 msec
0.0
2010
2011
Prp Gain Shift
Vdc Feedbacks
P20.10
P20.11
0
Filtered
2201
Speed Ref Source Sel
P22.01
MotorPot
2202
Aux Ref Source Sel
P22.02
Network
2203
2204
2240
2205
DI - Aux Ref En Sel
DI - Reverse En Sel
DI – Reverse Start
Speed ref lock
P22.03
P22.04
P22.40
P22.05
Net CW-B10
Unused
Unused
Disabled
2206
2207
Add speed ref sel
Add speed ref pos
P22.06
P22.07
Off
Upst Ramp
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
Rev Ref Speed Limit
Fwd Ref Speed Limit
Rev Ref Freq Limit
Fwd Ref Freq Limit
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Accel multiplier
P22.08
P22.09
P22.10
P22.11
P22.12
P22.13
P22.14
-6000
6000
-200
200
60.0
60.0
Off
2215
Decel multiplier
P22.15
Off
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Accel Time 3
Decel Time 3
Accel Time 4
P22.16
P22.17
P22.18
P22.19
P22.20
120.0
120.0
120.0
120.0
120.0
186
Name (HF/PC)
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
2
Prgm Range
Unit
Off
*10
*25
Off
*10
*25
Description
Control F, S, V
to
32767
Modulating signal sign for compensation of umbalanced capacitors voltage
F,S,V
%
%
0
0
to
to
32767
32767
F,S,V
F,S,V
100
%
0
to
32767
to
3.5
Sec
0
0
to
to
32767
32767
0
to
8
0
0
to
to
32767
32767
Threshold under which the load is lost
Offset to reduce Vdc threshold to control disconnection function of unbalanced
capacitor.
Histeresis for reinserts compensation function for unbalanced capacitors before
automatic disabilitation
Time of enable/disable of output reguletor gradually with a specific ramp
Select the task which manages the compensation function of unbalanced
capacitors voltage
Logical Shift applied to proportional gain (parameter 2001)
Select if Vdc fidbacks must to be filtered
0
to
6
0
to
32767
Source selection for main speed reference
F,S,V
0
to
5
0
to
32767
Source selection for auxiliary speed reference
F,S,V
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
20
20
20
1
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
Digital input selection to enable the auxiliary speed demand
Digital input selection to enable change rotation sense
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Lock speed reference downstream ramp if have different sign respect motor
speed.
Source selection for additional speed reference
Select position of additional speed reference (upstream or downstream ramp)
-6000
0
-200
0
0.1
0.1
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
0
6000
0
200
262.1
262.1
2
-32767
0
-32767
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
0
32767
0
32767
32767
32767
32767
Minimum allowed speed reverse demand
Maximum allowed speed foward demand
Minimum allowed frequency reverse demand
Maximum allowed frequency foward demand
Ramp up time set #1
Ramp down time set #1
Gain on acceleration ramp time
0
to
2
0
to
32767
Gain on deceleration ramp time
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
to
to
to
to
to
262.1
262.1
262.1
262.1
262.1
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Ramp up time set #2
Ramp down time set #2
Ramp up time set #3
Ramp down time set #3
Ramp up time set #4
10 msec
100 msec
Filtered
Unfiltered
AI1 XM1-26
Network
FixedSpd
AI2 XM1-28
Keypad
MotorPot
Off
AI1 XM1-26
Network
FixedSpd
AI2 XM1-28
Keypad
Off
See appendix D
See appendix D
See appendix D
Disabled
Enabled
See Param 2202
Upst Ramp
DwnSt ramp
Prgm Range from Network
0
RPM
RPM
Hz
Hz
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
Function
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Speed Demand Setup
Name (SF)
2004
F,S,V
F,S
F,S
F,S
V
V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Speed Demand Setup
Param #
Def
Decel Time 4
Jerk rate time
Change Ramp Mode
P22.21
P22.22
P22.41
120.0
0.0
Dig Input
2223
2224
2242
DI-Chg rmp rate sel1
DI-Chg rmp rate sel2
Speed Threshold 1
P22.23
P22.24
P22.42
Unused
Unused
33.00
2243
Speed Threshold 2
P22.43
2244
Speed Threshold 3
P22.44
2245
2225
Speed Histeresis
Ramp enable
P22.45
P22.25
3.00
Ramp ON
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
Preset speed 1
Preset speed 2
Preset speed 3
Preset speed 4
DI-Fix speed Sel 1
DI-Fix speed Sel 2
Jog reference 1
DI - Jog 1 enable
Jog reference 2
DI - Jog 2 enable
Speed limit 1 source
P22.26
P22.27
P22.28
P22.29
P22.30
P22.31
P22.32
P22.33
P22.34
P22.35
P22.36
15
30
40
50
Unused
Unused
5.0
Unused
10.00
Unused
Off
2237
2238
2239
2301
2302
DI-Spd limit 1 enbl
Speed limit 2 source
DI-Spd limit 2 enbl
Torq Ref Source Sel
Add Torq Ref Src Sel
P22.37
P22.38
P22.39
P23.01
P23.02
Unused
Off
Unused
Off
Off
2303
2304
2305
2306
Trq Ref ULim Src Sel
Trq Ref LLim Src Sel
OverBoost Torque
OverBoost Threshold
P23.03
P2304
P23.05
P23.06
Off
Off
0.0
0.0
2307
2308
2401
OverBoost Con. Thr.
RhoForce Threshold
Droop Source Sel
P23.07
P23.08
P24.01
2402
2403
2404
2405
Droop Fix Ref
Droop Trq Ref Flt
Droop Trq Thrshld
DI - Enable func
P24.02
P24.03
P24.04
P24.05
Literal val.
Literal select
Prgm Range
0.1
0
0
1
to
to
Unit
262.1
262.1
s
s
Dig Input
Speed Thr
See Param 1715
See Param 1715
0
to 100.00
66.00
0
to 100.00
98.99
0
to 100.00
0
0
to 100.00 %
to
1
0.0
4.0
Fixed
1.0
10.00
0.0
Unused
0
1
Ramp OFF
Ramp ON
-200.0
-200.0
-200.0
-200.0
%
%
%
Prgm Range from Network
0
0
0
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
0
to
26214
0
to
26214
0
to
26214
0
0
to
to
26214
32767
to
to
to
to
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
-32767
-32767
-32767
-32767
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
-100.0 to
100.0
%
-26214
to
26214
-100.0 to
100.0
%
-26214
to
26214
0
to
0
1
Fixed
Network
See Param 1715
0
to
to
3
4
0
to
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Digital input selection to enable change ramp rate
Digital input selection to enable change ramp rate
This value indicates at which value happened change acceleration ramp (from 1
to 2)
This value indicates at which value happened change acceleration ramp (from 2
to 3)
This value indicates at which value happened change acceleration ramp (from 3
to 4)
Histeresis applied among varius transition between consecutive ramps
Disable ramps
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Function
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
32767
32767
Digital input selection to enable limit #1 on speed demand downstream ramp
Enable and select external limit #2 for upstream ramp speed reference
Digital input selection to enable limit #2 on speed demand downstream ramp
Select source for direct torque command
Enable and select source for additional torque reference
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S
F,S
See Param 1715
0
Control F, S, V
Fixed speed reference #1
Fixed speed reference #2
Fixed speed reference #3
Fixed speed reference #4
Digital input to enable the Fixed speed reference #1 to #4 selection
Digital input to enable the Fixed speed reference #1 to #4 selection
Speed demand for jog #1
Digital input selection to enable jog 1
Speed demand for jog #2
Select source for direct torque command
Enable and select external limit #1 for upstream ramp speed reference
See Param 1715
See Param 1715
See Param 1715
0
Off
1
XM1-26
2
XM1-28
Network
3
Seei Param 1715
See Param 2236
See Param 1715
See Param 2236
0
Off
1
XM1-26 or 14
2
XM1-28 or 16
Network
3
Overboost
4
See Param 2236
See Param 2236
Description
Ramp down time set #4
S-Shaped ramp time
Change Ramp Mode
F,S,V
Torque
Name (HF/PC)
0.0
0.0
to
to
100.0
100.0
%
%
0
0
to
to
32767
32767
0.0
0.0
0
to
to
to
100.0
100.0
1
%
%
0
0
0
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
0
0.01
0
to 50.0
to 100.00
to 100.0
%
Hz
%
0
0
0
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
Enable and select source for upper limit on torque reference
Enable and select source for lower limit on torque reference
Torque overboost % of max motor torque
Torque overboost disable speed threshold, delta from [23.07] in % of max motor
speed
Constant torque overboost speed threshold, in % of max motor speed
RhoForce disable speed threshold, % of max motor speed
Select source for drooping percentage
Fixed drooping percentage value
Filter for drooping torque reference
Torque threshold to activate drooping
Digital input to enable Drooping
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
Over boost
Name (SF)
2221
2222
2241
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S,V
Drooping
Param #
187
PID Ref Source Sel
P27.10
Off
2711
PID Feedback Src Sel
P27.11
Off
2712
PID Mode Sel
P27.12
Continuous
2713
2714
DI - PID Enable
Motor pause func.
P27.13
P27.14
Unused
Disabled
2715
2716
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
3001
3002
3003
Curr Limit for Pause
Time Limit for Pause
Incr Torque Step
Decr Torque Step
Controller Overspeed
DI - Inc Torque
DI - Dec Torque
DI - Enable func
Torque proving thres
Trq Prov Speed Ref
Torque proving time
P27.15
P27.16
P28.01
P28.02
P28.03
P28.04
P28.05
P28.06
P30.01
P30.02
P30.02
40.0
10
0.1
0.1
1.0
Unused
Unused
Unused
0.10
5.0
0.50
3004
3005
Toq prov fail time
Toq provHi fail time
P30.04
P30.05
1.00
0
3006
DI - Brake Status
P30.06
Unused
Literal val.
Literal select
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range from Network
See Param 1715
See Param 1715
See Param 1715
See Param 1715
See Param 1715
0
Lift
1
Force
0
XM1-14 o 26
1
XM1-16 o 28
2
FixedLvRef
3
Network
4
Off
0
XM1-16 o 28
1
XM1-14 o 26
2
Network
3
Off
0
Continuous
1
On/Off
2
Both
See Param 1715
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
0.0
0.0
0.25
0.25
0
0
0
0
-1.25
0
0
-100
0
to 100.0
to 100.0
to 100.00
to 100.00
to 1.000
to 1.000
to 1.000
to 1.25
to
0
to 100.0
to 100.0
to 100
to
1
%
%
s
s
pu
pu
pu
pu
pu
%
%
%
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-32767
0
0
-32767
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
To
To
To
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
0
32767
32767
32767
32767
0
to
4
0
To
32767
Source selection for External PID reference
0
to
3
0
To
32767
Source selection for External PID feedback
0
to
2
0
To
32767
External PID mode selection
0
to
1
0
To
32767
Digital input selection to enable External PID
Motor pause function disable/enable in External PID
0.0
0
0.1
0.1
-25.0
to
to
to
to
to
95,0
300
250.0
250.0
25.0
%
sec
%
%
%
0
0
0
0
-32767
To
To
To
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
0
-50.0
0
to
to
to
1
50.0
5.0
pu
%
sec
0
-26214
0
to
to
to
32767
26214
26214
0.0
0.0
to
to
5.0
5.0
sec
sec
0
-26214
to
to
26214
26214
0
to
32767
See Param 1715
See Param 1715
See Param 1715
See Param 1715
Description
Digital input selection for stop pulsed cmd
Digital input selection for start pulsed cmd
Digital input selection for Hand cmd
Digital input selection for Auto cmd
Digital input selection for Speed demand when HOA function is activated
Speed demand threshold to stop the drive
Speed demand threshold to start the drive
Delay on the automatic stop
Delay on the automatic start
External PID proportional gain
External PID integral gain
External PID derivative gain
External PID upper limit
External PID lower limit
Upper threshold for on-off mode
Lower threshold for on-off mode
External PID fixed reference
Pump type
Control F, S, V
Current limit to pause the motor action
Time with current under [27.15] or speed under [02.10] to start motor pause
Step amplitude to increment the torque % supplied
Step amplitude to decrement the torque % supplied
Overspeed for speed controller saturation
Digital input selection for up command
Digital input selection for down command
Digital input to enable function
Torque proving threshold to enable the open brake command
Speed reference during torque proving
Time with torque feedback greather than torque proving threshold to enable the
open brake command
Max time with torque greater than Torque Proving threshold
Speed threshold to enable the close brake command after a drive stop
command.
Select digital input for brake status check
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Function
HOA PSS
2710
188
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
0.0
1.0
0.50
0.50
0.500
0.200
0
1.00
0
80.0
60.0
0
Lift
Auto
On/Off
Def
P25.01
P25.02
P25.03
P25.04
P25.05
P26.01
P26.02
P26.03
P26.04
P27.01
P27.02
P27.03
P27.04
P27.05
P27.06
P27.07
P27.08
P27.09
F,S,V
F,S,V
External PID
Name (SF)
DI - Pulse Stop
DI - Pulse Start
DI - Hand
DI - Auto
DI - HOA Speed sel
Auto off threshold
Auto on threshold
Delay off
Delay on
PID Prop Gain
PID Integral Gain
PID Der Gain
PID Upper Limit
PID Lower Limit
Threshold Upper
Threshold Lower
PID Fixed Ref
Pump Type Select
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,
V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Pope
Name (HF/PC)
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2601
2602
2603
2604
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
Crane Control
Param #
Def
Literal val.
Literal select
Brake Open Status
P30.07
On
0
1
On
Off
3008
Open order dly time
P30.08
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
Brake opening time
Brake open fail Tm
Unwanted closed time
Unwanted closed
mode
Close Brake Speed
Close order dly time
Brake closing time
Brake close fail Tm
Unclose Alarm Time
Stop Fluxing Time
WeightProv Enable
3020
3021
3022
3023
3102
3103
3104
3105
3106
3107
3108
3202
3203
3204
3205
3206
3207
3208
3209
3210
Prgm Range
Unit
0
to
1
0
0
to
5
P30.09
P30.10
P30.11
P30.12
0
1
0
Fault
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
P30.13
P30.14
P30.15
P30.16
P30.17
P30.18
P30.19
1.0
2.00
0.0
1
10.0
10
Disable
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0.0
0
WeightProv Speed
WeightProv Time
WeightProv Recalib
WeightProv Friction
Step Incr Trq
Step Decr Trq
Torque Share %
Offset speed
DI - Inc Torque
DI - Dec Torque
DI - Enable func
Tension Prp Gain
Prp Gain Divider
Tension Int Gain
Int Gain Divider
Tension Out Gain
Tension Upper Limit
Tension Lower Limit
Integral Rec Gain
Tension Ref Src Sel
P30.20
P30.21
P30.22
P30.23
P31.02
P31.03
P31.04
P31.05
P31.06
P31.07
P31.08
P32.02
P32.03
P32.04
P32.05
P32.06
P32.07
P32.08
P32.09
P32.10
90
0.4
100
2
0.1
0.1
100
1.0
Net CW-B 8
Net CW-B 9
Net CW-B 11
1
1
1
100
5.0
1.00
-1.00
0.00
Off
3211
Tension Fbk Src Sel
P32.11
Off
3212
Load Cell Position
P32.12
Pos Ante
3213
Integral Rec Type
P32.13
Factor
3214
3301
3302
DI - Enable func
Critical Speed 1
Critical speed1 Band
P32.14
P33.01
P33.02
Net CW-B 11
0.0
0.0
0
1
0
1
Fault
Alarm
Disable
Enable
Network
XM1-26
XM1-28
Off
XM1-26
XM1-28
Off
Pos Ante
Pos Post
Factor
Speed
See Param 1715
Description
Control F, S, V
to
32767
Level on the digital input (parameter 3006) corresponding to open brake
F,S,V
sec
0
to
26214
F,S,V
5.0
5.0
5.0
1
sec
sec
sec
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
26214
26214
26214
32767
Open brake command delay after enable open command from troque proving
precedure
Time needed to open brake
After brake open command, check open status for this time
Time check for unwanted brake close condition
Manage of unwanted closing condition: Fault or Alarm
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
10.0
10.0
5.0
5.0
300
300
1
%
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
26214
26214
26214
26214
26214
26214
32767
Speed threshold to enable brake command after drive stop command
Delay on close brake command after enable close command
Time needed to close brake
After brake open command, check open status for this time
In case of Close Brake Alarm, motor speed referensce null for this time
After closing brake, motor still fluxed
Weight Proving Enable. This enables parameters 3020, 3021, 3022, 3023
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S
50
0
0
0
0.1
0.1
0.0
-25.0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
100
5
125
100
250.0
250.0
250.0
25.0
%
sec
sec
%
%
%
%
%
0
1
0
1
0
0
-1.00
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
10000
32767
100.00
100.0
1.00
0
1.00
3
ad
ad
ad
ad
%
pu
pu
pu
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-32767
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-32767
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
To
To
To
To
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
0
32767
32767
Weight Proving Speed
Wheigt Time
Weight Recalibration
Weight Compensation Function
Step amplitude to increment the torque % supplied
Step amplitude to decrement the torque % supplied
Torque % supplied
Overspeed for speed controller saturation
Digital input selection for up command
Digital input selection for down command
Digital input to enable Helper
Tension controller proportional gain
Tension controller proportional gain divider
Tension controller integral gain
Tension controller integral gain divider
Output tension controller gain
Output tension controller upper limit
Output tension controller lower limit
Tension controller gains speed recalibration coefficient
Source selection for tension controller reference
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
0
to
2
0
To
32767
Source selection for tension controller feedback
0
to
1
0
To
32767
Load cell position
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Tension controller integral gain recalibration mode
0
0
to
to
200.0
200.0
0
0
to
to
32767
32767
Digital input to enable Tension Controller
Critical frequency #1
Critical frequency band #1
See Param 1715
See Param 1715
See Param 1715
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
Prgm Range from Network
0
Hz
Hz
Function
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S
Helper
Name (HF/PC)
Tension
Name (SF)
3007
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
ca
l
S
Param #
189
P3605
P36.06
P36.07
P36.08
P36.09
P36.10
P36.11
P36.12
P36.13
P36.15
P36.16
P36.16
P38.01
P38.02
P38.08
2
0.014
0.001
1.0
5.0
3.0
100
80
50
2.0
30
10
15
8
Disabled
3901
3902
1727
1728
1729
1730
3908
3909
1716
1717
1718
1719
4001
4002
4003
4004
Flux Low Step
Flux High Step
Flux Cntr Prp Gain
Flux Cntr Int Gain
Flux Upper Limit
Flux Lower Limit
Isd Low Step
Isd High Step
Isd Cntr Prp Gain
Isd Cntr Int Gain
Usd Upper limit
Usd Lower limit
Speed step increment
Speed step decrement
Rmp start delay time
Speed reverse enable
P39.01
P39.02
P17.27
P17.28
P17.29
P17.30
P39.08
P39.09
P17.16
P17.17
P17.18
P17.19
P40.01
P40.02
P40.03
P40.04
90
95
4005
4006
4007
4701
DI- Increment source
DI- Decrement source
DI - Memory source
VDC to shutoff
P40.05
P40.06
P40.07
P47.01
0
1
Pos & Neg
Only Pos
Disabled
Enabled
20
30
1.00
1.00
2.0
MtpRev off
Net CW-B 8
Net CW-B 9
Net CW-B 11
80
0
1
MtpRev off
MtpRev on
See Appendix D
See Appendix D
See Appendix D
Unit
Prgm Range from Network
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Prgm Range
to 200.0
to 200.0
to 200.0
to 200.0
to 125.0
to 100.0
to
50
to 1.000
to 100.0
to 100.0
to 1000.0
to
1
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
%
%
V
%
%
%
Hz
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
26214
32767
Critical frequency #2
Tension controller integral gain
Critical frequency #3
Critical frequency band #3
Current threshold for acceleration lock ramp and current limit controller set point
Current limit controller upper limit
Threshold voltage adjusting for activating the VDC Rollback function
DC voltage limit controller upper limit
Flying restart start speed
Magnetizing current for flying restart
Minimum frequency for flying restart
Search direction for flying restart
0.1
0
0
0
0
-100.0
0
0
0
0,5
0
0
10
4
0
to 30.0
to 1.000
to 1.000
to 125.00
to 125.00
to 100.0
to 250
to 250
to 100
to 100.0
to 100
to 200
to 1000
to 100
to
1
%c
pu
pu
%
%
%
%
%
%
s
%
s
RPM
s
0
0
0
0
0
-32767
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
250
250
100
10000
100
32767
26214
32767
32767
Step change frequency for flying restart
Motor voltage controller proportional gain
Motor voltage controller integral gain
Max current error for enable catching frequency
Max current error for enable catching frequency at low freq.
Frequency set point to change from 3608 toi 3609
Isd forced peak value
Isd forced reference
Oscillations amplitude
Flying restart time
% time for peak current
Time delay to apply the firing pulses after the reset
Tuning speed step amplitude
Square wave tuning period
Tuning start command
0
0
0
0
0
-125
0
0
0
0
0
-125
0
0
0
0
to 100
to 100
to 1000
to 1000
to 125
to
0
to 100
to 100
to 1000
to 1000
to 125
to
0
to 100.00
to 100.00
to 10.0
to
1
%
%
pu
pu
pu
pu
%
%
pu
pu
pu
pu
%
%
sec
0
0
0
0
0
-32767
0
0
0
0
0
-32767
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
26214
26214
32767
32767
Flux reference step amplitude
Flux reference step amplitude
Flx ctrller p-gain
Flx ctrller i-gain
Flx ctrller out up-lim.
Flx ctrller out low-lim.
Isd reference step amplitude
Isd reference step amplitude
Isd controller proportional-gain
Isd controller integral-gain
out Isd controller up-limit.
out Isd controller low-limit.
Speed reference increment step amplitude
Speed reference decrement step amplitude
Time to ramp change on reference
Enabling reverse digital potentiometer
F
F
F
F
F
F
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
32767
Digital input selection for up command
Digital input selection for down command
Digital input selection to store last reference
DC voltage level to remove firing pulses
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
75
to
85
%
0
To
Description
Control F, S, V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
V
V
F,S,V
V
V
V
V
Function
A
da
pt
Scan step size
Mot Volt Prp Gain
Mot Volt Int Gain
Maximum current err
Max cur low spd err
Low spd freq thresh
Isd forced peak val
Isd forced reference
Oscillation amplit
Flying restart time
% time peak current
Flying restart delay
Speed Step
Speed Step Period
Tuning Enable
0
1
Literal select
V
dc
R
3605
3606
3607
3608
3609
3610
3611
3612
3613
3614
3615
3616
3801
3802
3808
Literal val.
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
S
S
S
S
S
S
F,S
F,S
F,S
F,S,V
Flying Restart
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
100.0
100
0
0
0
60
0
Pos & Neg
Speed
Reg
P33.03
P33.04
P33.05
P33.06
P34.01
P34.04
P35.01
P35.04
P36.01
P36.02
P36.03
P36.04
Tuning Flux or Isd
Def
Critical Speed 2
Critical speed2 Band
Critical Speed 3
Critical speed3 Band
Current Threshold
Current Upper Limit
VDC Threshold
VDC Upper Limit
Start Speed
Magn Current FR
Min Freq FR
Scan Range
190
Name (HF/PC)
Motor Potentiom.
Name (SF)
3303
3304
3305
3306
3401
3404
3501
3504
3601
3602
3603
3604
n
d
e
Param #
6503
Fast/coast mode sel
P65.03
FstStopAct
6504
Fast/coast restart
P65.04
Disable
6505
6506
6507
6508
6601
Fast stop ramp time
Fast/coast trip del
DI-Coast stop select
DI-Fast stop select
Trip/alarm mode sel
P65.05
P65.06
P65.07
P65.08
P66.01
6602
6603
6604
Overload
Overload timeout
Speed OverLoad
P66.02
P66.03
P66.04
6701
Motor stall enable
P67.01
SpdDevOff
6702
Motor stall mode
P67.02
Standard
6703
6704
Mtr stall delay time
Overspeed alarm enbl
P67.03
P67.04
5
OSAlmOff
6705
6706
6707
6708
6709
6801
Ovrspd alrm setpoint
Ovrspd flt setpoint
Undspd flt setpoint
Motor stall max err
Motor stall max time
Overcurr alarm enbl
P67.05
P67.06
P67.07
P67.08
P67.09
P68.01
100.0
120.0
-120.0
0.0
0
OCAlarmOff
6802
6803
Overcurr alm setpoint
Signal loss alm enbl
P68.02
P68.03
120.0
Off
6902
Ground fault enable
P69.02
Disabled
6904
6905
6906
6907
DI - User trip #1
DI - User trip #2
DI - User trip #3
DI - User trip #4
P69.04
P69.05
P69.06
P69.07
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
10.0
10
Unused
Unused
ImTrmTrip
110
60
Disable
Literal val.
Literal select
Prgm Range
0
70
0.000
0.000
-10
0.1
0.00
0.00
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
See Param 1715
FstStopNrm
FstStopTrp
FstStopAct
FstStopPas
Disable
Enable
See Appendix D
See Param 6507
0
ImTrmAlarm
1
ImTrmTrip
0
1
0
1
0
1
Disable
Enable
SpdDevOff
SpdDevOn
Standard
Only Alarm
0
1
OSAlarmOff
OSAlarmOn
0
1
OCAlarmOff
OCAlarmOn
0
1
2
3
0
1
Off
RefLossTrp
Alarm
Alarm Preset
Enabled
Disabled
See Param 6507
See Param 6507
See Param 6507
See Param 6507
to 200
to
80
to 1.000
to 1.000
to
20
to
3.0
to 125.00
to 200.00
to 262.0
Unit
Prgm Range from Network
sec
%
pu
pu
%
sec
%
Hz
s
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Description
Control F, S, V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Time delay to apply the firing pulses after the DC volt reset.
DC bus undervoltage: protection setpoint
Controller Proportional Gain
Controller Integral Gain
Offset of reguletor DC bus voltage reference
Minimum activation time delay of ride throught
Set point for DC braking motor current regulator
Motor frequency threshold to activate the fast-stop during motor stop
Maximun time for DC Braking
Digital input selection for DC Braking enable
Selection of drive state at fast-stop end
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Selection of fast-stop way
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enable free run with drive in ready
F,S,V
1
1
to
to
262.0
327
0
0
0
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Ramp time to decrese the speed demand in fast-stop
Delay time after motor stop to trip the drive
Digital input selection to enable the free run stop
Digital input selection to enable the fast stop
Action of thermal image protection
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
75
1
0
to 350
to 18000
to
1
0
0
0
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
Motor overload for thermal image protection
Motor overload time
Overload proportional to the speed
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Speed deviation enabling
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Action selection for speed deviation function
F,S,V
1
0
to
to
60
1
s
0
0
to
to
32767
32767
Maximum time for speed deviation presence
Over speed alarm enabling
F,S,V
0
10.0
-125.0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
125.0
125.0
0
100.0
600
1
%
%
%
%
s
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Over speed alarm set point
Over speed trip set point
Under speed trip set point
Maximum error between speed demand and speed feedback for stall protection
Maximum time for maximum stall error
Over current alarm enabling
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
0
to
to
125.0
3
%
0
0
to
to
32767
32767
Over current alarm set point
Loss of analog speed demand alarm enabling
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Ground fault protection enabling
sec
sec
%
sec
Digital input selection for user trip
Digital input selection for user trip
Digital input selection for user trip
Digital input selection for user trip
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S
F,S
F,S,V
F,S,V
V
V
V
V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Function
DCBrake
10.0
70
1.000
0.010
0
0.1
0.00
0.00
0
Unused
FstStpNrm
Fast Stop
Def
P47.02
P69.01
P47.03
P47.04
P47.09
P47.10
P48.05
P48.09
P48.10
P48.11
P65.02
Motor thermal
protection
Name (SF)
Restart delay
UV-Vdc Set Point
Rd through Prp Gain
Rd through Int Gain
Vdc reference offset
Min Rd throught time
DC braking current
Freq threshold
DC braking time
DI – DCB enable
Fast/coast trip enbl
Motor speed trip/alm
Name (HF/PC)
4702
6901
4703
4704
4709
4710
4805
4809
4810
4811
6502
Alarms Settings
Param #
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
191
P69.08
P69.09
P69.10
P69.11
P69.12
P69.13
P69.14
P69.15
P69.16
P69.17
P69.18
P69.19
P69.20
P69.21
P69.22
P69.23
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
DI7 XM1-19
Disable
6924
6925
6926
6927
Under Load Limit
Under Load Time
DI - Mask SW Trips
AI User A/T source
P69.24
P69.25
P69.26
P69.27
0.0
0
Unused
6928
6929
7001
7002
7003
7004
AI User Alarm Th
AI User Trip Th
Auto Reset Time
Auto Reset Attempt
Reset Memory Time
Reset Desaturation
P69.28
P69.29
P70.01
P70.02
P70.03
P70.04
20
5
20
Disable
7005
Reset IOC
P70.05
Disable
7006
Reset Overvoltage
P70.06
Disable
7007
Reset Undervolt SW
P70.07
Disable
7008
Reset Therm. Ovld
P70.08
Disable
7009
Reset Undervolt HW
P70.09
Disable
8501
PFB Connection
P85.01
Parallel
8502
PPO
P85.02
Type 5
8503
CMWt
P85.03
ANSALDO
Literal val.
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
Literal select
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range from Network
Description
See Param 6507
See Param 6507
See Param 6507
See Param 6507
Digital input selection for user trip
Digital input selection for user trip
Digital input selection for user trip
Digital input selection for user trip
See Param 6507
Digital input selection for user trip
Enable
Disable
See Param 6507
Off
AI1 XM1- 26
AI2 XM1- 28
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Serial
Parallel
Off
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
ANSALDO
Standard
0
to
1
0.0
0
to
to
100.0
300
0
to
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
10.0
10.0
120
128
540
1
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
0
Control F, S, V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
32767
Loss of Output Phase fault enabling
F,S,V
0
0
to
to
32767
32767
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
32767
Motor Under Load Limit
Time-out on Under Load Limit
Digital input to mask software trips
Source selection for AI User Alarm/Trip
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Alarm threshold for AI User Alarm/Trip
Trip threshold for AI User Alarm/Trip
Auto Reset Time
Auto Reset Attempt
Reset Memory Time
Enables/disables the auto reset feature for OOS trips
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
1
0
to
32767
Enables/disables the auto reset feature for IOC trips
F,S,V
to
1
0
to
32767
Enables/disables the auto reset feature for Overvoltage trips
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enables/disables the auto reset feature for Undervolt SW trips
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enables/disables the auto reset feature for Overload trips
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Enable/Disable undervoltage hardware trips
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Connection between Microprocessor Basic or Plus and SUPRB
F,S,V
0
to
5
0
to
32767
PROFIBUS message selection
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Select the command word structure
F,S,V
%
s
%
%
s
min
Function
Protection
Def
DI - User trip #5
DI - User trip #6
DI - User trip #7
DI - User trip #8
DI - User trip #9
DI - User trip #10
DI - User trip #11
DI - User trip #12
DI - User trip #13
DI - User trip #14
DI - User trip #15
DI - User trip #16
DI - User trip #17
DI - User trip #18
DI - Reset command
Loss of Output Phase
192
Name (HF/PC)
F,S,V
F,S,V
Auto Reset & Restart
Name (SF)
6908
6909
6910
6911
6912
6913
6914
6915
6916
6917
6918
6919
6920
6921
6922
6923
Profibus
Param #
Name (SF)
Def
Literal val.
8504
Name (HF/PC)
FltCf
P85.04
Trip
0
1
2
Trip
Alarm
AutoAlrm
8505
8506
TMOut
FrzCR
P85.05
P85.06
1
Disable
0
1
8507
8508
8509
8510
8511
8512
8513
8514
8515
8516
8517
8518
8519
8520
8521
8522
8523
8524
8525
DI - Chg CW and Ref
GainI
IPZD3
IPZD4
IPZD5
IPZD6
IPZD7
IPZD8
IPZD9
IPZD0
OPZD3
OPZD4
OPZD5
OPZD6
OPZD7
OPZD8
OPZD9
OPZD0
DelUp
P85.07
P85.08
P85.09
P85.10
P85.11
P85.12
P85.13
P85.14
P85.15
P85.16
P85.17
P85.18
P85.19
P85.20
P85.21
P85.22
P85.23
P85.24
P85.25
Unused
0
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
11
5
6
122
123
131
124
Enable
Disable
Enable
See Param 6507
8526
TstCW
P85.26
Enable
8527
DUTim
P85.27
0
8528
Auto Alarm Cfg Ref
P85.28
Main Ref
8529
8530
8601
Auto Alarm Min Speed
Auto Alarm Min Freq
Command Word type
P85.29
P85.30
P86.01
0
0
ANSALDO
8602
Fault configuration
P86.02
Trip
8603
8604
8605
Time out connection
DI - Chg CW and Ref
GainI
P86.03
P86.04
P86.05
1
Unused
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
2
Literal select
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Main Ref
Min Ref
ANSALDO
Standard
Trip
Alarm
AutoAlrm
Prgm Range
Unit
0
to
2
0.1
0
to
to
10.0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
125.0
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
1
0
to
1
0
to
10.0
0
to
1
0
0
0
to 6000
to 2000
to
1
0
to
2
0.1
to
250
0
to
125
s
%
Prgm Range from Network
Description
Control F, S, V
0
to
32767
Select the action in case of lost connection
F,S,V
0
0
to
to
32767
32767
Time-out on lost communication
Enable freeze command word and speed demand
F,S,V
Digital input selection to force CW and reference from TB
Gain on reference and feedback through PROFIBUS
Select the signal for the word IPZD3
Select the signal for the word IPZD4
Select the signal for the word IPZD5
Select the signal for the word IPZD6
Select the signal for the word IPZD7
Select the signal for the word IPZD8
Select the signal for the word IPZD9
Select the signal for the word IPZD10
Select the signal for the word OPZD3
Select the signal for the word OPZD4
Select the signal for the word OPZD5
Select the signal for the word OPZD6
Select the signal for the word OPZD7
Select the signal for the word OPZD8
Select the signal for the word OPZD9
Select the signal for the word OPZD10
Enable delay on updating speed demand and command word after a loss of
communication
Enable command word reject in case of command word with all zero bit
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Time delay on updating speed demand and command word after a loss of
communication
Auto alarm config reference
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
0
to
32767
0
to
32767
0
to
32767
0
0
0
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
Auto alarm minimum speed reference
Auto alarm minimum frequency reference
NETWORK Select the command word structure
F,S,V
0
to
32767
NETWORK Select the action in case of lost connection
F,S,V
s
0
to
32767
%
0
to
32767
NETWORK Time-out on lost communicat.
NETWORK Digital input selection to force CW and reference from TB
Gain on reference and feedback through NETWORK
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
s
RPM
Hz
See Param 6507
Function
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S
V
Modbus
Param #
193
Def
Literal val.
BaudRate
P86.06
9600 Baud
8607
ParityType
P86.07
None+2stop
8608
DriveTimeOutEnable
P86.08
Disabled
8609
Auto Alarm Cfg Ref
P8609
Main Ref
0
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
0
1
0
8610
8611
8701
8702
Auto Alarm Min Speed
Auto Alarm Min Freq
MAC ID
BaudRate
P8610
P8611
P87.01
P87.02
0
0
8703
MessageType
P87.03
Off
8704
CMWt
P87.04
ASI
8705
FltCf
P87.05
Trip
8706
8707
TMOut
FrzCR
P87.06
P87.07
1.0
Disable
8708
8709
DI - Chg CW and Ref
GainI
P87.08
P87.09
Unused
0
8710
8711
8712
8713
8714
8715
8716
8717
8718
8719
InputWord 3
InputWord 4
InputWord 5
InputWord 6
InputWord 7
InputWord 8
InputWord 9
InputWord10
OutputWord 3
OutputWord 4
P87.10
P87.11
P87.12
P87.13
P87.14
P87.15
P87.16
P87.17
P87.18
P87.19
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
194
Name (HF/PC)
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
Literal select
Off
300 Baud
600 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
4800 Baud
9600 Baud
19200 Baud
28800 Baud
38400 Baud
None+2stop
Even
Odd
None+1stop
Disabled
Enabled
Main Ref
Min Ref
125 kBaud
250 kBaud
500 kBaud
Off
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
ASI
Standard
Trip
Alarm
AutoAlrm
Disable
Enable
See Param 6507
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range from Network
Description
Control F, S, V
0
to
9
0
to
32767
Gain on reference and feedback through NETWORK
F,S,V
0
to
3
0
to
32767
MODBUS Baudrate selection
F,S,V
0
to
3
0
to
32767
MODBUS Drive TimeOut Enable
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Auto alarm config reference
F,S,V
0
0
0
0
to 6000
to 2000
to
63
to
2
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
63
2
Auto alarm minimum speed reference
Auto alarm minimum frequency reference
DeviceNet MAC ID selection
DeviceNet Baudrate selection
F,S
V
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
5
0
to
32767
DeviceNet Type of Messages
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Select the command word structure
F,S,V
0
to
2
0
to
32767
Select the action in case of lost connection
F,S,V
0.1
0
to
to
10.0
1
sec
0
0
to
to
32767
32767
Time-out on lost communication
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
125.0
%
0
to
32767
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
140
140
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
RPM
Hz
Enable freeze command word and speed demand
Digital input selection to force CW and reference from TB
Gain on reference and feedback through DeviceNet
Select the signal for the "inpWord 3"
Select the signal for the "inpWord 4"
Select the signal for the "inpWord 5"
Select the signal for the "inpWord 6"
Select the signal for the "inpWord 7"
Select the signal for the "inpWord 8"
Select the signal for the "inpWord 9"
Select the signal for the "inpWord10"
Select the signal for the "outWord 3"
Select the signal for the "outWord 4"
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Function
Command
Name (SF)
8606
DeviceNet
Param #
Name (SF)
Def
8720
8721
8722
8723
8724
8725
8726
Name (HF/PC)
OutputWord 5
OutputWord 6
OutputWord 7
OutputWord 8
OutputWord 9
OutputWord10
DelUp
P87.20
P87.21
P87.22
P87.23
P87.24
P87.25
P87.26
0
0
0
0
0
0
Disable
8727
TstCW
P87.27
Disable
8728
DUTim
P87.28
0
8729
SW ID Enable
P87.29
HW enable
8730
StopMode
P87.30
Ramp Stop
8731
OutputInstance
P87.31
OAI 20
8732
InputInstance
P87.32
IAI 70
8733
8734
8735
8736
8737
8738
8739
8740
8741
Output Par #1
Output Par #2
Output Par #3
Output Par #4
Input Par #1
Input Par #2
Input Par #3
Input Par #4
LocalReference
P87.33
P87.34
P87.35
P87.36
P87.37
P87.38
P87.39
P87.40
P87.41
257
257
257
257
257
257
257
257
AI1 XM1-26
8742
DriveTimeOutEnable
P87.42
Disable
8743
Auto Alarm Config Ref
P87.43
Main ref
8744
8745
9102
Auto Alarm Min Speed
Auto Alarm Min Freq
Reset CPU En
P87.44
P87.44
P91.02
0
0
Off
9103
Reset CPU
P91.03
0
Literal val.
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
0
1
0
1
Literal select
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
HW enable
SW enable
Ramp Stop
Coast Stop
OAI 20
OAI 21
OAI 100
OAI 102
IAI 70
IAI 71
IAI 100
IAI 103
AI1 XM1-26
Network
FixedSpd
AI2 XM1-28
Keypad
MotorPot
Off
Disable
Enable
Main ref
Min ref
Off
On
Prgm Range
Unit
Prgm Range from Network
Description
Control F, S, V
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
140
140
140
140
140
140
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
0
to
1
0
to
32767
0
to
10.0
0
to
32767
0
to
1
0
to
32767
0
to
1
0
to
32767
F,S,V
0
to
3
0
to
32767
F,S,V
0
to
3
0
to
32767
F,S,V
257
257
257
257
257
257
257
257
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
257
257
257
257
32767
32767
32767
32767
10.0
257
257
257
257
257
257
257
257
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Drive TimeOut enable
F,S,V
0
to
1
0
to
32767
Auto alarm config reference
F,S,V
0
0
0
to
to
to
6000
2000
1
0
0
0
to
to
to
32767
32767
0
Auto alarm minimum speed
Auto alarm minimum frequency
Enable board reset
F,S,V
0
to
23
0
to
0
Execute board reset command
F,S,V
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
RPM
Hz
Select the signal for the "outWord 5"
Select the signal for the "outWord 6"
Select the signal for the "outWord 7"
Select the signal for the "outWord 8"
Select the signal for the "outWord 9"
Select the signal for the "outWord10"
Enable delay on updating speed demand and command word after a loss of
communication
Enable command word reject in case of command word with all zero bit
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S,V
Time delay on updating speed demand and command word after a loss of
communication
Enable software or hardware ID
F,S,V
Function
F,S,V
F,S,V
F,S
V
Comm
and
Param #
195
17. APPENDIX D: Input Configuration for Operating Functions
17.1. Introduction
The table lists the available parameters to input configuration for operating function.
• Column 1 (Parameter Value) identifies the parameter values
• Column 2 (Description) briefly describes the parameter.
If the selected digital input is already used for another function the selection is not accepted
A dialog box will be shown with this message: "Digital In already used, try another input"
17.2. D.2 Parameter
Parameter Value
Description
Parameter Value
Description
DI2 XM1-8
terminal 8 (1)
Net CW-B 1
Command word Fieldbus bit 1
DI3 Unused
Net CW-B 4
Command word Fieldbus bit 4
DI4 Unused
Net CW-B 5
Command word Fieldbus bit 5
DI5 XM1-24
terminal 24 (1)
Net CW-B 6
Command word Fieldbus bit 6
DI6 XM1-25
terminal 25 (1)
Net CW-B 7
Command word Fieldbus bit 7
DI7 XM1-26
terminal 26 (1)
Net CW-B 8
Command word Fieldbus bit 8
DI9 XM1-27
terminal 27 (1)
Net CW-B 9
Command word Fieldbus bit 9
DI10XM1-28
terminal 28 (1)
Net CW-B10
Command word Fieldbus bit 10
DI2 XM1-14
terminal 14 (2)
Net CW-B11
Command word Fieldbus bit 11
DI3 XM1-15
terminal 15 (2)
Net CW-B12
Command word Fieldbus bit 12
DI4 XM1-16
terminal 16 (2)
Net CW-B13
Command word Fieldbus bit 13
DI5 XM1-17
terminal 17 (2)
Net CW-B14
Command word Fieldbus bit 14
DI6 XM1-18
terminal 18 (2)
Net CW-B15
Command word Fieldbus bit 15
DI7 XM1-19
terminal 19 (2)
DI9 XM1-21
terminal 21 (2)
DI10XM1-22
terminal 22 (2)
(1) Microprocessor Basic Control
(2) Microprocessor Plus Control
(3) DI/DO Expansion Board
WARNING
Parameter Value
Parameters modifiable only with drive not running
A dialog box will be shown if the user tries to modify these parameters with drive running
196
18. APPENDIX E Default Values
18.1. Parameters Default Values
The default values of all parameters are listed in Appendix A, B, C except for the parameters identified with (*); the default values of these
parameters depend on Drive Size as listed in tables E.2.1 and E.2.2.
NOTE
Param #
Name (HF / PC)
DEF
101
EU-NEMA Select
EU
102
Motor Control Mode
V/Hz Ctrl
201 (*)
Motor Power EU
(*)
202 (*)
Motor Power NEMA
(*)
206 (*)
Motor Full Load Curr
(*)
208
Motor Frequency
50
209
Motor Full Load Speed
1500
210
Motor Min Oper
Frequency
0
211
Motor Max Oper
Frequency
60
217
Motor Power Factor
0,85
218
Motor Efficiency
1000
1110
Autotuning Select
Tune Off
2212
Accel Time 1
60.0
2213
Decel Time 1
60.0
For a detailed description of Motor Power EU / NEMA see next paragraph E.1.2.
18.1.1. Parameters Default Values Reset
When parameter Reset All [01.03] available at programming level 2 is set to “ON”, all default values are set according to Appendices A,
B, C and Table E.2.1 and E.2.2.
The default value of Reset All parameter is “Off ”; after it is set to “ On ” the parameter returns automatically “Off”
NEMA use: at Reset All command parameter EU-NEMA Select [01.01] is set its default value “EU”; so for NEMA use after, “Reset All”, it
is necessary to change parameter EU-NEMA Select [01.01] to “NEMA”.
Nota: If the user change one of the following parameters: EU/NEMA Select [01.01], Ovl Class Select [06.08], Switching Frequency
[06.12], also other parameters are automatically set to the default values; for details see E.2 EU/NEMA), E.3 (Overload Class Select), E.4
(Switching frequency).
18.1.2. EU - NEMA Use
EU/NEMA use is selected through parameter EU-NEMA Select [01.01] (EU as default value).
Depending on the value of this parameter:
•
Motor Power is selected as EU or NEMA according to Tables E.2.1, E.2.2.
The values of parameters Motor Frequency, Mot Full Load Speed, Motor Max Oper Freq are defined according to Table E.1.2
Setting
Motor Frequency [Hz]
Mot Full Load Speed [RPM]
Motor Max Oper Freq [RPM]
[01.01]
[02.08]
[02.11]
EU
NEMA
50
60
[02.09]
1500
1780
60
60
Table E.1.2
197
Changing parameter EU-NEMA Select [01.01] to EU – NEMA and vice versa (after confirmation through dialog box) sets the default
values of the parameters listed above and of those listed below: Motor NoLoad Curr [02.07] = 1
Moreover, also the following parameters are set to the default value (they are available at programming level 3 only for FOC and SLS
Control ):
Rotor Resistence
Stator Resistence
Rotor Leakage Induct
Stat Leakage Induct
Magnetizing Induct
(*)
Set Mag Curve V1
Set Mag Curve I1
Set Mag Curve V2
Set Mag Curve I2
Set Mag Curve V3
[03.01] = 1
[03.02] = 1
[03.03] = 1
[03.04] = 1
[03.05] = 1
[03.06] = 0
[03.07] = 0
[03.08] = 0
[03.09] = 0
[03.10] = 0
Set Mag Curve I3
Set Mag Curve V4
Set Mag Curve I4
Set Mag Curve V5
Set Mag Curve I5
[03.11] = 0
[03.12] = 0
[03.13] = 0
[03.14] = 0
[03.15] = 0
After changing parameter EU-NEMA Select [01.01] it is necessary to re-enter the Motor Rated Data, and to run the Self-Commissioning
procedure for FOC or Sensorless Control.
(*) Parameters from [03.06] to [03.15] are available for FOC control mode only.
18.2. Overload Class Select
Through parameter Ovl Class Select [06.08] (Class 1 as default value, available at programming level 3) it possible to select the
overload class of the drive; the following table shows the default settings for the current and power.
ATV1000 – Air Cooling
Model
Operation
Overload
(Load duty Class)
Standard Operation
(Freq = 5 - 70Hz)
no overload
(In )
235
1343
1173
1573
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
220
1257
1098
1472
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
170
972
848
1137
no overload
(In )
180
1029
898
1204
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
170
972
848
1137
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
135
772
674
904
ATV1K3A33
Extended Operation
(Freq = 5 - 140Hz)
Standard Operation
(Freq = 5 - 70Hz)
ATV1K8A33
Extended Operation
(Freq = 5 - 140Hz)
Standard Operation
(Freq = 5 - 70Hz)
ATV2K6A33
Extended Operation
(Freq = 5 - 140Hz)
Standard Operation
(Freq = 5 - 70Hz)
ATV3K6A33
(2 x 1K8)
Extended Operation
(Freq = 5 - 140Hz)
Standard Operation
(Freq = 5 - 70Hz)
ATV_5K2A33
(2 x 2K6)
Extended Operation
(Fmax = 5 - 140Hz)
Rated Output Current IUN (Arms)
no overload
(In )
340
1943
1697
2276
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
320
1829
1597
2142
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
250
1429
1247
1672
no overload
(In )
265
1515
1322
1773
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
250
1429
1247
1672
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
195
1115
973
1305
no overload
(In )
475
2715
2370
3178
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
450
2572
2245
3011
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
350
2001
1746
2341
no overload
(In )
370
2115
1846
2476
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
350
2001
1746
2341
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
275
1572
1372
1840
no overload
(In )
680
3887
3393
4550
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
640
3658
3194
4283
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
500
2858
2495
3346
no overload
(In )
530
3029
2645
3547
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
500
2858
2495
3346
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
390
2229
1946
2610
no overload
(In )
950
5430
4740
6356
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
900
5144
4491
6023
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
700
4001
3493
4684
no overload
(In )
740
4230
3693
4952
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
700
4001
3493
4684
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
550
3144
2744
3680
Table E.2.1
198
AN (kVA) PM (kW) PM (hP)
ATV1000 – Water Cooling
Model
Operation
Standard Operation
(Fmax = 70Hz)
ATV1K6W33
Extended Operation
(Fmax = 140Hz)
Standard Operation
(Fmax = 70Hz)
ATV2K4W33
Extended Operation
(Fmax = 140Hz)
Standard Operation
(Fmax = 70Hz)
ATV3K6W33
Extended Operation
(Fmax = 140Hz)
Standard Operation
(Fmax = 70Hz)
ATV4K8W33
(2 x 2K4)
Extended Operation
(Fmax = 140Hz)
Standard Operation
(Fmax = 70Hz)
ATV7K2W33
(2 x 3K6)
Extended Operation
(Fmax = 140Hz)
Standard Operation
(Fmax = 70Hz)
ATV10K8W33
(3 x 3K6)
Extended Operation
(Fmax = 140Hz)
Standard Operation
(Fmax = 70Hz)
ATV14K4W33
(4 x 3K6)
Extended Operation
(Fmax = 140Hz)
Overload
(Load duty Class)
Rated Output Current IUN
(Arms)
no overload
(In )
280
AN (kVA)
PM (kW)
1600
1397
PM (hP)
1873
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
260
1486
1297
1739
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
195
1115
973
1305
no overload
(In )
255
1458
1272
1706
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
245
1400
1223
1640
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
160
915
798
1070
no overload
(In )
420
2401
2096
2811
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
390
2229
1946
2610
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
290
1658
1447
1940
no overload
(In )
380
2172
1896
2543
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
370
2115
1846
2476
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
260
1486
1297
1739
no overload
(In )
630
3601
3144
4216
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
580
3315
2894
3881
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
430
2458
2146
2878
no overload
(In )
570
3258
2844
3814
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
550
3144
2744
3680
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
360
2058
1796
2408
no overload
(In )
840
4801
4191
5620
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
780
4458
3892
5219
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
580
3315
2894
3881
no overload
(In )
760
4344
3792
5085
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
740
4230
3693
4952
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
520
2972
2595
3480
no overload
(In )
1260
7202
6287
8431
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
1160
6630
5788
7762
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
860
4916
4291
5754
no overload
(In )
1140
6516
5688
7628
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
1100
6287
5489
7361
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
720
4115
3593
4818
no overload
(In )
1890
10803
9431
12647
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
1740
9945
8682
11643
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
1290
7373
6437
8632
no overload
(In )
1710
9774
8533
11443
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
1650
9431
8233
11041
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
1080
6173
5389
7227
no overload
(In )
2520
14404
12574
16862
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
2320
13261
11576
15524
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
1720
9831
8583
11510
no overload
(In )
2280
13032
11377
15257
110 % - cl 1
(In1)
2200
12575
10978
14722
150 % - cl 2
(In2)
1440
8231
7185
9635
Table E.2.2
NOTE:
−
−
−
−
Standard Operation: Switching Frequency 780Hz
Extended Operation: Switching Frequency 1kHz
An, equipment apparent power calculated by the formula: An = √3 * 3300V * In
Pn is an approximate value of the maximum motor power associated with each inverter size, it is calculated by the formula:
Pn = A n ∗ η mot ∗ cos ϕ mot
Under the assumptions: η mot
= 0,97 , cos ϕ mot = 0,90
199
Depending on the value of the Ovl Class Select [06.08] parameter, the default values shown in Table E.2.1 and E.2.2 are set:
Parameter
Unit
Motor Overload Lim [02.12]
Overload [66.02]
%
%
Current Threshold [34.01]
%
Description
Percent value of Mot Full Load Curr [02.06] (Drive Output Current Limit)
Percent value of Mot Full Load Curr [02.06] (Overload Protection)
Percent of the motor maximum current defined as [02.12] * [02.06]
(Threshold for Current Rollback V/Hz Control Mode)
Class 1
Class 2
110
110
150
150
100
100
Table E.3.3
Changing parameter Ovl Class Select [06.08 (after confirmation through dialog box) sets the default values of parameters:
Mot Full Load Curr [02.06],
Motor Power EU [02.01],
Motor Power NEMA [02.02] according to the tables listed above: Motor NoLoad Curr [02.07] = 1
Also the following parameters are set to their default value (available at programming level 3 only for FOC and SLS control):
Rotor Resistence
Stator Resistence
Rotor Leakage Induct
Stat Leakage Induct
Magnetizing Induct
[03.01] = 1
[03.02] = 1
[03.03] = 1
[03.04] = 1
[03.05] = 1
Set Mag Curve V1
Set Mag Curve I1
Set Mag Curve V2
Set Mag Curve I2
Set Mag Curve V3
[03.06] = 0 Set Mag Curve I3
[03.07] = 0 Set Mag Curve V4
[03.08] = 0 Set Mag Curve I4
[03.09] = 0 Set Mag Curve V5
[03.10] = 0 Set Mag Curve I5
[03.11] = 0
[03.12] = 0
[03.13] = 0
[03.14] = 0
[03.15] = 0
After changing parameter OVL CLASS Select [06.08] it is necessary to re-enter the Motor Rated Data, and to run the Self
Commissioning procedure for FOC or SLS Control.
18.3. Switching Frequency Change
The following table shows the Motor Full Load Current value, depending on the value of the Drive Switching Frequency. The switching
frequency value is selected through parameter Switching Frequency [06.12] (1 kHz as default, available at programming level 3) and
the switch SW3 on the modulator board (MODVEC). The possible settings are:
1 kHz (default)
780 Hz
Table E.3 Current derating versus switching frequency
DRIVE SIZE
1K6 W 33
2K4 W 33
3K6 W 33
4K8 W 33
7K2 W 33
10K8 W 33
14K4 W 33
1K3 A 33
1K8 A 33
2K6 A 33
3K6 A 33
5K2 A 33
200
NO OVERLOAD
1 kHz
780 kHz
CLASS 1
1 kHz
780 kHz
CLASS 2
1 kHz
780 kHz
255
380
570
760
1140
1710
2280
180
265
370
530
740
245
370
550
740
1100
1650
2200
170
250
350
500
700
160
260
360
520
720
1080
1440
135
195
275
390
550
280
420
630
840
1260
1890
2520
235
340
475
680
950
260
390
580
780
1160
1740
2320
220
320
450
640
900
195
290
430
580
860
1290
1720
170
250
350
500
700
19. Appendix F: Inverter Variables Refresh Time
19.1. Introduction
•
•
•
The table lists the refresh time for all the drive variables sent as output for Analog Output, Digital Output, Profibus and Trace.
F.3 describes the use of Fast Variables. These have to be used when a shorter refresh time is required.
19.2. Variables Refresh Time
The drive variables refresh times are shown in the following table.
Standard drive variables refresh time is shown in columns “Standard Condition”.
If required by the application it is possible to have a faster refresh time for the most important variables. This feature is obtained by the association to Fast Variables and in this case the refresh time is
shown in columns “Associated to Fast Variables“. Refer to paragraph F.3 for further details.
Drive Function
Variable Refresh Time [msec] – WORST CASE
ID#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
25 ÷ 48
201
Signal Name
Motor speed (V/Hz only encoder)
Direct current (Isd)
Quadrature current (Isq)
Motor current (Is)
Motor voltage (Us)
DC bus voltage (Vdc)
Motor power
Motor frequency
Main speed reference
Auxiliary speed reference
Additional speed reference
Speed demand (upstream ramp)
Speed demand (downstream ramp actuated by DSP)
Analog input voltage 1 (AI 1)
Analog input voltage 2 (AI 2)
Analog output (AO 1) command from network
Analog output (AO 2) command from network
Analog output (AO 3) command from network
Analog output (AO 4) command from network
Reference for external PID
Feedback for external PID
Output of external PID
Firing pulse enable state
Reserved
Profibus [tasktime 10 ms]
Associated
to Fast
Variable
NA
10
10
10
10
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Standard
Condition
(3)
10
100
100
100
10
10
100
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Analog Output [tasktime 1
ms]
Associated
Standard
to Fast
Condition
Variable
NA
1
NA
100
NA
100
NA
100
NA
10
NA
1
NA
100
NA
10
NA
10
NA
10
NA
10
NA
10
NA
10
NA
1
NA
1
NA
10
NA
10
NA
10
NA
10
NA
10
NA
10
NA
10
NA
NA
Trace [tasktime 2ms]
Associated
to Fast
Variable
NA
2
2
2
2
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Standard
Condition
2
100
100
100
10
2
100
10
10
10
10
10
10
2
2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
2
Availability
Digital Output [tasktime 100
ms]
Associated to
Standard
Fast Variable
Condition
NA
100
100
100
100
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
NA
FO
C
SLS
VH
Z
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
Modbus communication state (only for Modbus)
Limited torque reference
Unlimited torque reference
Total torque reference (output speed regulator + additional)
Estimated torque
Isd reference (Isd_Ref)
Isq reference (Isq_Ref)
Flying restart
Output Isd regulator (MonUsd_Ref)
Output Isq regulator (MonUsq_Ref)
Unfiltered motor speed (encoder only for V/Hz)
Torque upper limit (output speed regulator = TorqueMax)
Torque lower limit (output speed regulator = TorqueMin)
Torque upper limit (Ext. Ref. From special function)
Torque lower limit (Ext. Ref. From special function)
Flux reference
Evaluated stator flux (MonFis)
Evaluated rotor flux (MonPsimr)
Tension regulator reference
Tension regulator feedback
Tension regulator error
Tension regulator output
Cross rollback: speed reference correction
Step reference for calibration of regulators (StepOut)
Frequency reference corrected by the ramp lock regulators
Not used
Reserved
Encoder rpm
102÷103 Encoder rpm
104
Rotor Position
75÷100
101
105÷120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
202
Reserved
FieldNet Bitword: last protection/alarm coding
FieldNet Bitword: hardware trip (TripsHW)
FieldNet Bitword: software trip 1 (TripsSW 1)
FieldNet Bitword: Alarms
FieldNet Bitword: Terminal block status (TBStatus)
FieldNet Bitword: Auxiliary protection word (AuxTrip)
FieldNet Bitword: DI expansion board status
(SIOVAInputStatus)
FieldNet Bitword: Saturation regulator word (SatRegWord)
FieldNet Bitword: Echo back Command Word
(ExecCommand)
FieldNet Bitword: Drive Status Word (Status Word)
NA
10
10
10
10
10
10
NA
10
10
10
10
10
NA
NA
10
10
10
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
10
10
100
100
100
100
100
10
100
100
100 (1)
100
100
10
10
100
NA
100
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
10
100
100
100
100
100
NA
100
100
100 (1)
100
100
1
1
100
NA
100
10
10
10
10
10
10
1
NA
2
2
2
2
2
2
NA
2
2
2
2
2
NA
NA
2
2
2
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
10
10
100
100
100
100
100
2
100
100
100 (1)
100
100
2
2
100
NA
100
10
10
10
10
10
10
2
NA
100
100
100
100
100
100
NA
100
100
100
100
100
NA
NA
100
100
100
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
100
100
100
100
100
100
NA
100
100
100 (1)
100
100
100
100
100
NA
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
NA
100
NA
100
NA
100
NA
100
•
•
10
100
NA
100
10
100
10
100
•
•
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
≥10
≥10
≥10
≥10
≥10
≥10
≥10
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
≥2
≥2
≥2
≥2
≥2
≥2
≥2
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NA
NA
≥10
≥10
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
≥2
≥2
NA
NA
NA
NA
•
•
•
•
•
•
NA
≥10
NA
NA
NA
≥2
NA
NA
•
•
•
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
131
Note:
FieldNet Bitword: software trip2 (TripSW 2)
(1)
NA
≥10
NA
NA
NA
≥2
NA
NA
•
•
•
Not available for SLS
(2) NA = not available
(3) Modbus does not use Fast Variables. Refresh times are those associated with Profibus in column “Standard Condition”
19.3. Fast Variables Management
19.3.1. Standard Refresh Time
The drive variables refresh times are shown in the previous table. Standard variables refresh times are shown in columns “Standard Condition”.
However, the first eight variables selected (that can be associated to “Fast Variables” - see the previous table) will be updated faster. Refer to paragraph F.3.2.
19.3.2. Fast Refresh Time
The Fast Variables can be associated to the drive variables according to the previous table. When a variable is associated to a Fast Variable its refresh time is shown in the columns marked “Associated to
Fast Variable”.
The eight variables (that can be associated to “Fast Variables” - see previous table), selected within one of the following families:
Digital Output[08.00]; Trace[60.00];
Profibus [85.00]
are automatically handled as Fast Variables and their refresh times are also determined according to the previous table (column marked “Associated to Fast Variable”).
The variables selected after the first eight have a standard refresh time.
Activation of Fast Variables is made in chronological order. A Fast Variable is active when a variable listed in the previous table is selected within one of the followings families: Profibus [85.00]; Trace
[60.00] and Digital Output [08.00] (for threshold function).
A Fast Variable becomes inactive when a variable listed in the previous table is de-selected within one of the previous families.
When all eight Fast Variables are active, the other variables, selected for one of the above mentioned families, will be updated at the refresh time indicated in the columns marked “Standard Condition”.
If all Fast Variables are selected and the user wants to replace a variable associated to a Fast Variable with another one, the following steps must be made:
de-select the Fast Variables no longer required;
select the new variable.
Fast Variables are available only at programming level #3.
Example: The configuration of Fast Variables can be done as follows.
203
Selecting Fast Variables in the monitors
In this situation all Fast Variables are de-selected.
Selecting a variable as Fast Variable
For example, if the user wants to have variable #2 Quadrature Current Isq for Profibus available at a refresh time of 10ms (i.e.: associated to a Fast Variable) instead of 100ms, he/she must proceed as
follows:
Fast Variable 1 is
Select one opzd
automatically associated
as Quadrature
to Quadrature Current Isq
Current Isq #2
#2 that becomes
therefore available at a
refresh time of 10 ms
De-Selecting a variable from a Fast Variable
When the user de-selects variable #2, Quadrature Current Isq for Profibus, Fast Variable #1 becomes automatically inactive:
De-select the
Fast Variable 1
becomes inactive
opzd Quadrature
Current Isq #2
automatically.
Parameter families Digital Output and Trace can be handled in the same manner.
204
20. Appendix G: Menu System Flow Chart
The drive configuration is obtained by setting parameters that are organized in a structure referred to as “Menu System”. The menu system allows the operators to navigate through menus, sub-menus and
parameters. The Flow Chart lists all of the families available for programming levels 1, 2 and 3.
HELP
(0)
SHIFT
Start display with
version# (P0300)
Speed Menu
Function
Motor display
Programmable
Help Menu
(0)
On-line help can be accessed from any menu
(using Shift (0) to provide a test description of the
current menu, parameter, pick list or function.
Pressing Shift (0) from the meter display has no effect
Other menus Assemble
using Menu Number
Enter Desidered
Parameter Number
SHIFT
Main menu
(5)
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT
205
Motor
1
Drive
2
Stab
3
Auto
4
Motor Menu
(MOT.01)
Drive Menu
(DRI.02)
Stability Menu
(STA.03)
Auto Menu
(AUT.04)
Cancel
Enter
Cancel
Enter
Cancel
Enter
Cancel
Enter
Main settings
(P0100)
Motor Data
(P0200)
Motor
Parameters
(P0300)
V/Hz Settings
(P0400)
Drive data
(P0600)
Digital output
cfg (P0200)
Analog input
config (P0900)
Analog output
conf(P1000)
Standard
Macro En
(P1100)
Application
Macro En
(P1200)
Expansion
boards(P1300)
Vector Ctrl
Reg (P1700)
Low Freq
Stability
(P1800)
Speed demand
Setup (P2200)
Torque ref/Lim
set (P2300)
Drooping
(P2400)
HOA PSS
Function
(P2500)
Auto On/Off
(P2600)
External
PID(P2700)
Pope
(P2800)
Crane control
(P3000)
Helper
(P3100)
Tension
(P3200)
Critical speed
skip (P3300)
Curr Lim
Rollback
(P3400)
VDC Rollback
(P3500)
Flying Restart
(P3600)
Tuning speed
reg (P3800)
Tuning Flux or
Isd (P3900)
Motor
Potentiometer
(P4000)
Setup dig input
exp 1 (P4100)
Setup dig input
exp 2 (P4200)
Setup dig input
DPLCV
(P4300)
Setup dig
output exp 1
(P4400)
AND function
(P4500)
OR function
(P4600)
VDC Undervolt
(P4700)
DC braking
(P4800)
QUICK START
UP (P4900)